Home

DVD Architect Pro 6.0 User Manual

1. Editing toolbar Workspace The Wayfaring Stranger dar DVD Architect Pro 6 0 ba ba e Menu bar P File Edit View Insert Options Help Toolbar p 2288 f a gt amp R 9 Preview 9 make J ceecee A x B Sa ia G Q Auto ceecee x spy say Properties The Wayfaring Stranger dar a re Color Sets eS 1stplayl oe X position 230 8 Ed 1stplay2 Y position 66 2 Ed 1stplay3 24p X size 309 1 5 Main Menu Y size 30 6 Project overvie Main Menu Page 1 E 1 SongVideo 5 2 Options Chapters 3 Options Chapters Page 1 Chapter Select 2 Enable Disable Suk 5 Enable Disable S G9 1 Link Optir G 2 Link Enab G 3 Link Enab G 4 Link Sonc 3 Link Main Menu A 4 Alternate Audio Y Auto Bl 7 2E i WN HD E Edit Text Maintain aspect ratio Yes Show before loop point No Chapter Select P tr G 1 Link Song G9 2 Link Song oo 3 Link Sone Properties G 4 Link Sonc G 5 Link Opti win d OW Text editing bar ara 4 ho eale al PR 00 00 00 00 aad j00 01 59 26 100 03 59 22 100 05 59 19 gG o ebslseloofolelololofelelollboror Window docking aaa Timeline Audio Ei area Timeline Playlists Saving and recalling window layouts Ctrl Alt D or Alt D Compilation qu gt gt E DVD Scripts 00 00 00 00 00
2. ccc c cece cence eee eee nee eenas 95 Changing subtitle track COONS cerssesrsentossretid inisa trir eid bad IEKE rC RERS beware wiveee 95 MPE DOEN eaa EE E AANE 95 Using Masks Menus and Themes ccc cece cece eee e eee e ence cece eeeeeeeees 97 Creating CUSTOM MlaSKS lt o 40csis2csce acts wicaeacoen etwas econ ESEU NENNE 97 TOMOR SRS aces ngecee asec ogee tunes a4 es A A E asin E EA 98 FIAMe MASKS co aacaavaccosaconacaesoeGasracaunounasraceadaawaaneesacetuastseaeapaceqnaeta es 99 PUNO MIE MNASK Srsa0 ote So eue ha aiid wae nade ee A AEE AE asanepetednenacaws 100 Creating custom menus and buttons using layered graphics 0cc eee eees 102 Naming requirements for layers ccc ccc ccc cee eee e eee eee e eee eee eee eeeenes 102 Creating a layered psd MENU cc ccc ccc cece cee e nent ene e eee e eens eeeneeeeees 103 Creating custom menus and buttons using single layer graphics 0ee eens 106 VVOUKING WII CMEMNGS saad 06 Gas a8 Got nbantansecomesieminawedeaneues ANIS 108 Applying themes sssressrrssererrariri titit eter aaeas awe ete siness se eeiutn ENAA EENS 108 Applying atheme s alignment to Menu objects cece cece eee eee e tne eeeeee 108 Pacing 4 PCIE a E T eases ndusoe senekerusonecesubesaeneeoeuee ed 108 Creating CUSTOM thEMES 0 14 0 20 060s0n0ceboseenrebemewnestensetetsateuseeeessotens et 108 Exporting MENU AS ATNEME cece cece cece cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eeees 110 Learni
3. and choose Stretch to Fit 6 Add buttons to the menu anp From the Insert menu choose Empty Button Select the Sizing tool click the new button s default text label and press Delete Using the Sizing tool drag the empty button rectangle and drop it over a button image in your menu background Drag the edges of the empty button with the Sizing tool or use the controls on the Transformations page of the Button Properties pane to resize the empty button so the entire button image is contained within the empty button s rectangle Note f the button image extends beyond the empty button rectangle button highlighting will be applied only to the portion of the button within the rectangle Click the Action button at the top of the Button Properties window and choose a menu or title from the Destination drop down to set the button s target Note f the title you want to use as a destination isn t part of your project yet you can drag a media file from the Explorer window to the root of the Project Overview window to add it to your project without creating a button in the current menu 7 Repeat step 6 for each menu button 8 Remove the default button highlighting a b C d Apply your menu highlight mask Select all the buttons in the workspace Hold Ctrl or Shift while click to select multiple objects Click the Highlight button at the top of the Button Properties pane Choose Custom from the Style drop
4. 5 Select the color you want to edit Item Description Fill color Use to display subtitle text and highlighting on menu buttons Anti alias color Used to smooth the edges of menu button highlighting and subtitle text The color should be a blend of the fill color and the outline background color Outline Background color Used to display the outline or background color for menu buttons or subtitle text Transparency color Used to determine the transparent portions of subtitle text and menu button highlighting 6 Click the drop down arrow next to the selected color swatch to display a color picker where you can edit the selected color Click the Change Color Space button EI to switch between RGB and HSL color modes Note f you choose an out of gamut color while using the color picker then a warning is displayed Click the color swatch below the warning to correct the color 44 CHAPTER 4 Applying color sets You can apply color sets to buttons using the Selected button colors Active button colors and Inactive button colors drop down lists in the Menu Page Properties pane For more information see Color Sets on page 125 To apply color sets to subtitles select the events you want to change click the Subtitle Event button in the Media and Subtitle pane and choose a color set from the Colors drop down list Changing an object s size Resizing an object 1 Select a button graphic or text box with the Sizing tool 4
5. 1 Right click a media file in the Explorer window 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit Source Project An ACID Vegas or Sound Forge window will open with the source project If you are editing a source project using a computer other than the computer where the project was created then the editing computer must meet the following requirements e The software that was used to create the project must be installed and the project file extension acd acd zip veg vf or frg must be registered on the editing computer e The editing computer must have the same version or later of the software as the computer where the project was created e The project file must exist on the editing computer using the same file path as on the computer where the project was created e The project s source media must exist on the editing computer If the media files do not use the same file path as on the computer where the project was created you will be prompted to choose a new folder or replacement files 3 Edit the project as necessary 4 Render the edited project using the same name as the original media file and close the editing application Note f you are editing an existing title your project will automatically be updated with the latest rendered media file 32 CHAPTER 3 Saving your project When you save your work it is saved in a project file dar Project files are not rendered media files 1 ad From the File m
6. 2 Click the Transformations button on the Properties window and drag the object s handles or type values in the X size and Y size boxes to achieve the desired size 3 If you do not want an image to be stretched when you change the height or width select the Maintain aspect ratio box click the down arrow button and choose Yes Tip Ifyou are resizing a text box and you want the text to automatically adjust to fit the box choose Auto from the Font Size drop down list Making all selected objects the same height or width 1 Select the objects you want to adjust Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple objects 2 While holding the Ctrl or Shift key select the object whose size you want to copy 3 Click the Make Same Width or Make Same Height i button All selected objects are adjusted so they match the object that has focus the last object you selected Note f you resize an object in one direction only the object will not resize if Maintain aspect ratio is set to Yes on the Transformations page of the Properties window because the image cannot be resized in one direction and still maintain its aspect ratio You can turn off the Maintain aspect ratio setting or resize the object in both directions Cropping and adjusting video and graphics Use the Crop and Adjust window to crop a video or graphic or adjust its appearance You can set these changes to occur over time through the use of keyframes The window include
7. Choose a new setting from the Destination drop down list TROUBLESHOOTING 211 212 APPENDIX D Appendix E Glossary Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM A Law A compounded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in United States telecommunications A Law is very similar to u Law however each uses a Slightly different coder and decoder Alpha Channel The alpha channel determines how transparency is handled in a file TGA and TIF image files commonly have an Alpha channel that is automatically detected by DVD Architect Pro software Analog When discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time Audio Compression Manager ACM The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for aud
8. Select the control click the down arrow button and choose a setting to indicate the default frame size of your project e 720x480 e 720x576 e 1280x720 e 1440x1080 e 1920x1080 SETTING PROJECT PROPERTIES 143 Item Description Frame rate Select the control click the down arrow button l and choose a setting to indicate Progressive the default frame rate for your project The television frame rate in the US North and Central America parts of South America and Japan NTSC is 29 970 frames per second fps In many parts of the world including Europe and much of Asia the television standard is PAL at 25 000 fps France Russia and most of Eastern Europe use SECAM which is a variation on PAL and also uses 25 000 fps Indicates whether the selected frame rate is a progressive scan format Audio defaults Displays the default audio settings for your project You can use the controls below Audio format the Audio defaults row to adjust the settings that will be used for audio that will be recompressed You can select a title and use the Audio settings in the Optimize Disc dialog to choose distinct recompression settings for each media file For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 Select the control click the down arrow button and choose a setting to indicate Bit rate AC 3 only the format whether you want to use PCM stereo audio AC 3 Stereo audio or AC 3 5 1 sur
9. THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 115 Action The controls on the Action page determine what happens when a user selects a button on your menu Tip Use the Set audio track and Set subtitle track controls to create language selection menus Item Command Destination Destination chapter Destination item Destination button Set audio track Set subtitle track 116 CHAPTER 11 Description Determines the button s behavior Link You can link to any menu media file and chapter point Use the Destination Destination chapter Destination item or Destination button controls to set the target e Stop The button will halt playback of the current title e Resume The button will resume playback of the current title from the point when a Menu button was selected If the title specified in the Destination control is not the last title played playback will begin at the start When Link is selected in the Command drop down list choose the menu title playlist or DVD script that will be displayed when the button is activated When Resume is selected in the Command drop down list choose the video picture compilation or music video compilation that will resume playback when the button is activated Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects When your button links to a video music video compilation picture compilation or playlist choose the specific chapter that will be displayed When your button l
10. cc cece cece eee eee e ene e nent eee e eee eee ee eeeees 189 GENEI ONN 2 csacicucucatcruteccsaateroientiastaeusen eis E E T A ES 190 Inserting Objects and titles 2 ccc cece ee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeees 190 Timeline WINKOW 2 1 ccc ccc cee eee e eee e eben been eee eennaes 190 PRC VIC see cet oa en ea eee are oe eee a ee eee ee ee eee eas 191 Mouse SHONCU 1c e cddonnanamenteenned eeqred EA EE ahed pews gemedeeeenceuumebeetess 191 Rendering Files for Your Project ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e ene ee eeeeneenes 193 Bluray DISC DIOlCCls psearers scene desea ATEISTA nase nee peee A E E 193 DVD niro a e EE E E SE E E E E EEE P ETE EE T TAT 196 Using a Multimedia Controller 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eee e eee e cece eeeeeees 199 Contour ShuttlePro default settings 0 ccc cece cece cece eee eee n ee eeeeeeeeees 199 Contour ShuttleXpress formerly SpaceShuttle default settings 0008 200 Navigating the timeline with a ShuttlePro or ShuttleXpress ccc eee ee eee 200 Navigating the timeline with a PowerMate or other controller 0008 200 WOUD NOONG lt 4 jonas wero ois anon weds ot eevee oats sanawe E EE 201 UES CRADLE lays E eas E sdapes aces tena teee iene tae E EE T 201 EVO messag erraren ne nebo nubot wens A me aae rash emake nanan REE 201 WARMING IMGSSAGeS ca tenievenaaereupnsereiee redae pean edesseaecs eda te eeeoe riser eta 206 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 10 TAB
11. Auto Levels Automatically adjusts the brightness and contrast based on the contents of the selection box The most abundant colors either light or dark are enhanced Auto Levels Dark Automatically adjusts the brightness and contrast based on the contents of the selection box The least abundant colors either light or dark are enhanced Auto Level Channels Automatically adjusts brightness and contrast per channel based on the contents of the selection box Adjustment is performed independently on each color channel Increase Brightness Increases the brightness of the image Decrease Brightness Decreases the brightness of the image Increase Contrast Center Adjusts the anchor point around which green contrast is adjusted Decrease Contrast Center Adjusts the anchor point around which green contrast is adjusted Copy Crop Rectangle to Clipboard Copies the current selection to the clipboard Paste Crop Rectangle from Clipboard Pastes the current selection from the clipboard Bypass Effects on Regions Creates a split screen preview that bypasses all video effects without removing them from your media By clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the button you can choose which portion of the preview will display bypassed effects Lock Aspect Ratio Click if you want the selection box to retain its aspect ratio during resizing When this button is not selected the height and width can be resized independently
12. O close QA BB Hoh T Tie 4 3 Chapter 4 Looped position 00 00 30 10 Elapsed time 00 00 30 10 Video Track il Audio Track 1 Subtitle Track None 3 Disc Space Used 104 3MB Preview toolbar E Close Close Preview Closes the Preview E Copy to Clipboard Allows you to copy to window the clipboard m Preview on External Monitor Allows you DVD Script Debugger Allows you to to preview your project on an external debug your DVD script monitor device FR Stretch Preview to Window Stretches the High Preview Quality Allows you to change the preview to the full viewing window preview quality pi View Safe Areas Displays the Title Safe and Action Safe areas in the Preview window PREVIEWING PROJECTS 163 Previewing your project To ensure that your project looks just the way you intended it you can preview your DVD Architect Pro project on a simulated television screen with a virtual remote control 1 Click the drop down arrow next to the Preview button Preview on the main toolbar to choose a preview mode Preview Mode Description Preview Current Starts the preview with the current page Preview Disc Starts the preview at the beginning of your disc including any introductory media The preview window is displayed 2 Use the Preview Quality button to set your playback quality Note Decreasing the preview quality can allow you to preview your project when your computer cannot
13. The estimated total size of all menus is close to the maximum The total size of all menus cannot exceed 1 GB Your project s estimated menu size is close to the limit and your project may fail during preparation Deleting background images and audio from your menus may help you conserve space The extra content folder is invalid The Extras folder specified on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog does not exist This error can occur if you move delete or rename the folder after setting your project properties The loop length of a menu is shorter than the minimum recommended length The length of a menu in your project is shorter than the recommended length of five seconds when looping is enabled Navigate to the menu and expand the Menu Page Properties controls Perform one of the following procedures to resolve the error e Choose Auto calculate from the Menu length drop down list e Choose Specify from the Menu length drop down list and type a different value in the Length box e Change the menu s end action to Hold 208 APPENDIX D The menu or title is orphaned and not reachable This can occur when you add a menu video picture compilation or music video compilation that is not linked 1 Navigate to the menu from which you want to link to the menu or title From the Insert menu choose Empty Button 3 Click the expand button l next to the Button Properties heading to expand the Button Propertie
14. When the laser reaches the end of the first layer it must move back to the inner radius and then refocus on the second layer e Opposite track path Read from the inner radius of the disc to the outer radius on the first layer and from the outer radius to the inner radius of the second layer Parallel track path Opposite track path Notes e This setting is available only when the specified number of layers is 2 The first layer is always read from the inner radius of the disc to the outer radius Allows you to choose the physical diameter of the mastered DVD This field allows you to adjust the number of sectors on the DVD ROM to match manufacturing requirements Click in the field and move the slider left or right to decrease or increase the sector capacity Allows you to include or omit optional customer information which can be included with mastering output e Content owner The owner or copyright holder of the media contained on the disc e Content category Type up to eight letters to identify the contents of the disc e Disc ID Type a unique identifier for the disc This ID is for use by the content owner and can use any format e Title name The title of the disc e Customer Information about the customer for whom the disc is being produced e Authoring studio Information about the studio that created the contents of the disc Disc set number If the disc is from a multidisc collection use this setting to iden
15. t match your project s aspect ratio the image will extend beyond the screen e Stretch to fit The background is stretched horizontally and vertically to fill the menu If the aspect ratio of the image doesn t match your project s aspect ratio the image will be distorted A menu s end action determines what happens at the end of the menu if a user doesn t select a button Item Command Timeout Button Remote Buttons Description Determines what happens after the menu plays once Loop The menu will play continuously repeating playback from the loop point until the user activates another button Menu buttons are not displayed until playback reaches the loop point If you want the menu to loop smoothly ensure the background video length matches the menu length e Hold The menu will play once and then display a static menu until the user activates another button e Activate button The button you specify will be activated after the time set by the Timeout control has passed if the user hasn t activated another button You can use this setting to automatically stop or resume playback or display another menu page or title if the user doesn t choose another action within a set time When Activate button is selected in the Command drop down list the button you choose will be activated if the user doesn t choose another action before the timeout duration has passed To change the duration select the box and type a new se
16. 2 If necessary click the Selection tool or Sizing tool 4 in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace click the text box and use the text bar to edit your text properties e Choose a font from the drop down list to set the typeface for your text e Choose a font size from the drop down list Choose Auto to have the text automatically adjust to fit the size of the text box e Click the Bold 8 Italic 7 or Shadow buttons to toggle your font effects as desired e Set your text justification options as desired For more information see Text bar Alt 2 on page 16 e Click the down arrow next to the color swatch button EE to display the color picker where you can set the red green blue and alpha channels for your text Editing text 1 Select a song in the Compilation window 2 If necessary click the Selection tool or Sizing tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace click the text box and choose Edit Text from the Edit menu or press F2 The text becomes editable 4 Edit the text as necessary 5 Press one of the following keys to commit your text changes gt F2 e Ctrl Enter e Tab Moving text 1 Select a song in the Compilation window 2 If necessary click the Selection tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace drag the text box to the desired location or click Transformations in t
17. 52 layered menu graphics 102 Limit number of undo buffers to 0 to 9999 185 Link command type 154 Link GPRM command type 154 linking a series of videos 83 linking titles to chapter markers 78 loading markers 78 loop point for menus 122 Main toolbar 14 main window components 13 overview 13 toolbar 14 manual scene selection menus 41 markers deleting 77 linking to titles 78 loading 78 moving 77 renaming 77 saving 78 snapping to I frames 77 INDEX iii masks applying to menus 123 mastering files 172 preferences 187 project properties 148 Mastering output folder 187 media files adding to projects 27 choosing 27 downloading from Web 27 end actions 128 introduction media 28 preparing for DVD Architect Pro software 25 previewing 27 properties 50 recompression 29 media properties audio 128 color sets 130 general 127 media files 50 remote buttons 129 track media 128 video 128 menu page properties background media 122 color sets 125 editing 121 end actions 124 general 121 remote buttons 124 menu based discs adding music video compilations 61 adding picture compilations 67 adding playlists 83 adding single movie titles 75 menus adding buttons 43 adding music video compilations 38 adding pages 36 adding picture compilations 37 adding single movie titles 38 adding submenus 35 adding submenus from file 36 aligning objects 55 applying highlight mas
18. Onthe Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to remove 3 Click Remove The button is removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and will not appear on the toolbar Tip You can also double click a button to remove it from the toolbar 4 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and exit the dialog Setting DVD Architect Pro preferences The preferences options are different from project properties Project properties are unique to each project while preferences affect how the software functions Any changes that you make to the preferences remain set until you change them again or reset to use the default presets You can access the Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains six tabs General Video Video Device Editing Display Preview Burning and Mastering The following sections explain the settings on each tab General tab The General tab includes a variety of settings and allows you to specify general user options Preference Description Show logo splash screenon Select this check box to briefly show the DVD Architect Pro logo while the program is startup loading The logo does not increase loading time Use Microsoft DV Reader Select this check box to use the Microsoft DV codec for displaying and rendering DV This option can help resolve problems viewing DV Double clicking files in Select this check box to automatically realign objects according to the c
19. The Make DVD wizard is displayed 2 Click the Burn button The Select Prepare Folder page is displayed 3 Choose the location where you want to prepare your project or the location of an already prepared or mastered project that you want to burn Note You can only prepare to a folder that is empty or a folder that you have previously prepared to Option Current project Previously prepared folder Previously mastered folder 4 Click the Next button 168 CHAPTER 16 Description Select the Current project radio button and type the path to the folder where you want to prepare your project in the Prepare Burn folder box or click Browse to choose a folder If you ve previously prepared the project the Smart prepare section will display the estimated percentage of the project that has not been changed and that can be reused If you want to turn off smart prepare and prepare the entire project perform the following steps 1 Click the Advanced button The Smart Prepare Options dialog is displayed 2 Clear the Enable smart prepare check box 3 Click the OK button to continue Tip Smart prepare technology can drastically reduce project preparation times if you need to edit a portion of your project When you reprepare your project only the portions of the project that have changed will be prepared Select the Previously prepared folder radio button and type the path to the folder that contains a prepared project in th
20. Tip You can also change the audio by dragging a new audio file from the Explorer window to the Audio box or to a slide in the Compilation window THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 137 Item Description Stretch type Select the box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate how the image will be scaled to fit the screen e Letterbox The image fills the width of the menu and black letterboxing bars are displayed above and below or to the right and left as needed Zoom to fit The image is magnified to fill the screen If the aspect ratio of the image doesn t match your project s aspect ratio the image will extend beyond the screen e Stretch to fit The image is stretched horizontally and vertically to fill the screen If the aspect ratio of the image doesn t match your project s aspect ratio the image will be distorted Orientation To rotate the video for the selected song select the box click the down arrow button _ and choose a setting from the menu Tip Click the Rotate Clockwise 3 and Rotate Counterclockwise buttons in the Compilation window Color Sets You can use the Color Sets controls in the Properties window to adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle text You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every title in your project and each title in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each col
21. cancel 3 Inthe Select Titles dialog choose the titles that you want to include in your playlist and then click OK A button is added to the current menu as a link to the playlist 4 To control which starting chapter audio track and subtitle track are played when each title is played use the Playlist Properties pane For more information see Playlist Properties on page 139 Adding a playlist without a link You have the ability to add a playlist to your project without adding a menu link You can use this method to build your playlist and then you can add buttons to your project when you are ready to link to the playlist 1 Perform one of the following actions e Inthe Project Overview window click the Insert Object button 52 and choose Playlist e Click the Insert Playlist button 4 on the Playlists window toolbar e Right click in the Project Overview window and choose Insert Playlist from the shortcut menu 2 Inthe Select Titles dialog choose the titles that you want to include in your playlist and then click OK CREATING PLAYLISTS 83 3 To control which starting chapter audio track and subtitle track are played when each title is played use the Playlist Properties For more information see Playlist Properties on page 139 Adding titles to a playlist 1 Double click a playlist in the Project Overview window or choose a playlist from the drop down list at the top of the Playlists window to op
22. compilation in the Optimize Disc dialog and use the controls in the Recompress settings section to override the default video format The audio will not be recompressed if it is rendered in any compliant audio format If the audio requires recompression it will be recompressed using the project audio format You can select a picture compilation in the Optimize Disc dialog and use the controls in the Recompress settings section to override the default audio format Using the Optimize Disc dialog to fine tune your project To display the Optimize Disc dialog choose Optimize Disc from the File menu Each menu and title in your project is displayed on the left side of the dialog with the estimated size of each item and an indication of whether the item will be recompressed Optimize Disc Name Estimated Size E Main Menu 0 5 MB eas OptionsChapters 0 5 MB E Chapter Select 0 5 MB H Enable Disable 5S 0 5 MB E Altermate Audio 0 5 MB E Extras 0 5 MB Eal 1stplay 2 MB Eal 1stplay2 4 6 ME Eal 1stplay3 24p 2 a ME Eal Songrideo 37 7 MB A Band Photos 34 4 ME Jd Music Compilatio 19 5 MB General Video 1 Audio 1 9044 0000008 bekeek AAAA R ia Disc format DWD Video MPEG 2 4 3 720480 29 97 Estimated size 104 0 MB 3 0 of 4 700 GB medial sete PLS ienas STE 80 In Default video bitrate Mbps lt 3 000 Project Properties Fit to Disc Lo Cancel Adjusting video recompression settings 1 Sel
23. e b ser Manual e 2 SONY make believe E SF J E SE Ee oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe oe M E PL PLP PAAPAA A A i ee oe oe oe il tel be tel tel tel te ed ee ee ee ee E a PPP tl tel tl ss ep ee 6 6 8008 08 60 4 8 8 j 5 5 e bd d d d ad d 4 ad b r r Pe oe ee a ee ee oe oe Pe e088 fhe P r 5 r e oe ee ee oe ee ee PP of s e 5 E Pe ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee P PF of el P e gt _ o Ld a d a a a 4 F 4 4 Pid oe ee By La ba ix d ia Lu 2A d X ee E A P PPP Pd tal el T ee PP ad PPP Pd pl et PP Ff a r i PAP bl A et PP Pl hl arar PPP el el PP el a a 5 PPP a PPP tl a el PPP el tl tl el PP el oe PAP el el PP T bal el el PPP el td PP el hl bl Pl PPP hl tl Pl tl bal Pl el PPP el bel tel Pl tt od Bt el PPP hl tl el PP Pd tl bal Pal Pel PPP Pl al tel Pl PPP el tel Sa h hr PPP al tl el Pl el bag Dal Pal Pl Pa PPP hl tel Pl Pl hl T bal Pl PPP tl tel PPP el T el PPP el el PPP el brr PPP hl et PP ed el bal Pal Pe PPP hl bel pel hl hl Sa el PPP hl hd el PPP hl el T bal Pel PPP el pel el PP hl hol T bl PPP Pl hl bel el Pl hl et S e pal Pe PP PP ed hl ted PPP ed he PPPS hl eh PP hl Ta PPP dl tl PPS ll a Pe PPP ll oe Pe PP Pl hel PPP bl el Pe Pe PPS Ta et PP Pd el ee P PPP PP Pd el et Pe PP Pf Ta haf E A PEA A o 7 2 4 8 w PP Pd a ed Pe A PP PF Pd he ee pe Pe Pe PP PP Pl hd pe pe ee Pl a PP bd ee
24. strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Macromedia Flash Macromedia and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macromedia Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft DirectX programming interface Portions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright 1999 2004 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media Technologies Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media Technologies Copyright 1999 2007 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved PNG file format Copyright 2004 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathe matics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 20021231 Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunh
25. using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz will produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording GLOSSARY 215 Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers Peak Data File The file created when a file is opened for the first time This file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost instantaneous in direct edit mode This file is stored in the directory that the file resides in and has a sfk extension If this file is not in the same directory as the file or is deleted it will be recalculated the next time you open the file Pixel Aspect The pixel aspect determines whether the pixels are square 1 0 which refers to computers or rectangular settings other than 1 000 which typically refers to televisions The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio Ruler Tags Small tab shaped controls above the time ruler that represent the location of markers and loop points in the timeline Ruler Time The time ruler is the area on the timeline above the tracks that shows the horizontal axis units Sample Rate The sample rate also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz p
26. 08 35 10 00 08 35 10 3 Disc Space Used 104 3MB A window layout stores the sizes and positions of all windows and floating window docks in the DVD Architect Pro workspace You can store up to ten window layouts so you can quickly recall customized layouts for specific editing tasks For more information see Saving and recalling window layouts on page 179 Main window components The work area is divided into four primary areas and is described in the following table Component Project Overview window Workspace Properties window Window docking area Description Where you assemble your project and can see the big picture Where you edit menus and pages Where you edit properties for media and objects in your project Where you find media themes buttons and backgrounds and perform timeline editing on playlists compilations scripts and titles in your project LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 13 You can resize these sections by dragging the dividers between them or by pressing F11 Press Description F11 Shift F11 Properties windows Ctrl F11 windows Toolbar Minimizes and restores the docking area at the bottom of the window Maximizes and restores the left and right docking areas Project Overview and Minimizes and restores the window docking area Project Overview and Properties The main toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features To specify whic
27. 184 2 Click the Preview on External Monitor button in the Video Preview window You can turn off external preview by clicking the secondary display and pressing Esc 3 To end the preview and return to the main window click the Close button E Close Previewing video on an external monitor via IEEE 1394 You can send video directly from the timeline to a television monitor With this feature you can make your final editing decisions on a broadcast monitor which differs significantly from a computer monitor before preparing or burning your project To use an external monitor you must have the following e OHCl compliant IEEE 1394 DV card e DV camcorder or DV to analog converter While configuring your computer for DV external monitor previewing is not difficult the setup may require some troubleshooting The Sony Creative Software Inc forum is a good resource for peer to peer system troubleshooting http www sonycreativesoftware com forums Hardware setup The diagram below shows the preferred setup for sending video to an external television monitor Video to camcorder Analog to television Television monitor Audio to speakers Speakers PREVIEWING PROJECTS 165 The video conforms to DV format and feeds through the 1394 card to the DV device camcorder or DV to analog media converter The DV device sends analog output to the television monitor Note The DV device must support pass through in ord
28. 184 Video tab 183 Preferred graphics editor 183 preparing Blu ray Disc projects 175 DVDs 167 168 media files for DVD Architect Pro software 25 Preview preferences 186 previewing media files 27 on external video monitors 164 on secondary Windows displays 165 projects 164 Project Overview window 14 projects adding media files 27 adjusting audio recompression 31 adjusting project wide recompression settings 32 adjusting video recompression 30 burning Blu ray Disc projects 175 176 burning DVDs 168 170 choosing media files 27 creating 25 mastering 172 menu based 35 music video compilations 61 opening 26 optimizing 29 32 picture compilations 67 preparing Blu ray Disc projects 175 preparing DVDs 167 168 previewing 164 previewing on external video monitors 164 properties 143 150 saving 33 saving copies 33 single movie 75 summary information 149 workspace 15 properties buttons 115 120 media files 50 picture compilations 131 134 projects 143 150 INDEX V video events 89 Properties window 20 recompression 29 region codes 147 186 regions using to create subtitles 93 remote control buttons turning off 124 removing statements from script 153 renaming markers 77 Scripts 156 replacing audio files 62 in tracks 88 replacing images in picture compilations 68 replacing images or videos in music video compilations 63 resizing objects 45 Resume command type 154 rotatin
29. 6 44 4 254 20058ennsdnns ade edee iene pied eeeseesendestsdesiees 26 Choosing your Media files ccc ccc cece cee e ene e eee eee eeeeeeeenees 27 Downloading media from the Web cece ccc cee eee eee e enn e eee eee eeennees 27 Previewing media files sererrerisreirririiesii diere tee eueeeuee tees e teeta puss e 27 Adding files to your PIOJOCt cacverccddiacedaidindidae ahdiersd devel saa eeansvakiuseidaseaein 27 Setting the disc start teM ccc cc cee eee eee e eee EEEE 28 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Adding introduction first play media ccc cece ccc eee eee eee e eee eeeenes 28 Setting your project properties ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeenees 28 Optimizing your PLOJeCt 6 kk cece eee eee eee eee eee e seen ee eeneeeees 29 Determining whether menus and titles are compliant 0 0 cece cece e cece eee e ees 29 Using the Optimize Disc dialog to fine tune your project cece eee ence e ee nnes 30 Editing a media file s source project 2 ccc ccc ccc eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeees 32 SaviliG YOUN DIOlECl 22 2nstecchsenaeteoneocesccauecanwadene hoes heararecesitecekcens 33 Saving a copy of your project Save AS ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eee eeeeeees 33 Creating a Menu Based Project cece cece eneeeeeeaaes 35 BUIGING MENUS i540 6 n cviwnpadeniaeenorewnsse arrai anaa we beeen ede wasn diwadatwhe ken 35 Adding a submenNU serere estar dais we ware oe Gr ee ee ee eee ese o
30. AE Prepare the current project to a specified folder Burn Dym A Prepare the current project and burn it to a disc or burn a previously prepared vax project Write Master ZA Prepare the current project and create mastering files to be sent to an authoring facility or create mastering files from a previously prepared project 2 Click the Prepare button The Select Prepare Folder page is displayed 3 Inthe Prepare folder box type the path to the folder where you want to prepare your project or click Browse to choose a folder Note You can only prepare to a folder that is empty or a folder that you have previously prepared to 4 fyou ve previously prepared the project the Smart prepare section will display the estimated percentage of the project that has not been changed and that can be reused If you want to turn off smart prepare and prepare the entire project perform the following steps a Click the Advanced button The Smart Prepare Options dialog is displayed b Clear the Enable smart prepare check box c Click the OK button to continue Tip Smart prepare technology can drastically reduce project preparation times if you need to edit a portion of your project When you reprepare your project only the portions of the project that have changed will be prepared d Click Next PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 167 5 The files in your project are analyzed to ensure that they are ready for b
31. Allows or prevents playback of your disc in Southeast Asia including Hong Kong Allows or prevents playback of your disc in Australia New Zealand Central South America Pacific Islands and Caribbean Allows or prevents playback of your disc in Northwest Asia including Korea and North Africa Allows or prevents playback of your disc in China SETTING PROJECT PROPERTIES 147 Item Region 7 Region 8 Mastering Description Reserved Allows or prevents playback of your disc in Airplanes In Flight Entertainment You can use the settings on the Mastering tab to adjust settings for creating a disc master for replication For more information see Writing a master for replication on page 172 Note Mastering is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Item Output format DVD ROM type Number of sides Current side Number of layers 148 CHAPTER 12 Description Allows you to specify the file format used when writing mastering files DDP 2 00 DDP Disc Description Protocol 2 00 is widely supported by replication facilities This format supports CSS copy protection and region coding DDP 2 10 Similar to DDP 2 00 but slightly more advanced This format supports CSS copy protection and region coding CMF 1 0 CMF Cutting Master Format supports CSS and region coding Choose the type of DVD ROM you are mastering DVD 1 1 4 G 8 cm single sided single layer DVD with a capacity of appro
32. Button Region 1 Button 1 Director s Interview The making of this scene Button 2 Cast Interview The making of this scene Button 3 Main Menu CREATING A SINGLE MOVIE DISC OR TITLE 79 Button Region 2 Button 1 Cast Interview The making of this scene Button 2 Director s Interview The making of this scene Button 3 Main Menu When the audience plays your disc the same button number will be selected when playback passes from one button region to the next Notice that button 1 and button 2 are reversed in the two button regions If button 2 is selected the button highlight will switch from Cast Interview The making of this scene to Director s Interview The making of this scene when playback switches from button region 1 to button region 2 Use the Button Order dialog to make sure your button order is consistent throughout your video 1 2 3 m Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the video In the Timeline window click to position the cursor in the button region you want to edit From the Edit menu choose Button Order The Button Order dialog is displayed By default the button order matches the order in which you added buttons to the video The first button you add is the default button Select a button and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the selected button s order Repeat step 4 as needed Click OK to close the Button Order dialog and
33. Button drop down list to resolve the broken link The music video compilation contains more than 255 slides A music video compilation can have no more than 255 songs videos 1 Double click a music video compilation in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open the associated compilation 2 Use the Compilation window to remove songs or videos from the compilation The number of markers exceeds the maximum The number of markers in the media file exceeds the maximum of 255 Edit the file and delete some markers The overall bit rate is greater than X Mbps For Blu ray Disc projects the maximum overall bit rate for an asset depends upon the number of video angles For information on maximum bit rates for assets with video angles see Video tracks on page 88 You must adjust the individual video and or audio bit rates of the specified title before you can continue preparing your disc 204 APPENDIX D The project has more than 255 playlists Each disc can contain a maximum of 255 playlists 1 From the View menu choose Playlists to display the Playlists window if it isn t already visible 2 Select the playlists you want to remove 3 Click the Delete Playlist button 4 The project has too many titles that use unique media Each project can contain no more than 99 media files Rerender your media to combine related clips and use chapter markers in the media files rather than
34. Click the Generate Slideshow Animation button in the Compilation window and use the Generate Slideshow Animation dialog e Foreven more control use the keyframe controller in the Crop and Adjust dialog to adjust individual keyframes for each picture With this method you can control the exact position of the crop rectangle for precise control over the pan or zoom animation For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 Setting image stretching or scaling You can use the tools at the top of the Compilation window to rotate an image or set the stretch type that will be used to scale the image 1 Select an image in the Compilation window 2 On the Picture Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button 3 Click Stretch type click the down arrow button l and choose one of the following stretch types e Letterbox The image is displayed without scaling and black letterboxing bars are added above and below or on the sides as needed Zoom to fit The image is magnified to fill the screen Stretch to fit The image is stretched to fill the screen This may cause distortion in the image Rotating an image 1 2 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the picture compilation that you want to edit Select an image in the Compilation window CREATING A PICTURE COMPILATION 69 3 Click the Rotate counterclockwise 1 or Rotate
35. Copy Protection button at the top of the dialog and choose your copy protection settings For more information see Copy protection on page 146 Click the Regions button at the top of the dialog and choose the region settings for your disc For more information see Regions on page 147 Note Region information is not encoded on DVDs you burn with DVD Architect Pro software the software sets a region flag that is encoded by a replication facility Click the Mastering button at the top of the dialog and choose your mastering settings For more information see Mastering on page 148 Click the Next button On the Select Mastering Output Parameters page choose your mastering settings a b C e In the Volume name box type the name of your disc From the Device drop down list choose your hard drive or your DLT digital linear tape drive If you re saving your master to a file on disk type the path to the folder you want to use or click the Browse button to choose a folder If you selected your DLT drive from the Device drop down list and need to erase the tape select the Erase first then write to tape check box A dialog box confirming that you want to erase the tape is displayed click the Yes or No button to continue Note Erasing the tape may take a long time and oftentimes cannot be canceled Click the Next button If you are preparing and mastering a dual layer disc the Choose Layer Break Behavior page is display
36. Description Graphics Edits the position size and appearance of graphical elements on a menu or compilation Button Edits the action and appearance of the selected menu button Menu Page Adjusts the length background media end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected page Subtitle Adjusts subtitle text positions and adjusts which color set is used to draw subtitle text Media Adjusts the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected media file Picture Compilation Adjusts the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected picture compilation Music Video Compilation Adjusts the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected music video compilation Playlist Adjusts the settings for each item in a playlist or to set the end action for the selected playlist Script Adjusts settings for each statement in your DVD script Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects For more information see The Properties Window on page 113 20 CHAPTER 2 Timeline window Alt 9 The Timeline window is a chronological representation of a video picture compilation music video compilation or the background media for a menu From the View menu choose Timeline to show or hide the Timeline window The timeline displays your main audio and video tracks subtitle and additional audio tracks chapter markers and transport controls you can use to preview your media
37. English dialogue track and an English commentary track for example the first track that matches the player s language is used The viewer can choose which track is played during playback Adding audio tracks You can add up to eight audio tracks for each title 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open it 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible 3 Click the Insert Track button lt 2 in the Timeline window and choose Insert Audio Track A blank audio track is added to the timeline You can add an audio file by dragging it to the track or using the Media Properties pane in the Properties window 4 Click the arrow next to the Track Language button and choose a language to identify the track 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to create the audio tracks for your project When setting up your project it s a good practice to use the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If you transition playback between titles the disc will continue to play the same track number For example assume the first title on your disc has the following track order Track Language 1 English 2 French 3 Spanish Now assume the second title on your disc has the following track order Track Language 1 French 2 English 3 Spanish If you re playing English dialogue in the first ti
38. Maintain aspect ratio e loop point Yes sd Show before loop point Is object visible before the menu loop point To edit the button s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Selecta button with the Selection tool Sizing tool 4 or Navigation tool amp 3 Click the property button that you would like to edit 4 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list For more information see Button Properties on page 115 Copying and pasting attributes Copying and pasting attributes allows you to quickly apply settings from one item in your project to another You can paste any one or all of the following attributes Button Frame Media Effects Text Properties Size Size and Position Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu that has the object that you want to copy Select the object or objects with the Selection tool or Sizing tool From the Edit menu choose Copy Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu that has the object that you would like to edit Select a button text box or graphic with the Selection tool or Sizing tool 4 Tip Press Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple
39. Safe Action borders are displayed when you choose Show Action Safe Area from the Options menu Title safe area Allows you to specify a percentage for the border size in the video s safe title area Video within this safe area will always be visible on a television monitor The Safe Title borders are displayed when you choose Show Title Safe Area from the Options menu Paste offset Type values in the X and Y boxes if you want to offset items when you paste them If you enter 0 in both boxes objects will be pasted directly over the source object when you copy and paste in the same menu Brightness contrast modifier Allows you to control how much brightness contrast is added or subtracted when you click on the increase decrease contrast increase decrease brightness and increase decrease contrast center buttons Limit number of undo buffers Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want to limit the number of to 0 to 9999 undo buffers that will be created Reducing the number of undo buffers can conserve memory Default All Restores the Editing page to the default settings CUSTOMIZING DVD ARCHITECT PRO SOFTWARE 185 Display tab The Display tab allows you to specify options for the appearance of the DVD Architect Pro workspace Preference Icon color saturation Icon color tint Selected item color Button overlap color 1 Button overlap color 2 Default All Preview tab Description Drag the
40. Vegas Pro software Saving markers Use the Save Markers button j to save all markers to your media file If you do not save your markers the marker information is saved only in the project file Note DVD Architect Pro saves the marker location but not the marker type When you load markers all will be imported as Scene Chapter markers Linking titles to chapter markers You can link the end action of a button music video compilation picture compilation playlist media file or script to a chapter marker in a media file 1 Select the title you want to link to a chapter 2 Click the End Action button in the Properties window 3 Select the Command box click the down arrow and choose Link 4 In the Destination Chapter drop down list select the chapter marker to which you want to link Media properties The Media Properties pane in the Properties window adjusts the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected media file Media Properties General Track Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets PES Seen Audio 1 aa Gong udio wav Video Video file used by the video track To edit media properties perform the following steps 1 Ifthe window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click a media file in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the media you want to edit 3 Click a button at the top of the Properti
41. added to music or video compilations For more information see Adding buttons to videos on page 79 CREATING A MUSIC VIDEO COMPILATION 61 Adding audio There are several ways to add audio to your compilation Use the Explorer window to locate and select audio files and drag them to the Compilation window You can select multiple files at once using the Shift key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files Files are added to the compilation list wherever you drop them 3t 4 of OL Et i Eisma x ae mie E T ou X 0 i E A s Image Length Filename 1 cess oe 5 TE E cello and guitar mix wav Stereo Timeline Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts Use the Explorer window to locate audio files Double click a file to add it to the bottom of the list in the Compilation window From the Insert menu choose Slide The Insert Slide dialog is displayed Select a song and click the Open button The song is inserted above the currently selected song in the list Note f you want the song name automatically inserted on the slide for each song choose Auto Insert Track Title from the Options menu Otherwise you can manually add the text to each slide For more information see Adding and editing text on page 63 Replacing an audio file There are several ways to replace a song s audio Right click a song in the Timeline and choose Set Audio from the shortcut menu The Set Audio dialog is displayed Se
42. and inactive buttons on your menu Note n Blu ray Disc projects color sets are not supported for inactive buttons None all transparent must be chosen from the Inactive button colors drop down list For more information see Using color sets on page 44 THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 125 Subtitle Properties You can use the Properties window to adjust subtitle text positions and adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle text You can choose which color set is used for each subtitle event independently Transformations Color Sets X position 360 0 Y position 419 0 X size 576 0 Y size 256 0 Maintain aspect ratio Yes To edit subtitle properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Select a subtitle event in the Timeline window or a text box in the workspace The Properties window will display different controls depending on your current selection 3 Click the specific control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Subtitle Properties pane Transformations The Transformations page is displayed in the Properties window when you select a subtitle text box in the workspace Item Description X position Edit the X position and Y position values to change the center of the selected text Y position bo
43. and select Loop Note f the menu s end action is not set to Loop the menu loop point will set the point at which buttons are displayed but the menu will not loop 3 Set your menu s length a On the Menu Page Properties pane click the General button b Click Menu length click the down arrow button and select one of the following options Item Description Auto calculate The software will determine the menu length based on the background audio video and button animations Specify When selected it allows you to type a number in the Length box or click the down arrow button to display a slider to set the length of the background video if one exists Tip f you type a value in the Length box that is longer than the background video the background video will end and any animated thumbnails will continue to play until the end of the menu If you want the menu to loop smoothly when your menu duration is longer than the video create a new background video that matches the desired menu length 40 CHAPTER 4 Click Loop point click the down arrow button l button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to set the point at which buttons will be displayed and when looped playback will begin The loop point is shown with a green marker in the Timeline window Tip Click the Set Loop Point button in the Timeline window Inserting a scene selection menu A scene selection menu lets a user choose a specif
44. and transparent color Use the Color Sets page to edit the color sets that will be available for the selected menu and then use the General page in the Menu Page Properties pane to choose which color sets are used for the selected activated and inactive buttons on your menu For more information see Using color sets on page 44 114 CHAPTER 11 Button Properties The Button Properties pane in the Properties window is available when you have a button selected in the workspace Use these controls to change the appearance behavior and navigation settings for the selected button Button Properties Transformations Media Highlight Navigation Color Sets X position 36815 Y position 408 3 X size 216 9 Y size 60 4 Maintain aspect ratio Szshow before loop paint Yes sd Show before loop point Is object visible before the menu loop point To edit the button s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Select a button with the Selection tool Sizing tool 4 or Navigation tool 3 3 Click the property button that you would like to edit 4 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Button Properties pane Transformations Item X position Y posit
45. another instance of DVD Architect Pro software Some data such as audio can not be pasted into applications such as Microsoft Word or Notepad but the text data from the Edit Details window can be pasted This allows you to then print or format the data CODEC An acronym for Coder Decoder Commonly used when working with data compression Contrast Adjusting contrast multiplies color values in an image to stretch the existing color channel values across a broader or narrower portion of the spectrum The contrast center determines the anchor point for stretching Histogram of original image Contrast decreased with a contrast center of 0 5 the histogram is squeezed into a narrower portion of the spectrum anchored from the center of the graph Contrast decreased with a contrast center of 0 0 the histogram is squeezed into a narrower portion of the spectrum anchored at the left edge of the graph Contrast decreased with a contrast center of 1 0 the histogram is squeezed into a narrower portion of the spectrum anchored at the right edge of the graph Device Driver A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse in DVD Architect Pro software To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold
46. box type the name of your disc b From the Device drop down list choose your DVD burner or ISO Image Writer If Then You chose your DVD burner In the Speed drop down list choose your burning speed You chose ISO Image Writer In the File name field click the Browse button to browse to the location where you would like to save the file c Select the Advanced button to display the Advanced Burn Parameters dialog The Drive Info tab lists information about the drive to which the DVD will be burned The Media Info tab lists information about the type of media currently in your DVD burner The Labels tab has information about the volume name volume set name and application ID which you can adjust if necessary Click OK to return to the Select Burn Parameters page d Select the Burn disc radio button if you want to burn your project or select the Test only button to perform a test burn without activating your burner s laser Note Test burns are not available if you cleared the Use legacy disc drivers check box on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog e Select the Eject disc when done box so the DVD drive will open when the burn is completed 6 Click the Finish button to start burning 7 The application displays a dialog box prompting you to burn another disc e Click the Yes button to burn another copy The application displays the Make DVD Select Burn Parameters page where you can begin the process again e Click
47. break Notes All media after the selected layer break will be placed on the second layer e If you re preparing and mastering the Select Layer Break page will be displayed only if you did not choose the Choose a layer break point automatically radio button in step 10 or if the software is unable to find a preferred layer break point a Atthe top of the page select a setting from the drop down list to indicate whether you want the preferred layer break points or all available layer break points to be displayed Break points are determined by chapters in your titles e A preferred layer break point occurs at the beginning of a title These chapter markers are preferred because they will not result in a visible pause when the DVD or Blu ray Disc player changes layers e fno preferred layer break points are available you can choose to display all possible layer break points If you choose a nonpreferred break point viewers may notice a pause when the player changes layers e Ifno layer break points are available you can close the wizard and add a chapter marker manually The wizard will suggest a title and approximate location e If layer break points are not available in suitable locations try rearranging the titles in the Project Overview window By changing the title order you may be able to achieve that layer break at a more desirable location b Select the layer break point that you want to use 11 Click the Finish bu
48. button and choose On or Off from the menu Note When Off is selected from the menu the button is not available Item Title play Stop Time chapter search Previous up Next Fast scan Backward scan Top menu Menu Resume Button navigation Pause Audio track change Subtitle track change Video angle change Description Allows the user to press the Title button on the remote to skip to a specific video or music picture compilation Allows the user to press the Stop button on the remote to stop the disc Allows the user to press the Time button on the remote to skip to a specific play time or chapter Allows the user to press the Previous Up button on the remote to navigate to the previous chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Next button on the remote to navigate to the next chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Fwd button on the remote to seek forward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Rev button on the remote to seek backward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote to navigate to the top menu of the disc Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote during playback Click the expand button to expand the Menu controls so you can define the behavior of the Menu button for a title For more information s
49. cece cece eee eeeeenes 165 Previewing video on an external monitor via IEEE 1394 ccc cece cece eee ees 165 Preparing and Burning Your Project ccc cece cece e eee e eee e eee e eee eees 167 Preparing and burning DVD projects cc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eeees 167 Preparing a OVD PrO CC cc cecegeectpesevceaces eee ercenu es eeaseueeeteseesineeneceeseseudanss 167 Burning a DYD DOE U iirin Ersan r TIARE EEES san eer eans ones cease ENOS oes tees 168 Burning 8 cm discs to 12 CIN GISCS sscsscrescreiererissssrtctt ssrt stret Erru rEC eee dawns 171 Writing a master for replication ccc ccc eee ene e eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 172 Preparing and burning Blu ray Disc projects ccc cece eect eee eee eeneees 175 Preparing a Blu ray Disc project ccc ccc ccc cence cece e eee n eee e eee eeesenaes 175 Burning a Blu ray Disc Project 2 0 ccc cece ccc een e eee n nee eee eeennees 175 ERASITG ONG Sigs oer E wages oa ang ena co reweoeea SEE SEE EE EE EES E 177 Customizing DVD Architect Pro Software ccc ccc ccc ccc cece een eeeeeees 179 Changing GUuGSeUINGS 1 400 cist orewhteovidw buenas vudesesiudeeiesereuseiers seen seus 179 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Saving and recalling window layOuts 0c c cece cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeeees 179 SAVING a WINOOWlaVOUL 2scpcceus caesapwocsdss sap ewnusesie EETTERIIN 179 Loading a saved layout e s000 een ettadead anus aeiedeacieupe
50. channel Increase Brightness Increases the brightness of the image Decrease Brightness Decreases the brightness of the image Increase Contrast Increases the contrast of the image Decrease Contrast Decreases the contrast of the image Increase Contrast Center Adjusts the anchor point around which green contrast is adjusted Decrease Contrast Center Adjusts the anchor point around which green contrast is adjusted Thumbnail Size Displays small medium or large thumbnail images LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 19 Properties window Alt 8 The Properties window includes controls that you can use to edit nearly every detail of your project From the View menu choose Properties to show or hide the Properties window Menu Page Properties General Background Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets o educe interlace flicker Start Script Mone Menu length Specify Length 00 08 35 871 Loop point 00 00 00 000 Selected button colors Color set 2 Activated button colors Color set 3 Inactive button colors None all transpar Reduce interlace flicker When enabled reduces flicker caused by interlacing video frames The contents of the Properties window change depending on the current selection For example if you have a menu open in the workspace you can edit page properties and button properties If you have a title open in the Timeline window you can edit information about the media file Property
51. clockwise 0 button Adjusting brightness and contrast or editing the image 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the picture compilation that you want to edit 2 Select an image in the Compilation window 3 Use the buttons at the top of the Compilation window to adjust the appearance For more information see Compilation window Alt 7 on page 19 On the Picture Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button Select Video click the down arrow button and choose Crop and Adjust to display the Crop and Adjust dialog or Open in Graphics Editor to edit the image in an external image editor For more information see Cropping and adjusting video and graphics on page 45 Setting display duration from the Picture Compilation Properties window You can adjust the duration of a slide from the Picture Compilation Properties window 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the picture compilation that you want to edit 2 Select an image or multiple images in the Compilation window 3 On the Picture Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button 4 Click Length and type the length of time you want each slide to display or click the down arrow button and drag the slider Note f you ve added background audio and you want the length of your slideshow to match the length of your ba
52. containing the text you want to format 2 If necessary click the Selection tool or Sizing tool 4 in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace click the text box and use the text bar to edit your text properties e Choose a font from the drop down list to set the typeface for your text e Choose a font size from the drop down list Choose Auto to have the text automatically adjust to fit the size of the text box e Click the Bold e Italic 7 or Shadow buttons to toggle your font effects as desired e Set your text justification options as desired For more information see Text bar Alt 2 on page 16 e Click the down arrow next to the color swatch button EE to display the color picker where you can set the red green blue and alpha channels for your text Editing text 1 Select a song in the Compilation window If necessary click the Selection tool or Sizing tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace click the text box and choose Edit Text from the Edit menu or press F2 The text becomes editable 4 Edit the text as necessary 5 Press one of the following keys to commit your text changes e F2 e Ctrl Enter e Tab Moving text 1 Select the image containing the text you want to move 2 If necessary click the Selection tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace drag the text box to
53. controls e 1 G General audiences All ages may watch the content e 2 e 3 PG Parental guidance suggested Some content may not be suitable for children e 4 PG 13 Parents strongly cautioned Some content may be inappropriate for children under age 13 5 e 6 R Restricted No children under age 17 should watch this content without a parent or adult guardian present e 7 NC 17 No one aged 17 and under should watch the content 8 Note Not available for Blu ray Disc projects Application ID Identifies the application DVD Architect Pro is the default entry Volume name Enter the disc volume name Note The volume name is limited to 32 characters and can contain only capital letters A Z digits 0 9 and underscores _ DVD Architect Pro software will automatically correct text that does not comply with these rules Volume set name Enter the name of a set of volumes Note The volume set name is limited to 59 characters Copy protection You can use the controls on the Copy Protection tab to secure DVD content Notes e DVD Architect Pro software only sets the CSS and Macrovision flags the encryption must be added by the mastering or replication facility e Copy protection settings are not used for Blu ray Disc projects Item Description Disc copyrighted Indicates whether the project contains copyrighted material e Choose Yes if your project contains copyrighted material You ca
54. copy protection should not be encoded e Type I Sets a flag that tells the replication facility to add Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC adds pulses during the vertical blanking intervals that distort the picture when a user attempts to make an analog copy e Type Il Sets a flag that tells the replication facility to add AGC and a two line Colorstripe e Type Ill Sets a flag that tells the replication facility to add AGC and a four line Colorstripe You can use the settings on the Regions tab to determine the regions in which a DVD can be played Region coding is how Hollywood studios stagger movie releases across the planet These codes ensure that a disc isn t released before the movie is out in that country s theatres Notes e Region information is not encoded on discs you burn with DVD Architect Pro software the software sets a region flag that is encoded by a replication facility e Region settings are not used for Blu ray Disc projects Item All regions Region 1 Region 2 Region 3 Region 4 Region 5 Region 6 Description Choose Yes from the drop down list if you want to be able to play your disc in any player regardless of geographical location Choose No if you want to be able to allow or prevent playback for specific regions Allows or prevents playback of your disc in North America Allows or prevents playback of your disc in Japan Europe Middle East Egypt South Africa and Greenland
55. cuend don Pie naduencd ree sdana EERE TAERE NEAR 16 oer a a EEE E E E E E E E E A E E T EET 16 Window Docking Area P11 sccuscecsdousesdecusdunseeseseduseadeassdeewseseweevawieess 17 Explorer window WANG eee tod caans aaedoeeseetast ous dean dsedoseaaeedaeteuenee tamsesees 17 Themes WINGOW AIt eis euss wieews eveaianauw sane tawaewetedeaweedwetatan wwedweiaeakes ee 17 Buttons window AIt 5 2 0 ccc cece ee eee eee e eee eee eee ee eenenes 18 Backgrounds window Alt 6 s00 lt dus dest cewtesadasdsuwtaaeised eaanekas Fausiaekid ae ioo4s 18 Compilation window Alt 7 sc lt viwss ccawsacsxedeas pelnucmasnneus sw arddawew ene oneweereebedwss 19 Properties window AIt 8 20 ccc cece ene e nent eeeennnnes 20 Timeline window AF9 esceuctaaateadirat nakra es eae deid eek ongad can wah LAANE TANTER 21 Playlists window Ctrl Alt 2 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece ccc cee een e teen een e nee eeeeeeeeeenees 22 DVD Scripts Ctr AItH3 cc cccudecucwakdewdouwciee ee ees tude deaataddessvaxnsascdaxdexntaads 23 Crop and Adjust Ctrl Alt 4 0 ccc cc ccc cee cece eee e eee e nee e eee eee eeeeeeneeeeees 23 ceing StaiteG ic icronscenscuevuensceseeehavesgetsecene E TEE EE 25 HOWICWOIK orateetica ore rres ted eres erene Gee eae EEE EE EEEE E EEOAE E TETEE REE 25 Rendering files for your project ccc ccc eee cee eee eee eens eee ee eeeeeeeees 25 Starting a new PLOjeCt 6 ccc cece cette cece teen teen eee e tenets eeeteenees 25 Opening an existing project
56. down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the brightness of an individual color channel Use the Contrast controls to adjust the contrast of the image e Select the Contrast box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the overall contrast of the image e Click the expand button next to the Contrast box to display individual controls for the color channels in the image Select the Red Green or Blue box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the contrast of an individual color channel Use the Contrast center controls to set the anchor point around which contrast is adjusted e Select the Contrast center box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the overall contrast of the image e Click the expand button next to the Contrast center box to display individual controls for the color channels in the image Select the Red Green or Blue box click the down arrow button l and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the contrast center of an individual color channel Use the Colorize controls to add a color tint to the image 1 Select the Colorize box and click the down arrow button to display a color picker 2 Edit the selected color by performing any of the following actions Drag the R G and B s
57. down list b Select a radio button to indicate when you want to adjust the output to the selected format Setting Description Only when the project does Select this radio button if you want to adjust the video only if the project settings do not match any DV format not conform to a standard DV format Always Select this radio button if you want to adjust the video output to the selected format whenever you preview on the external monitor Use this setting when you do not have a preview device that supports your required project format For example if you re creating a PAL project but you don t have a PAL monitor you could use this setting to preview on an NTSC monitor 5 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button Configuring a Windows Secondary Display If you have a Windows secondary display device you can configure it to work with DVD Architect Pro software Note You can also use the Windows Secondary Display device on a computer with a single monitor When you enable the external monitor the preview window will fill your screen From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog Select the Video device tab In the Device drop down list select Windows Secondary Display Information about the device displays in the Details area a eS From the Display adapter drop down list choose the device where your preview monitor is connected You can cli
58. each audio track in your project Add a button for each subtitle track in your project 42 CHAPTER 4 From the Insert menu choose Empty Button b Press F2 and edit the button s text to describe the subtitle track it will select In the Button Properties controls use the Destination chapter drop down list to determine what happens when the button is clicked If Then You want the button to select a subtitle track Choose your setup menu from the Destination without navigating away from the setup menu chapter drop down list You want to navigate away from the setup Choose a media file or menu from the menu after choosing a subtitle track Destination chapter drop down list For example choosing a media file would allow you to automatically start playback of a title using the selected subtitles Choosing a menu could navigate to a scene selection menu or a separate setup menu for choosing the audio track d Inthe Button Properties controls choose a track from the Set subtitle track drop down list to determine which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Note f you use the Set subtitle track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track e Repeat steps a through d for each subtitle track in your project 4 Ifyou want the current tracks to be used throughout the dis
59. f you use the Set subtitle track control to change the subtitle track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty subtitle tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding a subtitle track on page 90 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video angle the new angle will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the angle Description Choose a chapter from the drop down list to choose where playback will begin when this item is played in the selected playlist Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played when this item is played in the selected playlist Choose No change to use the last set track Item Description Set subtitle track Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played when this item is pl
60. graphic subtitle on page 91 Select the subtitle event in the Timeline window and use the Subtitle Event page in the Media and Subtitle Properties pane to choose the color set for the event ADDING AUDIO VIDEO AND SUBTITLES 91 Importing subtitles from a file oY YS Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible From the Insert menu choose Subtitle Track A new subtitle track is added to the timeline Click the Import Subtitles button i in the Timeline window The Import Subtitles dialog is displayed to allow you to browse to a sub or txt file When you click Open the contents of the selected subtitle file are added to the track Each line in the file creates a subtitle event and the events are spaced equally through the duration of the video For example the following text file would create three subtitle events No tis not so deep as a well nor so wide as a church door but tis enough twill serve ask for me to morrow and you shall find me a grave man You can then adjust the timing of the events to correspond with the spoken words in the audio track Creating a subtitle sub file with timecode based subtitle events 4 5 Open a new document in a text editor Create an entry for each subtitle event containing a subtitle number time
61. in the X size and Y size boxes Tip You can also use transformation keyframes to animate graphics in your project For more information see Transformation keyframes on page 52 Inserting audio You can select an audio file to play in the background while your compilation is being viewed 1 Drag an audio file to the workspace or to an audio track in the Timeline window 2 Click the Fit compilation to audio button 2 to automatically adjust the duration of all slides to match the length of the audio file For more information see Audio tracks on page 87 Setting thumbnail display You can set the size of the thumbnail displayed for the slides in the Compilation window Click the down arrow button to the right of the Thumbnail Size button smal and choose Small Medium or Large to select the desired size Picture compilation properties The Picture Compilation Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected picture compilation Picture Compilation Properties General Track Media End Action Remote Buttons Slide Color Sets Reduce interlace flicker Off Start Script None Reduce interlace flicker When enabled reduces flicker caused by interlacing video frames To edit the picture compilation s properties perform the following steps 72 CHAPTER 6 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in th
62. is supported 48 000 Hz 448 Kbps 5 1 surround 64 Kbps to 640 Kbps is supported PCM audio wav or w64 for Blu ray Disc projects Sample Rate Bit Depth Channels Compression 48 000 Hz 160r24bit Stereo Uncompressed 96 000 Hz 160r24bit Stereo Uncompressed RENDERING FILES FOR YOUR PROJECT 193 AVC video for Blu ray Disc projects If you re using Vegas Pro software you can use the AVCHD rendering templates to render a compliant video file including 5 1 surround AC 3 audio Template Name Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Max Bit Rate AVCHD NTSC 5 1 Surround 1440x1080 29 970 16 9 40 Mbps AVCHD PAL 5 1 Surround 1440x1080 25 16 9 40 Mbps If you re rendering with a different application the following settings will produce compliant AVC media Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Max Bit Rate 720x480 29 970 interlaced 4 3 40 Mbps 720x480 29 970 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 720x576 25 interlaced 4 3 40 Mbps 720x576 25 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1280x720 29 970 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1280x720 50 16 9 40 Mbps 1280x720 24 000 16 9 40 Mbps 1280x720 23 976 16 9 40 Mbps 1440x1080 29 970 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1440x1080 25 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1440x1080 24 000 16 9 40 Mbps 1440x1080 23 976 16 9 40 Mbps 1920x1080 29 970 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1920x1080 25 interlaced 16 9 40 Mbps 1920x1080 24 000 16 9 40 Mbps 1920x1080 23 976 16 9 40 Mbps 194 APPENDIX B MPEG 2 video for Blu ray Disc projects If you re using Vegas Pro so
63. layer USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 105 Creating custom menus and buttons using single layer graphics You can create custom menus using your favorite graphics application If the application does not support layers use the following procedure 1 Use your image editing application to create your menu a b Your image size should match the height of the output format frame size and the width should include compensation for the output format s pixel aspect ratio Output Format AspectRatio MenuSize 4 3 NTSC 720 x 480 9091 655 x 480 Widescreen NTSC 720 x 480 1 2121 873 x 480 4 3 PAL 720 x 576 1 0926 787 X 576 Widescreen PAL 720x576 14568 1049x576 1280 x 720 1 0 1280 x 720 1440x1080 13333 1920x1080 1920 x 1080 1 0 1920 x 1080 Include the background buttons and text that you want to display in a single layer 2 Create a highlight mask image to determine where highlighting will be applied when a button is selected or activated For more information see Highlight masks on page 100 3 Add a menu to your project For more information see Adding a submenu on page 35 Remove the default text from the menu 5 Add your background image a b C Click the Background Media button on the Menu Page Properties pane Select the Video control click the down arrow button and choose Replace to browse to your custom background image Select the Stretch type control click the down arrow button
64. link For more information see Editing a label on page 155 Set GPRM Assigns a value or asset to a GPRM e Target Sets the GPRM you want to use for this asset 0 5 e Operator Modifies the target s value There are 11 operators from which to choose e Source Sets the source SPRM GPRM value or link depending upon the operator you selected for the command Use the controls below to choose the SPRM or GPRM index the numeric value or the link destination For more information see General Purpose Register Memories GPRMs on page 157 Link GPRM Links to the specified GPRM For example you can assign a GPRM to a link using the Set GPRM command and then use the Link GPRM command to execute the link in your script SetMode GPRM Sets the specified GPRM to either register or counter mode e Target Sets the GPRM you want to use for this command 0 5 e Mode Sets the mode counter or register for the command SetStreams Sets the audio or subtitle track or the video angle e Set audio track Choose a setting from the drop down list to select which audio track will be played Choose No change to use the last set track e Set subtitle track Choose a setting from the drop down list to select which subtitle track will be played Choose No change to use the last set track e Set video angle Choose a setting from the drop down list to select which video track will be played Choose No change to use the last set track Resume Resume playb
65. of the menu which includes button sizes and locations Any buttons that you added after importing the layered file will be removed and any buttons that you deleted after importing the layered file will be restored Note Nonvisual changes such as button links are preserved 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to reapply the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose Reapply Layout From File to update the objects Inserting pages Adding pages You can add pages to a menu if you have more content than will fit on one page For example your main menu could be two pages long if necessary 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 From the Insert menu choose Page An arrow button is added to the current menu as a link to the page Note You can edit the button by selecting it and making changes to the controls in the Button Properties pane in the Properties window For more information see Button Properties on page 115 3 Double click the page in the Project Overview window or double click the arrow button in the workspace to edit the layout and add media Deleting pages 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 36 CHAPTER 4 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Page Changing page order 1 Dou
66. render the project in real time 3 Ifyou want to verify whether any of your objects are outside the title and action safe areas click the View Safe Areas button preview you can make corrections in your project 4 Use the buttons on the remote control to navigate and play your project 5 Click the Preview on External Monitor button if you want to send your project to the external monitor device specified on the Video Device tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Previewing on an external video monitor on page 164 6 To end the preview and return to the main window click the Close button E Close Previewing on an external video monitor You can feed video directly from the DVD Architect Pro window to a television monitor or secondary Windows display With this feature you can free up valuable space in the DVD Architect Pro window by viewing a full screen preview of your project on a different display or you can make your final editing decisions on a broadcast monitor which differs significantly from a computer monitor before preparing or burning your project Note External monitor output is for verifying colors menu layout and safe areas only and is not an indication of playback synchronization of the final burned disc Prior to previewing on an external monitor you ll need to configure your system to use this feature From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Video Device tab to con
67. s button order can be changed to suit your preferences You can reorder the buttons via the Customize Toolbar dialog The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available on the main toolbar You can return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Separator Separator ik Restricted Properties Enable Snapping F8 ea Get Media from the Web e Separator E Save Project As a L mi Preview F9 3 Delete Delete qe Separator Help F1 Make DVD ca Inset Media Ctrl F 2 Inthe Current toolbar buttons list select the button that you want to move and click the Move Up or Move Down button 3 Click Close to save the toolbar changes and close the dialog Adding buttons to the toolbar A series of buttons are available that you can add to the main toolbar These buttons are listed in the Customize Toolbar dialog You can also add separators on the toolbar to organize the buttons to suit your preferences You can return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on the dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed 2 Inthe Available toolbar buttons list use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and then select it 3 On the C
68. save your changes 80 CHAPTER 7 Animating buttons with keyframes You can make buttons fade or fly in to a menu by using keyframe animation For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 Moving a button into position on a menu 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit For more information see Project Overview window Ctrl Alt 1 on page 14 On the General page of the Menu Page Properties pane verify that the menu length is long enough to accommodate the animation and that the menu loop point is set to the point where you want menu animation to end For more information see Menu Page Properties on page 121 In the workspace select the button you want to animate If you can t see the button click in the timeline to place the cursor after the loop point The Button Properties pane is displayed in the Properties window For more information see Button Properties on page 115 On the Transformations page in the Button Properties pane click the Show before loop point box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu so you can animate the button before the loop point Add keyframes to move the button a Double click the Transformations keyframe bar below your video track A keyframe is added to the Transformations keyframe bar b Drag the keyframe to the beginning of the timeline and click the keyframe to
69. selected subtitle events to the right of the event you drag will move with the event you drag If the Auto Ripple button is not selected only the event you drag will move the positions of all existing events are preserved Notes e Events will snap to the cursor and to other event edges If you want to trim an event to a specific time position the cursor at that point on the timeline and drag your event edge to the cursor If you want two subtitle events to be adjacent on the timeline turn off Auto Ripple and drag an event edge until it snaps to the other event s edge You can turn snapping on or off by choosing Enable Snapping from the Options menu Events are forced to frame boundaries when the Quantize to Frames button R is selected in the Timeline window Copying formatting across subtitle events 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible 3 Select a subtitle event and edit it If you want to select multiple events hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking events The event you want to edit should be the last event you click e Use the Transformations page in the Properties pane or drag a text object in the workspace to change its position For more information see Transformations on page 126 e Use the text bar to change the subtitle s font size or justi
70. slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the DVD Architect Pro window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it Drag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the DVD Architect Pro window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the Windows title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied Tip You can use the Display Properties control panel to change your active window title bar colors In Windows XP open the Display Properties control panel and select the Appearance tab Then click the Advanced button and choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list In Windows Vista open the Appearance and Personalization control panel and click the Customize Colors link in the Personalization section Next click the Open classic appearance properties for more color options ink Then click the Advanced button and choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list Click to display a color picker where you can set the color for selected items in the workspace using red green blue and alpha values Click to display a color picker where you can set the color for buttons that overlap in the DVD Architect Pro workspace using red green blue and alpha values Click to display a color picker where you can set the color for buttons that overlap in the DVD Architect Pro workspace using red green blue and alpha
71. software does not have focus The files will be reloaded when you switch back to DVD Architect Pro software Select this check box to use a multimedia keyboard to control playback of a project Select this check box to turn off the animation applied to text boxes when you edit text This animation helps you locate which text box you re editing Select this check box if you want the software to look for and link audio files with the same base name when you add a video only file to your project For example if you had a video only MPEG file MyProject mpg and an audio file MyProject wav in the same folder MyProject wav will automatically be used as the audio track when you add MyProject mpg to a menu Clear the check box if you want to add your audio files manually When the check box is cleared an internal configuration file will be used to determine your drive s capabilities If you encounter problems burning discs select this check box and your drive will be tested to determine its capabilities Select this check box if you want to suspend your screen saver when you re previewing your project Select this check box if you want to apply a theme to all pages in a menu when you double click a theme in the Themes tab When the check box is cleared the theme is applied to the current page only Select this check box if you want DVD Architect Pro software to automatically assign names to markers when you add them to videos When
72. source media is progressive scan video the video or title will be recompressed as progressive if the source media is interlaced the video or title will be recompressed as interlaced When you choose Auto for a music video compilation each compilation item is recompressed as a separate title and will match the format of the source media If the audio is longer than the video the compilation item will be recompressed as progressive scan video to prevent artifacts when the last frame is held Notes e When using background video in DVD menus we recommend rendering the video in progressive scan format before adding it to your project Leave the Progressive setting at Auto and the noncompliant menu will be rendered as progressive scan video Progressive scan menus will provide the sharpest looking text and highest level of DVD player compatibility If you need to use interlaced video as a menu background choose No from the menu When you choose No the noncompliant menu will be rendered as interlaced video e When creating Blu ray Disc projects menus must match the field order set by your project s video format Adjusting audio recompression settings 1 Selecta menu or audio file from the list 2 Click the Audio 1 button to display the controls Information about the audio format of the selected item is displayed If your title has multiple audio tracks a separate Audio button is displayed for each track Note f the audio is alrea
73. statement choose Comment from the Statement type drop down list In the Comment box type the text you want to appear in the comment USING SCRIPTING 155 Testing a script You can use the Script Debugger pane in the Preview window to test and debug your DVD scripts 1 Click the drop down arrow next to the Preview button Preview on the main toolbar and choose a preview mode Preview Mode Description Preview Current Starts the preview with the current page Preview Disc Starts the preview at the beginning of your disc including any introductory media 2 Once the Preview window is displayed click the DVD Script Debugger button to display the Script Debugger pane at the bottom of the Preview frame Script Increment Score Command I Find which title is playing SPRMO SPRM 1 SPRM2 if GPRMO 2 then GotoLabel Correct SPRM3 Link Broken link if GFRMO 5 then GotoLabel Incorrect SPRM4 Correct Correct answer earns a point 3 Use the controls in the Script Debugger pane to test your script Item Description Py Step Next Click to skip to the next command line in the script Tip You can also press Shift F5 ji Run Click to run the script from the current breakpoint Tip You can also press F5 Toggle Breakpoint Click to insert a breakpoint to the currently selected command s or label s in the script During script debugging playback will stop at the breakpoint until you res
74. the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit ADDING AUDIO VIDEO AND SUBTITLES 95 2 Select a subtitle event in the Timeline window or a text box in the workspace The Properties window will display different controls depending on your current selection 3 Click the specific control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list 96 CHAPTER 9 Chapter 10 Using Masks Menus and Themes DVD Architect Pro software allows you to create custom masks menus and themes This gives you ultimate control while creating your projects A mask determines which portion of an image will be visible You can apply masks to button thumbnails button frames and image highlights Custom menus allow you to modify the appearance of your menus You can create custom menus using your favorite graphics application and import the psd file as a menu Themes take the guesswork out of creating your project By choosing a theme you can quickly create a snazzy new menu using predefined images and background music Creating custom masks Masks determine which portion of an image will be visible You can apply masks to button thumbnails button frames and image highlights Consider the following example This menu page contains two copies of the same button so you can see the button s normal and highlighted states Three masks were used to create this button
75. the check box is cleared an edit box is displayed after you add a marker For more information see Inserting a scene selection menu on page 41 Select this check box if you want to display the names of source files for audio and video events in the Timeline window When this check box is selected the DVD Architect Pro window will inherit the appearance of the current theme when using Windows XP When the check box is cleared user interface elements will maintain the classic Windows appearance When this check box is selected DVD Architect Pro will check whether dar files are associated with DVD Architect Pro software and will prompt you to restore the file association if necessary Select this check box if you want to remove pulldown when you open 24 fps progressive scan DV video files When the check box is cleared 24p video is read as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i When this check box is selected DVD Architect Pro will estimate the maximum possible size when calculating available disc space for your project When the check box is cleared DVD Architect Pro will use the standard estimation method which provides more accurate results Select this box if your audio has unwanted pops or clicks Select the check box and enter a number in the edit box if you want to list your most recently used projects at the bottom of the File menu Restores the General page to the default settings The Video tab allows you to choose
76. the command is executed Left operand Choose the GPRM you want to use for this condition 0 5 Right operand Choose the right operand item you want to use for this condition SPRM Choose the SPRM variable to compare to your specified GPRM in the left operand GPRM Choose the GPRM to compare to your specified GPRM in the left operand Value Choose the numeric value to compare to your specified GPRM in the left operand Editing a label A label statement type inserts a label in the script Labels can be used to mark sections of a script to which you want to link To create a label statement choose Label from the Statement type drop down list In the Label box type the text you want to display in the label Once you ve set a label statement you can create a GoToLabel command to link from one section of a script to another using your defined label and the script will begin executing the statements after the label Notes e When you set a GotoLabel command this label will display as an option in the Label control drop down list Label statements can only be used to link within a script links from one script to a label in another script are not supported Editing a comment The Comment statement type inserts a comment in the script Comments are ignored by the script and not seen by the DVD viewer but you can use them during the script building and testing process to organize your script or add information To insert acomment
77. the express written consent of Sony Creative Software Inc Copyright 2012 Sony Creative Software Inc Program Copyright 2012 Sony Creative Software Inc All rights reserved Table of Contents IALFOGUCUON soe nda atcease R er oceterd Getter E E usa queers On pnoen ares ues 11 Welcome to DVD Architect Pro software ccc cece cece cece eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 11 System requirements occ cananateadeesee Gotoserausetdaemesd ourad Gacacecsetsacutcaae te 11 Installing DVD Architect Pro software ccc ccc cence eee e eee eeeeneneeees 11 GEAT NEI 22 cute csdtnnee tases enosesaeee ensue cpenecetucbenecap accu oes nteresescuvescs 12 OMG IVE 4 o44o0nn dene EE E T EEE E E E E oi E E E E EE E een eas 12 Interactive TUTONIOIS eerren rer EOE OEN O RAEE EEEE 12 PENON N Daae e E EE EE EE S A E A 12 Learning the DVD Architect Pro Workspace 2 ccc cece eee eee eee cece eeees 13 MaN WIM OW serrate ncn a Senaudon od EE san weaanenaaseuaaaseaats 13 Saving and recalling window layouts Ctrl Alt D or AlttD 2 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee 13 Main window components ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eee teen e nett eee en eee eeeeeeeeeees 13 TOD ee ce ee ee hee ee ee ee E eee ee eee ee rey rere eee ee eee 14 Project Overview window Ctrl Alt41 ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc cece ete eee ee eeenes 14 VV OEMS aC SWAG O ie accanmutercereeeet neat berein eaa pare an een pu ee ume E Rene unenteeinenieas 15 Editing toolbar AFT cos vie
78. the graphics editor that you want to use when you choose to edit a graphic in your DVD Architect Pro project For more information see Opening in graphics editor on page 51 The Preferred graphics editor box displays the path to the application that will be used Click the Browse button to choose a different application or click the Clear button to remove the associated application CUSTOMIZING DVD ARCHITECT PRO SOFTWARE 183 When the Preferred graphics editor box is empty DVD Architect Pro software will use the application associated with the file type when you right click a graphic and choose Open in graphics editor from the shortcut menu Video Device tab This Video Device tab allows you to configure an external monitor Your video will be sent to this device when you choose Preview on External Monitor from the Options menu or click the Preview on External Monitor button G in the Video Preview window Configuring an OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV device If you have an OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV device you can configure it to work with DVD Architect Pro software 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the Video Device tab 3 Inthe Device drop down list select OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 DV Information about the device displays in the Details area 4 Use the Format controls to adjust the video to display properly on your external monitor a Choose the desired format from the Format drop
79. the video waveform in the timeline Note Track color settings are saved with your project Video event properties The Media and Event Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the color settings and cropping for the events on the additional video tracks To edit the video event s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Select an alternate video event in the Timeline window 3 Click the Event Media property button Video The Video control displays the path to the video file that will be used Select a command from the menu to view media properties or crop and adjust media settings Subtitles Subtitles display on screen text during videos picture compilations and music video compilations Subtitles are intended to be used as various text translations of audio dialogue By adding multiple subtitle tracks you can support multiple languages When your disc is played the DVD or Blu ray Disc player will attempt to determine the appropriate default subtitle track If the player cannot determine the correct language the first track is used If multiple tracks match the player s language setting if you have an English dialogue track and an English commentary track for example the first track that matches the player s language is used The viewer can choose which subtitle track is displa
80. title object will set the object that will be used for themes but it will not rename the menu Right click a text object and choose Title Object from the shortcut menu to use the selected text as the menu s title object Formatting text 1 Select a text box with the Selection tool or Sizing tool The text bar below the menu displays the text settings Tip From the View menu choose Text Bar to display or hide the text bar Choose a font from the drop down list to set the typeface for your text Choose a font size from the drop down list Choose Auto to have the text automatically adjust to fit the size of the text box Click the Bold e Italic z or Shadow buttons to toggle your font effects as desired A a To apply a shadow click the down arrow next to the Shadow button A pop up window is displayed to allow you to set the position color and blurring of the shadow text m Set your text justification options as desired For more information see Text bar Alt 2 on page 16 7 Click the down arrow next to the color swatch button EE to display the color picker where you can set the red green blue and alpha channels for your text Editing text 1 Select a text box in the current menu 2 From the Edit menu choose Edit Text or press F2 The text becomes editable CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 39 3 Edit the text as necessary 4 Press one of the following keys to commit yo
81. to 255 playlists with 255 playlist items each TROUBLESHOOTING 201 Menu highlight is too complex Ifa subpicture graphic is overly complex overall or on a horizontal line it cannot be compressed to meet the requirements of the DVD specification This message indicates that the menu s highlight mask is too complex overall If you re using a custom mask image when the Custom highlighting style is selected in the Button Properties controls try the following e You can reduce overall complexity by reducing the amount of detail in the highlight mask image e Look for areas in the image that alternate between colors and reduce colors in those areas e Reduce the number of colors in the image If you re using a text mask when the Mask overlay or Text mask overlay highlighting style is selected in the Button Properties controls try the following e Apply a different highlighting style e Reduce the amount of button text e Reduce the number of buttons on each menu page Menu highlight is too complex due to horizontal lines If a subpicture graphic is overly complex overall or on a horizontal line it cannot be compressed to meet the requirements of the DVD specification This message indicates that the menu s highlight mask is too complex horizontally If you re using a custom mask image when the Custom highlighting style is selected in the Button Properties controls try the following e Look for areas in the image t
82. to 36 buttons widescreen menus can hold up to 18 buttons e Ina Blu ray Disc project each menu can hold up to 255 buttons Media such as videos music video compilations and picture compilations are called titles When you add a title to your project an object is automatically created on your menu Use the Button Properties controls to edit button settings For more information see Button Properties on page 115 Inserting a picture compilation To add a picture compilation to your menu or page choose Picture Compilation from the Insert menu For more information on picture compilations see Creating a Picture Compilation on page 67 Tip Click the Insert Object button and choose Picture Compilation in the Project Overview window CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 37 Inserting a music video compilation To add a music video compilation to your menu or page choose Music Video Compilation from the Insert menu For more information on music video compilations see Creating a Music Video Compilation on page 61 Tips e Click the Insert Object button F and choose Music Video Compilation in the Project Overview window e Buttons can be added to picture music or video compilations For more information see Adding buttons to videos on page 79 Inserting a single movie title To add a single movie title to your menu or page choose Media from the Insert menu For more information on adding movies see Creating a Single Movi
83. to choose the magnification of the page in the workspace When Auto Zoom is selected the image will zoom to fit the current workspace size Tip To browse a file s current location on your drive or network right click the file in the Explorer window or in the DVD Architect Pro workspace and choose Explore Current Folder or select the Video or Audio box in the Properties window click the down arrow button and then choose Explore Containing Folder from the menu to open the Windows Explorer For more information see Explorer window Alt 3 on page 17 ot a d uE My Documents is Desktop H 4 My Computer FE My Documents DVD Architect Pro 5 2 Projects af Network Add Folder to My Favorites Delete Rename Explorer Themes Buttons Backgrounds LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 15 Editing toolbar Alt 1 The editing toolbar allows you to edit objects that you select in the workspace To toggle display of this toolbar in the workspace choose Editing Toolbar from the View menu Selection Tool Selects and moves objects Sizing Tool Selects and resizes objects Navigation Tool Verifies and edits which buttons will be activated when you press Up Down Left or Right buttons on the DVD or Blu ray Disc player remote control Keyframe Tool Inserts a keyframe Keyframes are used to animate objects by cropping them or changing their size or position Pid E Align Left Aligns all selected objects t
84. to control the aspect ratio and resolution of your project s menus For more information see Disc properties on page 143 If Then You choose From project The setting from Project Properties dialog is used The settings are displayed above the Project Properties button You choose a widescreen video format Your video will be displayed in 16 9 on a widescreen television and will be letterboxed on a normal television 6 Select the Resolution control and click the down arrow button choose a setting from the menu to change the frame size of the recompressed video Note This control is not available when a menu is selected All menus in a project must have the same aspect ratio and resolution Use the Project Properties dialog to control the aspect ratio and resolution of your project s menus For more information see Disc properties on page 143 7 Select the Frame rate control click the down arrow button and choose a command from the menu if you want to change the frame rate of the recompressed video 8 Select the Progressive control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu to indicate whether you want to render the title or menu as progressive scan video applicable to DVD projects only e Choose Yes to recompress a menu or title as progressive scan video e Choose No to recompress a menu or title as interlaced video e Choose Auto to allow the software to determine the appropriate format if the
85. to manually create scene selection menus or link to a point in a video using end actions For more information about manual scene selection menus see Creating a menu that returns to the menu after playing the selected scene chapter manual scene selection menus on page 41 For more information about linking to chapter markers using end actions see Linking titles to chapter markers on page 78 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the video 2 Inthe Timeline window click to position the cursor where you want to place the marker 3 Click the down arrow next to the Insert Chapter Marker button P and choose Insert Chapter Marker Inserting buttons on video markers Adding buttons to a video allows you to add interactivity to your project When you add buttons to a video the button regions in the timeline must be placed between two markers Unlike scene chapter markers and chapter markers buttons on video markers are ignored by the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control s previous next chapter buttons When you add a button to a video a button region is created in the Timeline window Buttons on video markers can be moved so you can easily adjust the length of your button regions For more information see Adding buttons to videos on page 79 peee Buttons on video marker y 00 00 06 23 F OD Video Transformations 76 CHAPTER 7 Double click a title in the Project Overvi
86. user action via the remote control changes the track Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video angle the new angle will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the angle Remote Buttons For each music video compilation you can allow or suspend operation of individual buttons on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control and set the behavior of the Menu button Turning buttons on or off helps to ensure the viewer will see your project as you intended it If you have an animated menu for example turning off buttons will prevent the user from navigating away from the menu before it s finished playing To turn each button on or off select the box click the down arrow button choose On or Off from the drop down list Note When Off is selected from the menu the button is not available Item Description Title play Allows the user to press the Title button on the remote to skip to a specific video or music video compilation Stop Allows the user to press the Stop button on the remote to stop the disc Time chapter search Previous up 136 CHAPTER 11 Allows the user to press the Time button on the remote to skip to a specific play time or chapter Allows the
87. user to press the Previous Up button on the remote to navigate to the previous chapter or menu page Item Next Fast scan Backward scan Top menu Menu Resume Button navigation Pause Audio track change Subtitle track change Video angle change Video mode Slide Item Video Audio Description Allows the user to press the Next button on the remote to navigate to the next chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Fwd button on the remote to seek forward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Rev button on the remote to seek backward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote to navigate to the top menu of the disc Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote during playback Click the expand button to expand the Menu controls so you can define the behavior of the Menu button for a title For more information see End Action on page 135 Note The Menu button is not supported for Blu ray Disc projects Allows the user to press the Resume Menu button on the remote to resume playback of a title after exiting it by pressing the Menu button Allows the user to press the Up Down Left Right buttons on the remote to navigate between menu buttons Allows the user to press the Pause button on the remote to temporarily suspend playback Allows t
88. values Restores the Display page to the default settings The Preview tab allows you to specify options for previewing your projects Preference Fast forward rewind amount Super fast forward rewind amount Region Aspect ratio Parental control Menu Audio Subtitles Default All 186 CHAPTER 17 Description Type a value in the box to specify how far playback will be advanced reversed when you click the and E buttons while previewing your project Type a value in the box to specify how far playback will be advanced reversed when you click the 5 and E buttons while previewing your project Choose a region code from the drop down list to indicate the region to be used during project previews Note Region codes are not available for Blu ray Disc projects Choose an aspect ratio from the drop down list to indicate whether your project should be previewed in standard 4 3 or widescreen 16 9 format by default Choose a parental management level from the drop down list to simulate for project previews Note Parental control is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Choose a menu language from the drop down list to specify the default language for your disc menus while previewing your project Choose an audio language from the drop down list to specify the default language for your audio tracks while previewing your project Choose a subtitle language from the drop down list to specify the default languag
89. within the DVD Architect Pro workspace F 4 i HO 14 25 002S ion I Jt I EEI EFI EFI I 1 F ii i J l l J l l I 1 L EI EFE I EFE EEI I 1 Jt a English subtitles en ee ee ee home bromelhere io Jordan is wi P eel S h eA oo 00 00 00 00 Es AT PE F EA AT ATA r A Transformations T Audio F x 4 w amp 17 E H o0 00 00 00 Timeline Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts Jh Insert Track Shows or hides the Insert Track drop down list Lm Insert Subtitle Text Event Adds a subtitle text event to the selected track fa Insert Video Event Adds a video event J Insert Button Inserts a button into the workspace P Insert Scene Chapter Marker Inserts a scene chapter marker 2p Insert Chapter Marker Adds a chapter marker p Insert Buttons on Video Marker Inserts a button on video marker E Import Subtitles Imports subtitles from a script file re Export Subtitles Exports subtitle content to a script file m p 00 00 49 02 00 00 4o 02 RA Load Markers Loads markers from a file iP Save Markers Saves markers to a file na Auto Ripple Toggles Auto Ripple mode E Quantize to Frames Forces events and markers to frame boundaries pa Enable Timeline Snapping Enables timeline snapping H Set In Point Sets the in point for the title to the cursor position c Set Out Point Sets the out point for the title to the cursor position Set Loop Point Sets the loop point to indicate the point
90. you even more options for creativity when designing your project Among other things you can customize the play order of your disc create simple games and add navigation clues The scripting feature in DVD Architect Pro is based on the DVD Video specification Notes e Your project can contain up to 4 095 scripts e Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects The following are some examples of what you can do with scripting in DVD Architect Pro Create a quiz style game that keeps score based on the user s selections and customizes the result based on the score Play random videos Choose menus or videos to play based on the DVD player s language parental management and other settings Require a passcode to unlock the DVD for playback Scripts have two main functions for DVD playback jumping to a new location such as a track or menu or playing a different stream audio video or subtitle You can assign a script to almost anything in your project that supports scripts such as menus buttons and end actions Each script can contain any combination of three statement types commands labels or comments Commands execute an action for a step in your script Commands can utilize the standard capabilities in most DVD players allowing you to further expand and customize your options for DVD playback These DVD player functions are accessed by the script command using the player s General Purpose Register Memories
91. 0 6 ccc ccc eee e nent e nents eeeneeees 52 Transformation keyframes ccc ccc cece ene ene e eee e eee e eens ee eenennes 52 HERY AINE TOOL ae ara EE atone E A E eho A ead cans EE 53 Editing button order fora MenU ssesusseseseereseserseseresrereserrererreseresrsrese gt 54 Aligning objects in a Menu 6 ec ccc ccc eee ee ee ee ences eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 55 Automatically aligning objects based on current theme ccc cece cece eee e eee enes 55 CENlELING OD ee sararan T boas end aan EEE Gees 55 Adjusting object spacing sss o0s send sueseerasiddedsieweda deeds ieeiwasawen tO6edeea ewww aaeas 55 DGIGTING ODICClS E A E E sues E E E E A E 56 EMaDUNG SNAPPING 414 1656 pees ETETETT EENE TrA RETEA ROTERTE EEE EEEE i 56 SWAP OIG tO E ONG aessa rea TEESEEISE EA 56 PPO TOORE ODIECS ra E EEEE EEE E EA 56 Snapping to safe areas Lc en eee eee ee eee Ebene eee eee ees 56 Using automatic button ACTIONS ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee ee eeeeees 56 Button properties ec cistesexeueore whee menedeedininn ee de iedek sed ede tea wae ia eee Rhee eed 56 Copying and pasting attributes 0 cece eee cence eee eee e eee eeeeees 57 The Navigation 100 2 ox d2cs ctecast ven cerouienswiwencaiuwsuborcieaudieceseseecedow enn 58 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 SEUNG ODI SCE ONGEM a5 chum gacpter steeper epee an cons eee ieee seer eae true eee r rues 59 VIEWING ODJEC OTOCI say tccncwneccnaasateeusaan ET ETTA EIRA EAE E ine es 59 Changi
92. 1 button is the default selected button when you navigate to a menu unless you ve used the Destination button control on the Action or End Action page of the Properties window to specify a different destination button For information editing buttons on video see Editing button order for a video on page 79 1 Choose the menu you want to edit using one of the following methods e Select a menu in the Project Overview window e Click the down arrow in the address bar to select a menu e Click the Back to Parent amp Previous Page 4 and Next Page buttons in the workspace to navigate your menus From the Edit menu choose Button Order The Button Order dialog is displayed By default the button order matches the order in which you added buttons to the menu If you started with a blank menu and added a picture compilation and then a music video compilation the picture compilation would be the default first button Select a button and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the selected button s order Repeat step 3 as needed For a menu the 1 button is the default selected button The order of subsequent buttons has no effect on your menu 54 CHAPTER 4 5 Click OK to close the Button Order dialog and save your changes Aligning objects in a menu 1 Select the Selection tool or Sizing tool 2 Select the objects you want to align You can select multiple objects at once using the Shift
93. 28 instructions DVD script statements are used by DVD Architect Pro software to create DVD instructions so you will need to remove statements from your DVD script before you can prepare your project Follow the steps below to delete statements 1 Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script you want to edit 2 Selecta statement in the DVD Scripts window 3 Press Delete or click the Delete Statement button Extra content folder is not allowed in Blu ray Disc The Extras content folder is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Clear the Extras folder specified on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Disc properties on page 143 Insert chapter marker in title The specified title requires an additional chapter marker between the identified chapters You can add chapter markers from the Timeline window For more information see Working with markers on page 76 Media file is offline One or more of the media files in your project is offline Close and reopen the project and you ll be prompted to specify a new location or replacement file Media file is referenced by too many titles The media file listed in the error message is associated with more than 99 titles Delete some buttons that link to the media file or consider using a playlist Each project can contain up
94. 280x720 24 000 16 9 24 40 Mbps 1280x720 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps 1440x1080 29 970 interlaced 16 9 30 40 Mbps 1440x1080 25 interlaced 16 9 25 40 Mbps 1440x1080 24 000 16 9 24 40 Mbps 1440x1080 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps 1920x1080 29 970 interlaced 16 9 30 40 Mbps 1920x1080 25 interlaced 16 9 25 40 Mbps 1920x1080 24 000 16 9 24 40 Mbps 1920x1080 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps RENDERING FILES FOR YOUR PROJECT 195 DVD Projects You can burn DVD projects to single and dual layer DVDs e A 4 7 GB single layer DVD recordable disc can store over two hours of MPEG 2 video e An 8 5 GB dual layer DVD recordable disc can store approximately 4 hours of MPEG 2 video AC 3 audio ac3 for DVD projects Sample Rate Bit Rate Channels 48 000 Hz 192 Kbps Stereo 64 Kbps to 640 Kbps is supported 48 000 Hz 448 Kbps 5 1 surround 64 Kbps to 640 Kbps is supported PCM audio wav or w64 for DVD projects Sample Rate Bit Depth Channels Compression 48 000 Hz 16 20 or 24 bit Stereo Uncompressed 96 000 Hz 16 20 or 24 bit Stereo Uncompressed NTSC MPEG video m2p mp2 mpg mpeg mpv If you re using the MainConcept MPEG 2 encoder in Vegas Pro software use the DVD Architect NTSC video stream or DVD Architect 24p NTSC video stream template to render your video stream You ll need to render your audio stream separately according to the parameters listed in AC 3 audio ac3 for DVD projects on page 196 or PCM audio wav or w64 for DVD projects on pa
95. 5 Prepare and burn your project For more information see Preparing and Burning Your Project on page 167 Rendering files for your project To ensure that your project preparation and burning process goes smoothly you should save your media files in the supported formats prior to bringing them into your DVD Architect Pro project DVD Architect Pro software supports a wide variety of file formats but some will require transcoding or recompression by the project preparation process lengthening the amount of time needed to complete this operation and possibly resulting in degradation of quality Note The AVC MainConcept MPEG 2 AC 3 and Wave Wave64 encoders in Vegas Pro software provide templates that if used without any modifications result in files that do not require recompression unless the file size is too large to fit ona disc For more information see Rendering Files for Your Project on page 193 Starting a new project You can design your project to be as simple or as complex as you d like consisting of stills video and audio Organization of these components is an important piece of the creation process In the software organization is handled by a project file dar that saves the relevant information about source file locations insertion points chapters text and more This project file is not a multimedia file but is instead used to create the final product when your editing is finished 1 From the File menu
96. CONTENTS Setting thumbnail display crskanccoesesane scenes tentar ri EIN Er EDES 72 Picture compilation Properties ee ieri iire isere riser erir 72 Creating a Single Movie Disc or Title 0 cc ccc cece cece eect eee eeeeeeees 75 Adding a movie title toa MENU 1 eee eee eee eee e eee e ee eeneeeenees 75 Setting IN ANG OUT POINTS os ocx tonics sawed EVAn SEPEN OE EIEEE EESTE EEEE EE NREN UCET 75 Working With Markers 0 6 0044 64066 6000 s anini Ekan EEA EA a haw 76 Inserting scene chapter markers ccc cece cece eee eee e nee e eee ee eeeenaes 76 Inserting Chapter Markers eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eenenes 76 Inserting buttons on video markers cc cc cece eee eee eee e ee eeeeees 76 SACIA S ECUS 454 o00s csac can cusn coed nec ones Coxe unease beeieee Cres EE 77 Moving MKE 1432204 aree e E etdaave thee taeata EE S AAA 77 Deleting E rner ETET TEENAA EEEE 77 EOACING AKO a rr EE AEREE E aes E AREER 78 SAVING E a EAA A E AAA A EEEE EE AEAT 78 Linking titles to Chapter markers sesisrerciiss ienris eee ieni iais e a a 78 Mear TO eere E E E EEEE scene EEEE EER EEES 78 Adding buttons 10 VIGCOS eeriesrisesrisecriurt s Eren E EEEE OA ANEFS 79 Editing Dutton orderTor a videO sisrissariri inaita esea Ir ONEC bea Ta 79 Animating buttons with keyframes cece eee e eee e eee een eeeeeneeees 81 Creating Playlists sererrerri sini toro rE EENEI NENE EET PETEN ETE EIET 83 Adding a playlist to
97. D and Blu ray Disc player compatibility If you need to use interlaced video as a menu background click the Progressive box and choose No When you choose No the noncompliant menu will be rendered as interlaced video Warning Some players will not display the last frame of a menu correctly when using interlaced background video Item Layer Audio Highlight mask Layer Highlight mask mapping Description If the current background video is a still image that uses layers you can choose to display a single layer or the combined layers for your menu background 1 Click the expand button next to the Video heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button f 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to display the combined layers choose Composited layers The Audio box displays the path to the background audio file that will be used in the menu Select control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties or remove the current file If you want to apply a mask to your menu to define highlighting for selected and inactive buttons select the Highlight mask control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings or remove the current file The menu highlight mask and button highlight mask are combined and the Selected b
98. EATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 59 60 CHAPTER 4 Chapter 5 Creating a Music Video Compilation You can create a DVD Architect Pro project that contains a single music or video compilation or you can adda music video compilation to an existing menu A music video compilation contains a list of audio or video files You can display text such as a song title or caption while each file plays and for music video compilations you can choose a video or image to display in the background In a video compilation you create a series of videos that play sequentially This sort of video compilation behaves much like a playlist but it will be written to disc as a single video title set If you have a project with many short videos this loophole in the 99 title set limitation imposed by the DVD specification can save you from rerendering and combining media For more information see Adding a playlist to a menu on page 83 Tip If the audio in a compilation item is longer than the video the last frame is frozen until the end of the audio If the video is interlaced some DVD players will not display this frame correctly Recompressing your compilation as progressive scan video will avoid this problem On the Video tab of the Optimize Disc dialog click the Progressive box and choose Yes or Auto for your music video compilation If you choose Yes each compilation item is recompressed as a separate progressive scan title If you choose Auto each
99. ENDIX D Some video angles in the title have no events on the track The title listed in this error message has an additional video track that has no events Navigate to the title select the Timeline window and delete the track or add events For information about adding alternate video angles see Video tracks on page 88 The end action uses the most recent menu command before a menu is reached The remote button action for a title is set to display the most recently displayed menu before a menu is displayed The Menu button will navigate to the top menu or stop if there are no menus i 2 3 4 Navigate to the title Click the expand button next to the Media Properties heading to expand the Media Properties controls Click the expand button next to the End Action heading to expand the controls Choose a new setting from the Destination drop down list The remote button uses the most recent menu command before a menu is reached The remote button action for a title is set to display the most recently displayed menu before a menu is displayed The Menu button will navigate to the top menu or stop if there are no menus 1 es Navigate to the title Click the expand button next to the Media Properties heading to expand the Media Properties controls Click the expand button next to the Remote Buttons heading to expand the controls Click the expand button next to the Menu heading to expand the controls
100. Error Produces an invalid disc and must be resolved b Click the Optimize button to display the Optimize Disc dialog where you can make changes to individual media file and project settings often allowing you to resolve warnings or errors For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 6 Click the Finish button Your project is prepared as an image file in the folder you specified The application displays a dialog box indicating that the prepare completed successfully click the OK button to continue Burning a Blu ray Disc project DVD Architect Pro allows you to burn current projects or previously prepared projects For information about preparing a project for burning see Preparing a Blu ray Disc project on page 175 1 Click the Make Blu ray Disc button The Make Blu ray Disc wizard is displayed 2 Click the Burn button The Select Image page is displayed PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 175 3 Choose the location where you want to prepare your project or the location of an already prepared image that you want to burn Option Description Current project Select the Current project radio button and type the file path and file name of your new image file in the Prepare burn image box or click Browse to choose a location and file name Previously prepared image Select the Previously prepared image radio button and type the path to an existing image file in the Prepare burn image box or click Browse t
101. GPRMs and System Parameter Register Memories SPRMs Labels are used to mark sections of a script to which you want to link You can link from one section of a script to another using your defined label Comments are used within the script to help you identify and track the purpose of statements Comments are ignored by the script USING SCRIPTING 151 Scripts are created using the DVD Scripts window jinl El gh dh x Script Increment Score Command i Find which title is playing GPRMO SPRM4 Tite if GPRMO 2 then GotoLabel Correct if GPFRMO 5 then GotoLabel Incorrect Correct Correct answer earns a point GPRM1 GPRM1 i Move to the next question Timeline Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts and script statements are defined using the Script Properties window Script Properties Script Statement El Statement type Command El Command Set GPRM Target GPRM 1 Operator El Source Value Value i El Condition None El Left operand GPRM GPRM GPRMO El Right operand Value Value eS Untitled J 1stplay1 if Istplay2 J Lstplay3 24p aia Menu 1 re Menu 1 Page 1 dE DVD Scripts Navigation Adding an existing script to a menu or title To add an existing script to a menu or object drag a script from the DVD Scripts heading in the Project Overview window to the item in the workspace Creating a script If you want to add a script to a menu in an existing menu based pr
102. LE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to DVD Architect Pro software DVD Architect Pro software has everything you need to create and burn professional DVDs and Blu ray Disc projects on your computer You ll be creating picture slideshows single movie discs music video compilations and menu based discs on your computer in no time System requirements Microsoft Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or later or Windows 7 1 GHz processor 400 MB hard disk space for program installation 1 GB RAM OHCI compatible IEEE 1394DV card for external monitor preview Windows compatible sound card Supported DVD R RW R RW drive or BD R RE drive Microsoft DirectX 9 0c or later Microsoft NET Framework 3 0 included on application disc Apple QuickTime 7 1 6 or later You must provide your registration information to Sony Creative Software Inc a US company in order to activate the software Product requires online registration within 30 days Installing DVD Architect Pro software 1 Place the DVD Architect Pro application disc in the drive The setup screen appears if AutoPlay is enabled for your DVD ROM drive If you have disabled the AutoPlay feature click the Start button and choose Run In the Run window that appears type the DVD ROM drive s letter and add setup exe Click OK to start the installation Click Install and then follow the on screen prompts to install the appropriate version of DVD Archit
103. OM lt 4 tanenadciiataasdesodsstoeus ec aa denecesiadenyehi cae eoudaencdande ane ee oun 135 Remoto BUMONS lt 4 Siar can eeugtaercse ru eer oes 94 a PUG A aetone pe ewes 136 SINGS snuenen nee asus ans yout ee 4 te eae a4 ee ea went ee saad bee mentees mewea eens 137 COlONl SOUS gross one5 hia ns 4 catch E EE E EEE eds E E T E eens EES 138 Playlist Properties 2 0 ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eee e eee eee ee eeeeneaees 139 Ea c e seetcoueerecsetansine scone E E E E N AEA E 139 EROA ION seer a E E E E E 139 Era A E EEEE E E E E E 140 SPE PrOPErIES sue oc uttomcmiaonteeos densa nr UREDITE EOR E EREE ENEE OTENE 142 Setting Project Properties sossssssesssssssssssesoesersresssseressrseseo 143 WISE DVO S pE E P E E E E E E E E 143 COPY protection ccc cetcacecescedaadddacbectawsdetanasd bode e Ea 146 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 MOCIONS 005 4 on nag naka mieten depp aun aeaas peace neue era TEE Me sua ene sores sauna en as 147 WiASTCMING E base eae Gare ee reece mi E E E EE EE A aese eae 148 Summary tab inforMation ccc cece ccc eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eens 149 SING TDN chan goncebeceevese E baa et ueueeeebateseseweneatenecen ees 151 Adding an existing script to a menu Or title cece cece ee eeees 152 CheatinG DE aieas eanemaenedua anes EA nea pees cane AA tae ee vid psaene habs 152 Inserting a statement in a script ccc eee cette eee e neta ete eeeeeeeeenes 153 Appending a statement to a script 2 0 cece eee cece eee e e
104. PENDIX E Time Format The format by which DVD Architect Pro software displays the time ruler and selection times These include Time Seconds Frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates Title A title in a disc can be any video music video compilation or picture compilation In the Project Overview window a title is represented by one of the following icons al Video Title re Picture Compilation ra Music Video Compilation Track A discrete timeline for audio data Audio events sit on audio tracks and determine when a sound starts and stops Multiple audio tracks are mixed together to give you a composite sound that you hear through your speakers u Law u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Undo Buffer This is the temporary file created before you do any processing to a project This undo buffer allows the ability to rewrite previous versions of the project if you decide you do not like changes you have made to the project This undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or the Clear Edit History command is invoked Undo Redo These commands allow you to change a project back
105. Press Alt at any time to override these settings at Increase Contrast Increases the contrast of the Size About Center Click if you want the selection box image to retain its center point when you resize the box by dragging its edges When this button is not selected the opposite side of the selection box will remain anchored when you drag the edges to resize it Press Alt at any time to override these settings ol Decrease Contrast Decreases the contrast of the Cq auto Zoom Settings Allows you to choose the image Crop and adjust properties magnification of the image When Auto is selected the image will zoom to fit the current window size Use the Crop and Adjust Properties controls to specify the settings for adjusting an image s appearance or cropping Select the specific control and click the down arrow button to display the individual controls Item Media Brightness Contrast Contrast center Colorize Alpha Description Displays the location and file name of the currently selected media file Use the Brightness controls to adjust the brightness of the image e Select the Brightness box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the overall brightness of the image e Click the expand button next to the Brightness box to display individual controls for the red green and blue channels in the image Select the Red Green or Blue box click the
106. Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum Max Bit Rate 720x576 DVD Architect PAL widescreen video stream 720x576 25 25 Group of Pictures 4 3 30 9 8 Mbps 16 9 30 9 8 Mbps If you re rendering with a different application the following settings will produce a compliant PAL MPEG 2 video stream Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum 704x576 352x576 352x288 704x480 25 25 25 25 4 3 4 3 4 3 16 9 Group of Pictures Max Bit Rate 9 8 Mbps 9 8 Mbps 9 8 Mbps 9 8 Mbps Note The MainConcept MPEG 2 encoder in Vegas Pro renders with the Low Delay flag turned off If you re rendering with a different encoder ensure Low Delay is turned off RENDERING FILES FOR YOUR PROJECT 197 198 APPENDIX B Appendix C Using a Multimedia Controller DVD Architect Pro software supports several multimedia controllers that you can use for mouse free editing and playback Now you can increase your productivity and still have a free hand for your coffee mug This chapter is intended to show you how DVD Architect Pro software interacts with several multimedia controllers that we re familiar with and have tested Other controllers may also work For specific information about your multimedia controller please refer to the manufacturer s documentation Contour ShuttlePro default settings ShuttlePro pref and ShuttlePro v2 pref files are included with your DVD Architect Pro installation You can use these fil
107. Up Down Left Right buttons on the remote to navigate between menu buttons Allows the user to press the Pause button on the remote to temporarily suspend playback Allows the user to press the Audio button on the remote to choose which audio track is played Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Subtitle button on the remote to choose which subtitle track is displayed Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Angle button on the remote to choose which video track is played Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Video Mode button on the remote to switch widescreen letterboxed and pan and scan presentation in a 16 9 video Color sets You can use the Color Sets controls in the Properties window to adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle events You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every title in your project and each title in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color For more information see Using color sets on page 44 130 CHAPTER 11 Picture Compilation Properties The Picture Compilation Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected picture comp
108. VD Architect Pro project but not after it is burned For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 Item Style Mask Layer Mask mapping Description Highlight controls determine the appearance of a button when it is selected and activated e Rectangle Displays a colored rectangle over the button s text and image e Mask overlay Highlights the button s text and image e Text rectangle Displays a colored rectangle around the button text e Image rectangle Displays a colored rectangle around the button image e Text mask overlay Highlights the button text Image mask overlay Highlights the button image e Underline Displays an underline under the button e Custom Allows you to specify a custom highlighting mask image and transparency style If you selected Custom from the Style menu select the Mask box and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a mask file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file or open ina graphics editor If the current mask file uses layers you can choose to display a single layer or the combined layers for your mask 1 Click the expand button next to the Mask heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to display the combined layers choose Composited layers To specify how transparency is d
109. When available if a color set has been designated for the subtitle 120 CHAPTER 11 Menu Page Properties The Menu Page Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the length background media end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected page Menu Page Properties General Background Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets Reduce interlace flicker Off Start Script None Menu length Specify Length 00 08 35 871 Loop point 00 00 00 000 Selected button colors Color set 2 Activated button colors Color set 3 Inactive button colors None all trans To edit the menu s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Menu Page Properties pane General Item Description Reduce interlace flicker Choose a setting from the drop down list to turn flicker reduction on or off Turn flicker reduction on when using still images that contain horizontal lines Start script If you have already created at least one DVD script in your project select the Start Script box click the down arrow button and choose the script that will be played when the music vide
110. You can now Save the characteristics of a menu such as background video or audio button positions sizes shapes and text fonts and formatting and add them to the Themes window for use at any time You can design your own menu or work on a copy of an existing menu and then export it as a theme Note The Buttons window will only display buttons that are defined in the grid theme type Learning about positional and grid themes When you export a menu as a theme using the simple view the theme is exported as a positional theme If you click the Advanced button you can choose to export a grid based theme which gives you more control over the elements in the theme Refer to the following table for details about the data that each theme stores Theme Type Theme Elements Positional Grid menu title including text color position size and text properties X X menu length X X menu loop point X X color set information for selected activated and inactive buttons X X information about effects cropping brightness contrast and colorization for each saved graphical element X text and graphics with the menu X X information about buttons size position image media text text properties image and text layout X grid layout information X X reduce interlace flicker setting X background video audio media and highlight mask images and settings Working with positional themes Applying a positional theme When applying a position
111. a In 27758 Tagalog tl 29804 Corsican CO 25455 Lithuanian It 27764 Tajik tg 29799 Croatian hr 26738 Macedonian mk 28011 Tamil ta 29793 Czech CS 25459 Malagasy mg 28007 Tatar tt 29812 Danish da 25697 Malay ms 28019 Telugu te 29797 Dutch nl 28268 Malayalam ml 28012 Thai th 29800 English en 25966 Maltese mt 28020 Tigrinya ti 29801 Esperanto eo 25967 Maori mi 28009 Tonga to 29807 Estonian et 25972 Marathi mr 28018 Tsonga ts 29811 Faroese fo 26223 Moldavian mo 28015 Turkish tr 29810 Fiji fj 26218 Mongolian mn 28014 Turkmen tk 29803 Finnish fi 26217 Nauru na 28257 Twi tw 29815 French fr 26226 Nepali ne 28261 Ukrainian uk 30059 Frisian fy 26233 Norwegian no 28271 Urdu ur 30066 Galician gl 26476 Occitan Oc 28515 Uzbek UZ 30074 Georgian ka 27489 Oriya or 28530 Vietnamese vi 30313 German de 25701 Oromo om 28525 Volapuk vo 30319 Greek el 25964 Pashto ps 28787 Welsh cy 25465 Greenlandic kl 27500 Persian fa 26209 Wolof wo 30575 Guarani gn 26478 Polish pl 28780 Xhosa xh 30824 Gujarati gu 26485 Portuguese pt 28788 Yiddish ji 27241 Hausa ha 26721 Punjabi pa 28769 Yoruba yo 31087 Hebrew iw 26999 Quechua qu 29045 Zulu zu 31349 158 CHAPTER 13 Region codes When you set a region code 1 8 for a project a SPRM20 value is automatically inserted in the Script Debugger Pane Note The SPRM20 value can not be changed manually If your project is encoded for multiple regions the SPRM value allows your project player to read the bitmask and determine if the
112. a MQNU ccc ccc ccc cece ene teen a SA 83 Adding a playlist without alink ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eee ee eeeennnees 83 Adding titles toa DIAVIISE os5 eck dvdendae ee daned Saws deGuseaselaews Bede agave medaesames 84 Deleting titles from a playlist 2 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eee eee n eee eeeeeeeeeees 84 Rearranging titles in a playlist 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee teen eee teen eee eeeees 84 Renaming a playlist ccc ccc ccc eee een e eee eee e eee e eee eeeeenas 84 Playlist DIODCIVIGS cereri erransa ar EEEE EEEE EnS EREE A EE REE EE 84 Adding Audio Video and Subtitles ccc cc ccc cece cee e teen eee eeenneees 87 AdO TACKS era hath th ncew di E sonnet donat aden d hens Rae dee daw oie bnew se eRe EE 87 Adding audio rocke arc ae intra enn ceed rau EENT ANEETA EENE EANET ANA 87 Replacing audio in a track suusnnsunsnesessessesseeserseserserserresorsressesresrese 88 Setting the audio track for timeline playback sssesesensssesesesesesesssssssesesesee 88 Changing audio track Colors seeririrerretirieriertr it EESiES EPEE EEANN EEEE PERAE 88 VICO EEA ERE VEE OE AE EEEE Gaede EOE EROE EEE EOE 88 Adding VideO TACKS esannda dade widen naa cde RENARE PENE ETIE EPET EE ARTEAREN 88 Adding video to TACKS sererirriei rirerire EIENEN seve EEEE OEN AR ENEA 89 Setting the video track for timeline playback ccc ccc eee eee nent e eee neeeees 89 Changing VIGGO ThaCK COIOMS icc tsansGiwii
113. a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu does not remove the DVDArchWindowLayout file from your computer Deleting a layout from your computer 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 180 CHAPTER 17 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 3 Click the Delete Layout button to remove the selected layout from your computer Note You cannot delete a layout that is included in the Current layouts in menu ist First select the layout in the Current layouts in menu ist and click the Clear button Next select the layout in the Available layouts in current folder list and click the Delete Layout button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Using the toolbar The main toolbar is automatically displayed below the menu bar However you can hide and customize the toolbar to suit your preferences The settings that you apply to the toolbar remain set until you change them again Hiding and displaying the toolbar If you prefer to use shortcut keys when working with your project you can hide the toolbar to create more workspace Choose Toolbar from the View menu to hide it The check mark next to the command is removed and the toolbar disappears The toolbar remains hidden until you choose Toolbar from the View menu to display it again Reordering toolbar buttons The main toolbar
114. ack at the specified destination In the Destination drop down list choose the media file that will be accessed Stop Stop playback You can also specify that playback is stopped only if the specified conditions are met 154 CHAPTER 13 Next you can set the conditions that must be present for the command to execute Item Description Condition None No conditions must be met the command will always execute as specified in the Command drop down list lt Less than The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is less than the specified right operand item lt Less than or equal The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is less than or equal to the specified right operand item Equal The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is equal to the specified right operand item gt Greater than or equal The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is greater than or equal to the specified right operand item gt Greater The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is greater than the specified right operand item I Not equal The command will be executed if the specified GPRM is not equal to the specified right operand item amp And The script performs a bitwise AND comparison If the result of the bitwise AND comparison is 0 then the condition is false and the command is not executed If the result of the bitwise AND comparison is anything other than 0 then the condition is true and
115. aintained in the alpha and RGB channels and the image is ready for compositing No RGB component exceeds the alpha value Premultiplied dirty Similar to Premultiplied but RGB components may exceed the alpha This setting is used mainly for images created by 3D applications involving compositing of 3D images over a non solid color image background Background color If you selected Premultiplied or Premultiplied dirty from the Alpha channel drop down then this allows you to choose the background color of the selected media file Audio Stream Item Description Media attributes Displays the size resolution and length of the selected media file Media format Displays the format of the selected media file Opening in graphics editor If you need to edit a graphics file from your project right click a graphic in the workspace and choose Open in Graphics Editor from the shortcut menu or select the Video box in the Properties window click the down arrow button and then choose Open in Graphics Editor from the menu to start your graphic editing application and modify the selected image After you have edited and saved the file DVD Architect Pro software automatically detects the updated file and updates it in the project You can specify the location of your preferred graphics editor on the Video tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Video tab on page 183 Moving and arranging objects You have many options f
116. al theme items on the menu display exactly as defined in the current theme Applying a positional theme type will operate differently depending on whether or not buttons currently exist on the menu to which the theme is being applied If no buttons exist then all buttons from the theme are added sized and positioned as defined in the theme If one or more buttons exist then the buttons are updated based on their matches in the theme However if there are more buttons on the menu than the number defined in the theme then the extra buttons on the menu will not change Text and graphical elements will be updated based on the theme e f more text or graphical elements exist on the menu than are defined in the theme then extra elements will not be updated e If fewer text or graphical elements exist on the menu than are defined in the theme then extra elements will be added Exporting as a positional theme 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu that you want to use to create your theme 2 From the File menu choose Export Menu as Theme The Export Menu as Theme dialog is displayed Tip In the workspace right click the menu and choose Export Menu as Theme 110 CHAPTER 10 3 Inthe Name box type a name for the theme Note Your theme name can have no more than 16 characters including spaces 4 Click the Save button The Themes window is refreshed and your
117. are will automatically use MyProject wav as the audio track when you add MyProject mpg to a menu For more information see General tab on page 182 After you ve added your media you can use the top portion of the DVD Architect Pro workspace to lay out your project For more information see Creating a Menu Based Project on page 35 e Creating a Music Video Compilation on page 61 e Creating a Picture Compilation on page 67 e Creating a Single Movie Disc or Title on page 75 Setting the disc start item The start item is the item that plays by default when your disc is played in a DVD or Blu ray Disc player In a menu based project for example the main menu is typically your start item Note f you have designated a DVD start script the script will execute prior to the disc start item you set Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Use the Set Disc Start button E in the Project Overview window to assign an item from your project as the disc start item 1 Select an object in the Project Overview window 2 Click the Set Disc Start button E The start item is displayed with a video strip icon g if it is an object and a menu icon 9 if it is a menu Adding introduction first play media Use the Insert Introduction Media option in the Project Overview window to add a media file to your project and set it as your disc Start item You could use introduction media to add copyright information or a corporate
118. area 56 source projects 32 SpaceShuttle 200 spacing adjusting 55 SPRMs 157 start item 28 Start script 121 statement types Command 154 Comment 155 Label 155 stereoscopic 3D media 161 Stop command type 154 sub files 92 submenus adding 35 adding from file 36 subtitle colors 120 subtitle event position 93 subtitle properties 126 Subtitle track number 157 subtitles adding text 90 adding tracks 90 adjusting event length 94 adjusting event timing 93 changing track colors 95 copying event formatting 94 creating from Vegas regions 93 creating graphic subtitles 91 default language 186 editing event color sets 95 exporting 92 importing 92 inserting graphic subtitles 91 setting to display automatically 95 setting track for timeline playback 95 summary information 149 Super fast forward rewind amount 186 System Parameter Register Memories SPRMs 157 system requirements 11 Temporary files folder 187 testing scripts 156 text adding to music video compilations 63 adding to picture compilations 71 deleting from music video compilations 64 deleting from picture compilations 71 editing in menus 39 editing in music video compilations 64 editing in picture compilations 71 formatting in menus 39 formatting in music video compilations 64 formatting in picture compilations 71 inserting in menus 39 moving in menus 40 moving in music video compilations 64 moving in picture com
119. art playback in the timeline 3 During playback use the following shortcut keys to adjust your subtitle events Shortcut Key Description Sets the start of the subtitle event at the cursor position Sets the end of the subtitle event at the cursor position and selects the next subtitle event Hold Shift while pressing to set the end of the subtitle event without selecting the next event Sets the end of the current subtitle event and the start of the next subtitle event at the cursor position T Creates a subtitle event at the cursor position Press T again before the cursor passes the end of the event to set the end of the event and create a new event 4 Repeat step 3 to set the position of each subsequent subtitle event Adjusting a subtitle event s length A subtitle event s length on the timeline determines how long it is displayed on screen Note Subtitle events in DVD projects cannot exceed 12 minutes when playing your project with a DVD player If an event exceeds 12 minutes the subtitle will be displayed on screen only for the first 12 minutes 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible 3 Hover over the edge of an event The trim cursor is displayed 4 Dragan event edge to change its length If the Auto Ripple button is
120. at will be used If a picture compilation has multiple audio tracks there will be a separate Audio control for each track Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties or remove the current file Tip You can also change the audio by dragging a new audio file from the Explorer window to the Audio box or to a slide in the Compilation window THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 131 End Action Item Command Destination Destination chapter Destination item Destination button Set audio track Set subtitle track 132 CHAPTER 11 Description Determines what happens after the last slide is displayed e Link You can link to any menu media file and chapter point Use the Destination Destination chapter Destination item or Destination button controls to set the target e Stop Your disc will stop playing after the last slide When Link is selected in the Command drop down list choose the menu or media file that will be displayed Note If you want the user s remote control navigation to follow the same path as your end actions set the media file s end action and the remote s Menu button to the same target destination If no menu has been displayed Most recent menu will display the first menu on the disc When your end action links to a video music video compilation picture compilation or playlist choose the specific chapter in the desti
121. ation of keyframes along the path CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 53 E Options Chapters x amp Ss n er l ii a hrialis 2 BW BE EE Dh E y Edit Tee Drag the keyframe control points to edit an object s position or path Using the control points you can also create B zier curves that the object will follow during the animation If you have multiple keyframes intermediate control points are inserted as pairs so you can set your tangent Edit the intermediate control points by right clicking and choosing an option from the shortcut menu Item Description Smooth As you drag a control point the tangent follows a straight line and the paired control points remain equidistant from the main path Straight As you drag a control point the tangent follows a straight line but the other control point retains its original distance from the main path Corner As you drag a control point the location of the other control point remains fixed allowing you to create an angled tangent from the main path Tip These settings cannot be applied to end control points which mark the first and last keyframes in a series Note You can also use the Transformations page in the Properties window to view and edit object size and position Editing button order for a menu From the Edit menu choose Button Order to display the Button Order dialog where you can set the order for buttons on the selected menu The
122. aximum of 999 unique titles Select titles in the Project Overview window and delete them There is not enough space in the temporary files folder for preparing the disc There is not enough space in your temporary files folder to prepare your project You can specify a different folder on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog Choose a folder on the drive where you have the most available space For more information see Burning tab on page 187 Title is too short A multiangle title in a Blu ray Disc project must be at least 10 seconds long Either edit the specified title to make it at least 10 seconds or select the title in the Project Overview window and replace it with a different title of at least 10 seconds Too many buttons on a menu Menus in a DVD widescreen project can have a maximum of 18 buttons and menus in a DVD full screen project can have a maximum of 36 buttons Menus in a Blu ray Disc project can have a maximum of 255 buttons Navigate to the menu and delete objects as necessary Video cannot be recompressed because its bit rate is too low When the bit rate of a video is too low it may not play back properly on some players Recompress with a higher bit rate 1 Select the title in the Optimize Disc dialog and click the Video tab 2 Select the Recompress box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu 3 Select the Use default bit rate box click the down arrow button and choose Yes fro
123. ayed in the selected playlist Choose No change to use the last set track Set video angle Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played when this item is played in the selected playlist Choose No change to use the last set angle Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 141 Script Properties The Script Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust settings for each statement in your DVD script Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Script Properties Script Statement Statement type Command Command Set GPRM Target GPRM1 Operator El Source Value Value 1 El Condition None El Left operand GPRM GPRM GPRMO El Right operand Value Value D To edit a script s properties perform the following steps 1 Ifthe window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to select the script you want to edit or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window 3 Inthe DVD Scripts window click the statement you want to edit The Script Properties are displayed in the Properties window For more informat
124. ble click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 From the Edit menu choose Page Order and then choose Move Forward or Move Back to move the current menu forward or backward Editing menu page properties The Menu Page Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the length background media end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected page Menu Page Properties General Background Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets Reduce interlace flicker Off Start Script None Menu length Specify Length 00 08 35 871 Loop point 00 00 00 000 Selected button colors Color set 2 Activated button colors Color set 3 Inactive button colors None all trans To edit the menu s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu For more information see Menu Page Properties on page 121 Adding titles The buttons and graphics displayed on a menu are called objects Some of these objects such as graphics and static text are used for design purposes and others such as buttons are used for navigation purposes In a DVD project each full screen menu can hold up
125. c change the button properties for all links to your media so No change is selected for the Set audio track and Set subtitle track controls Adding navigation buttons Navigation buttons help users move through your menus and pages As you create menus and pages navigation buttons are automatically created for you For example if the main menu is selected when you add a submenu a button link to the new menu is added to the main menu and a button link to the main menu is added to the new menu If you delete the default navigation buttons you can create new buttons by choosing a command from the Insert menu Command Description Back Button Allows navigation to the main menu Next Button Allows navigation to the next page Previous Button Allows navigation to the previous page Empty Button Allows you to add an empty button as a placeholder You can edit the button s properties later Note The Back Button Next Button and Previous Button commands are available only if the target menu or page exists You can use the Button Properties controls in the Properties window to edit the button image used and its link properties For more information see Button Properties on page 115 Creating menu transitions You can combine button actions and media end actions to play a media file as a transition between menus and between menus or titles 1 Drag the transition media file from the Explorer or Microsoft Windows Explorer to the root f
126. cally aligning 55 centering 55 changing position 52 deleting 56 moving 51 order 59 resizing 45 Snapping 56 OHCI 1394 lEEE cards 166 online help 12 opening graphics in a graphics editor 51 183 opening projects 26 optimizing projects 29 32 order of objects 59 out point setting 75 pages adding buttons 43 adding to menus 36 deleting from menus 36 inserting text 39 PAL MPEG video 197 Parental control 186 Parental management level 157 Paste offset 185 PCM audio 196 picture compilations adding images 67 adding text 71 adding to menus 37 67 adjusting brightness and contrast of images 70 deleting text 71 editing images 70 editing text 71 end actions 132 formatting text 71 generating slideshow animation 68 inserting audio 72 inserting empty slides 70 inserting graphics 72 moving text 71 properties 131 134 reducing interlace flicker 131 replacing images 68 rotating images 69 setting display duration 70 setting thumbnail size 72 stretching or scaling images 69 play all 41 play chapter 41 playback timeline 88 playlists adding titles to 84 adding to menus 83 adding without link 83 deleting titles from 84 end actions 139 overview 83 properties 139 141 rearranging titles 84 renaming 84 Playlists window 22 preferences Burning tab 187 Display tab 186 Editing tab 185 General tab 182 Mastering tab 187 Preview tab 186 setting 182 187 Video Device tab
127. can use this feature for menus picture compilations and music video compilations Using the timeline you can drag keyframes to adjust their position add and delete keyframes and change the interpolation curve between keyframes Notes Crop and video effect keyframes are set in the Crop and Adjust window and are not visible in the timeline For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 To insert transformation keyframes for a button Show before loop point must be set to Yes for the object in the Transformations page in the item s Properties window and the loop point must be set to a point later than 00 00 00 000 on the timeline For more information see Animating buttons with keyframes on page 81 Transformation keyframes are not available for buttons on video or for graphics inserted on video titles For more information see Adding buttons to videos on page 79 Adding transformation keyframes 1 Inthe workspace select the item to which you want to add a keyframe 2 Inthe Timeline window right click in the Transformations keyframe bar below your video track and choose Insert from the shortcut menu A keyframe is added to the Transformation keyframe bar 3 Subsequent keyframe s attributes are copied from the previous keyframe Tips To quickly add a keyframe perform any of the following steps e Double click on the Transformation keyframe bar e Position the cursor on the Transformation k
128. cc cee eee cece e sense enneeeees 65 Creating a Picture COMpiIlation 0 eee eee eee ennaees 67 Adding a picture compilation to a M NU cece eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeee 67 Adding and editing images ccc cece cece cece e eee e eee e esse eee eeeeeeeeeeee 67 acicladiseMstc 6 ae eee E A E ee ee eT ee ee ee ee ey 67 REDIECING AN IMAGE awe obsnsnsstudchacodcsaus sracedbainseracatteduseraaatuteseerensiwsdaaay 68 Generating slideshow animation cc cece cece eect eee e eee e eee e en eeeeeaenes 68 Setting image stretching Or SCAlING 0 cece cece cece cette eee e eee ene eeenees 69 POE iol gal G a are ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er ee ee 69 Adjusting brightness and contrast or editing the image ccc cece ccc cece eee teens 70 Setting display duration from the Picture Compilation Properties window 70 Setting display duration from the timeline cece cece cece nent eee een eeeeees 70 Inserting an empty Slide 250404000050 ewsorw ritr resin R SEERE oseudees ener yawn 70 Adding and editing text seerririssisrt es rsr rine e EE EE E E a ES 71 PAGING TO x E EEE EE A E A E EE E E E E E oe 71 PONTON OT T aa aae EAA EAA AE A E AE E ean AAAA AA 71 EEE rae A T ET E E EEEE EE S 71 MOVIDO T ar E E A E E EE EE AA 71 Bae E o EE E E N E E E A E EE E T ET 71 Inserting A GFAPNIC 0 ccc ccc eee a E eee eee eee eee eeeees 72 DAT UO sccu0d 0tad nia E AAE E AA ENSA 72 4 TABLE OF
129. choose New The New Project dialog is displayed 2 On the General tab click the type of project that you want to create Type of project Description saa Menu Based Produces a disc that displays a menu when played Users can move through the menu a items and select what they d like to view You can add any kind of media to a menu based disc In addition you can add multiple menus and titles music video compilations picture compilations and movies For more information see Creating a Menu Based Project on page 35 Music Video Produces a disc containing a compilation of audio or video files You can choose a still P Compilation image or video to associate with each audio file Music video compilations contain no menus but users can skip forward and backward through tracks using their remote control For more information see Creating a Music Video Compilation on page 61 _ Picture Produces a disc that displays a slideshow of still images You can choose one oS Compilation background audio track to play while the pictures are displayed Picture compilations contain no menus but users can skip forward and backward through pictures using their remote control For more information see Creating a Picture Compilation on page 67 GETTING STARTED 25 Type of project Description Single Movie Produces a disc containing a single movie Single movies contain no menus or other media aside from introductory video audio if desired For mo
130. ck the First Keyframe or Last Keyframe button Changing interpolation curves between keyframes The interpolation curve determines the rate of animation between two keyframe settings To change the interpolation curve right click a selected keyframe and choose a command from the shortcut menu The curve type is updated for all selected keyframes Command Description Looks like Linear Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a linear path on ae i Fast Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a fast logarithmic path a _ amp Slow 4 Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a slow logarithmic path D Smooth Keyframe parameters are interpolated along a smooth natural curve o Sharp Keyframe parameters are interpolated along a sharp curve On Hold No animation will take place The keyframe s settings will be maintained until the next lt gt keyframe gt Moving keyframes After you ve set your keyframes you may need to adjust their positions along the Keyframe Controller timeline Drag a keyframe to a new position in the timeline to change its position Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple keyframes A selected keyframe is displayed as and an unselected keyframe is displayed asa lt gt Editing crop settings After you ve inserted your keyframes you can use the Crop controls in the Crop and Adjust window s Properties pane to specify your cropping settings for indiv
131. ck the Identify displays button to determine which display corresponds to each setting in the drop down list A number will be displayed on each monitor Note f the monitor number is displayed in red the graphics card does not support 3D acceleration or acceleration has been turned off In Windows you can go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display gt Settings gt Advanced gt Troubleshoot to turn on acceleration if your adapter supports it 5 From the Display mode drop down list choose the frame size and refresh rate you want to use for the secondary display Setting Description Use Current Settings Video is displayed using the monitor s resolution and refresh rate specified in the Windows Display Properties control panel 184 CHAPTER 17 Setting Description Automatic Size Settings The software will attempt to choose the optimum resolution and refresh rate This setting overrides the Windows Display Properties setting as long as the secondary display window is active Pick Custom Settings You can choose the resolution and refresh rate you want to use This setting overrides the Windows Display Properties setting as long as the secondary display window is active 6 Select the Scale output to fit display check box if you want the video preview to fill the display 7 Select the Apply deinterlace filter check box if you re previewing interlaced video on a noninterlaced display This filter can reduce the artifacts yo
132. ckground audio click the Fit compilation to audio button Based on the length of your audio the length of time each slide is displayed is automatically adjusted Setting display duration from the timeline Another way to set the duration of slides is through the adjustment of markers on the timeline This is especially helpful if you want to precisely match your pictures to audio 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the picture compilation you want to edit 2 Inthe Timeline window drag the marker tab to a new position Note A marker is automatically inserted at the beginning of each slide Inserting an empty slide You can insert an empty slide anywhere in your project by choosing the Empty Slide option from the Insert menu The empty slide is inserted above the currently selected slide in the Compilation window Once you have inserted an empty slide you can add text and or graphics to it 70 CHAPTER 6 Adding and editing text Adding text You can add text to each slide of your compilation Note f you want the image file name automatically inserted on each slide choose Auto Insert Slide Text from the Options menu 1 Inthe Compilation window select the slide to which you want to add text 2 From the Insert menu choose Text A text box is added in the workspace 3 Type your text in the text box Formatting text 1 Select the image
133. code in position timecode out position and subtitle text a Type a number to identify the subtitle event and then press Tab b Type the timecode position where you want the event to appear on screen and then press Tab c Type the timecode position where you want the event to disappear from the screen and then press Tab d Type the subtitle text you want to display on screen and then press Enter Repeat step 2 for each subtitle event When your re finished you ll have a file that looks something like the following sample Subtitle Template sub Notepad File Edit Format View Help 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 Text for Subtitle Event 1 0001 00 00 10 00 00 00 15 00 Text for Subtitle Event 000 00 00 20 00 00 00 25 00 Text for Subtitle Event 3 0003 00 00 30 00 00 00 35 00 Text for Subtitle Event 4 Save the text document with a sub file extension You can now import the subtitles from your sub file For more information see Importing subtitles from a file on page 92 Exporting subtitles 1 2 3 4 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible Select a subtitle track in the Timeline window Click the Export Subtitles button i in the Timeline window The Export Subtitles dialog is displayed to allow you to specify a file name and location for
134. compilation item is recompressed as a separate title and will match the format of the source media If the audio is longer than the video the compilation item will be recompressed as progressive scan video to prevent artifacts when the last frame is held For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 Note Each title ina DVD project can have no more than 99 chapter markers Each title in a Blu ray Disc project can have no more than 255 chapter markers In a compilation with more songs or videos than chapter markers you can navigate to the last chapter marker with the Next Chapter button on the remote control and then use the Fast Forward button to navigate past the last chapter For more information about starting projects and locating media see Getting Started on page 25 Adding a music video compilation to a menu If you want to add a music or video compilation to a menu in an existing menu based project the process is easy 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu from which you want to link to the music video compilation From the Insert menu choose Music Video Compilation A button is added to the menu as a link to the compilation Tip Click the Insert Object button in the Project Overview window and then choose Music Video Compilation Double click the music video compilation s button to begin assembling your compilation Tip Buttons can be
135. creating multiple files where possible Tip To avoid rerendering you can create a music video compilation made up of video files This video compilation behaves much like a playlist but it will be written to your DVD as a single video title set Ifyou have a project with many short videos this loophole in the 99 title set limitation imposed by the DVD specification can save you from rerendering and combining media The project may not be compatible with some DVD players because it uses too many titles Most players do not support more than 99 titles Select titles in the Project Overview window and delete them The remote menu button action is broken The action assigned to the Menu button on the remote control refers to a broken link This can occur when you delete items from your project For example if the Menu button is set to link to a menu the Menu button action will be broken if you delete menu two from your project 1 Navigate to the title with the broken action and click the expand button next to the Media Properties heading to expand the Media Properties controls 2 Click the expand button l next to the Remote Buttons heading to expand the controls 3 Click the expand button next to the Menu heading to expand the controls and then choose a new setting from the Destination drop down list to resolve the broken link The timeout of a menu occurs before the loop point The menu s loop point establishes the poin
136. ctivated or inactive a b A d Click the General button in the Menu Page Properties pane Choose a setting from the Selected button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight buttons on the menu when they are selected using the arrow buttons on the remote control Choose a setting from the Activated button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight the selected buttons on the menu when the user presses the Enter button on the remote control Choose a setting from the Inactive button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight buttons on the menu when they are not selected Verify that your buttons do not have their own highlight mask settings a b C d Select all the buttons in the workspace Hold Ctrl or Shift while click to select multiple objects Click the Highlight button at the top of the Button Properties pane Choose Custom from the Style drop down list Choose None from the Mask drop down list The menu background and highlight mask combine to produce the following result when the button on the right is selected USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 101 Creating custom menus and buttons using layered graphics For control over the appearance of your menus you can create custom menus and buttons using your favorite graphics application and import the psd file as a menu For more information see Adding a subm
137. cursor position and the positions of all existing events are preserved Click the Insert Subtitle This will add a subtitle event at the cursor position in all selected tracks The text box in the Text Event button workspace is not made editable but you can edit the text later 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create subtitle text as needed through the project 90 CHAPTER 9 Creating a graphic subtitle To create a graphic subtitle open your image editing software and create a new project Your subtitle graphic should match the frame size in DVD Architect Pro For example if the frame resolution is 4 3 NTSC 720 pixels x 480 pixels in DVD Architect Pro the subtitle graphic should be 720 pixels x 480 pixels Note f you use a graphic that does not match the frame size adjust its position after importing it For more information see Graphics Properties on page 113 Now you can choose the type of highlight mapping for your project Highlight mapping Background color Text color Transparency Transparent Black Graphics can have one layer transparency with text or two layers a transparent background layer and text layer Intensity Black White This option gives the text a more polished smooth look Note Anti alias colors are mapped to the four colors in the color set Color channel Black Red blue or green This option allows you to use different colors simultaneously To change the text color see the text immediately f
138. d action and the remote s Menu button to the same target destination If no menu has been displayed Most recent menu will display the first menu on the disc When your end action links to a video music video compilation or picture compilation choose the specific chapter in the destination file that will be displayed When your end action links to a menu choose Start or Loop Point to indicate the point from which the menu will be played When your end action links to a menu you can choose the button you want to use as the default selected button in the destination menu If you choose Default the first button listed under the menu in the Project Overview window is used as the default Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set audio track contro to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Choose Off to turn subtitles off or choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set subtitle track control to change the subtitle track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or
139. d in a table format You can sort the files according to a category by clicking the column label for that category All files Displays all file types in the selected folder Themes window Alt 4 The Themes window is used to apply a theme to your menu based project From the View menu choose Themes to show or hide the Themes window A theme is a style sheet for a menu page Each theme can contain a background image button type layout style button behaviors text style and embedded navigation behaviors You can apply themes to specific menu pages as you work Each new page you add to that menu will default to using the same theme DVD Architect Pro software includes some themes for you to use and you can also create your own themes and apply them to your projects For more information see Working with themes on page 108 LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 17 CLL a ae E E Double click a theme to apply it to a menu American Football Animated 1 Artistic 1 Bubbly Corporate 1 E Apply Theme Allows you to apply themes to 9 Delete Theme Allows you to delete your own o specific menu pages as you work custom themes Buttons window Alt 5 The Buttons window displays buttons that are available from installed themes and from your DVD Architect Pro installation From the View menu choose Buttons to show or hide the Buttons window You can use the Buttons window to a
140. d of viewable area of timeline when zoomed in Move cursor left right Move one frame left right Preview current title in workspace starting at the set in point Insert chapter Set in out points Set loop point Insert audio track Insert video track Insert subtitle track Press Ctrl Shift T 7 Preview Press Page Up Page Down Prev Track Next Track Windows multimedia keyboard only Ctrl Left Arrow Right Arrow Ctrl Shift Left Arrow Right Arrow F9 Ctrl F9 Shift F9 Spacebar Shift Spacebar Mouse shortcuts Press Ctrl drag object Shift drag object Alt drag object Ctrl drag edge of object with sizing tool Shift drag edge of object with sizing tool Ctrl Shift drag edge of object with sizing tool Result Insert subtitle text on active track and make subtitle text editable Insert subtitle text on all selected tracks without editing text Result Previous next chapter or page Fast forward reverse Super fast forward reverse Preview current title in Preview window starting at the timeline cursor position Preview disc in Preview window Preview current title in Preview window starting at the set in point Preview current title in Preview window starting at the timeline cursor position Preview current title in workspace starting at the set in point Result Copy object Override snapping Constrain motion horizontally or vertically Resize object from center Resize proportionally Re
141. d pictures to your compilation If this option is enabled or disabled after you have started adding pictures it only applies to the pictures added from that point Adding a picture compilation to a menu If you want to add a picture compilation to a menu in an existing menu based project the process is easy 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu from which you want to link to the picture compilation 2 From the Insert menu choose Picture Compilation A button is added to the menu as a link to the compilation Tip Click the Insert Object button in the Project Overview window and then choose Picture Compilation 3 Double click the compilation s button to begin assembling your compilation Adding and editing images Inserting images There are several ways to add images to your compilation ot 4 of OL Gt Gy ism x a pn P 5 ou XA Ol el Ba A s Image Length Image Filename 1 00 00 09 443 guitarist pmg 2 E 00 00 09 443 Mandolinist png 3 pi 00 00 09 443 Cellist png Timeline Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts e Use the Explorer window to locate and select image files and drag them to the Compilation window You can select multiple files at once using the Shift key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files Files are added to the compilation list wherever you drag them e Use the Explorer window t
142. dd new buttons to your menus replace existing buttons or remove frames from existing buttons Use the toolbar to add or replace buttons Fo ot Im O All sources y i Drag a button to the workspace to add it to a menu Insert Button Adds the selected button with B Show Framed Buttons Shows only buttons no link to the current menu with frames in the Buttons window gy Replace Button Replaces the selected button in Show Non Framed Buttons Shows only l the workspace with the selected button in the buttons without frames in the Buttons window Buttons window g Remove Frame Removes the frame from the Show All Buttons Shows buttons with or selected button in the workspace l without frames in the Buttons window Backgrounds window Alt 6 The Backgrounds window displays menu backgrounds that are available from installed themes and from your DVD Architect Pro installation From the View menu choose Backgrounds to show or hide the Backgrounds window You can use the Backgrounds window to add a background to a menu page or change an existing background 18 CHAPTER 2 Themes Buttons Backgrounds Compilation window Alt 7 The Compilation window displays a listing of the items in a music video compilation or picture compilation From the View menu choose Compilation to show or hide the Compilation window You can use this window to arrange the items in a compilatio
143. deo compilation picture compilation or playlist choose the specific chapter in the destination file that will be displayed When your end action links to a menu choose Start or Loop Point to indicate the point from which the menu will be played When your end action links to a menu you can choose the button you want to use as the default selected button in the destination menu If you choose Default the first button listed under the menu in the Project Overview window is used as the default Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set audio track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty audio tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding audio tracks on page 87 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Choose Off to turn subtitles off or choose No change to use the last set track Note
144. deo is added to the song Select an image in the Explorer window and drag it to a song Right click a song and choose Set Video Image from the shortcut menu The Set Video Image dialog is displayed Select an image and click the Open button The image or video is added to the song 62 CHAPTER 5 e On the Music Video Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button Click Video click the down arrow button and choose Replace from the menu The Open Media dialog is displayed Select a new video or image file and click the Open button The video or image is replaced with your new selection Replacing an image or video 1 Right click the image you want to replace and choose Set Video Image from the shortcut menu The Set Video Image dialog is displayed 2 Select a replacement file and click the Open button Setting image stretching or scaling You can use the tools at the top of the Compilation window to rotate a song s image or set the stretch type that will be used to scale the image 1 Select an item in the Compilation window 2 On the Music Video Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button 3 Click Stretch type click the down arrow button and choose one of the following stretch types e Letterbox The image is displayed without scaling and black letterboxing bars are added above and below or on the sides as needed e Zoom to fit The image is magnified to fill the screen Stretch to fit The image is st
145. determines which frame is displayed To change the start time select the box and type a new setting or select the box and click the down arrow button ll to display a slider that you can use to adjust the setting Determines whether the button is displayed as a still image or an animated button e Still Choose Still to display a static image in the button If your thumbnail file is animated the Start time setting determines which frame is displayed e Animated The animated thumbnail file is played in the button frame Displays the path to the current frame image file Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view Media Properties crop and adjust media settings or remove the current file If the current frame file uses layers you can choose to display a single layer or the combined layers for your thumbnail image 1 Click the expand button next to the Frame Media heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to display the combined layers choose Composited layer Displays the path to the current mask file A frame mask determines which portion of the frame will be visible Select the control and click the button to display a menu where you can choose a file view Media Properties crop and adjust media settings or remove the current file For more informat
146. dit a portion of your project When you reprepare your project only the portions of the project that have changed will be prepared Select the Previously prepared folder radio button and type the path to the folder that contains a prepared project in the Prepared folder box or click Browse to choose a folder 5 If you selected the Current project radio button in step 3 DVD Architect Pro software displays a list of messages about your project and estimates the project s final size on the Review Message List page a Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Message Type Description g Informational Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action E3 Warning Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action ji Error Produces an invalid DVD and must be resolved b Click the Optimize button to display the Optimize Disc dialog where you can make changes to individual media file and project settings often allowing you to resolve warnings or errors For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 c Click the Next button 6 The subtitle and menu highlight mask files in your project are analyzed to ensure that they are ready for burning and a message list is displayed with the results Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments 172 CHAPTER 16 On the Update Mastering Properties page you can choose to update the settings from the Project Properties dialog a b d Click the
147. down list Choose None from the Mask drop down list 106 CHAPTER 10 Click the Background Media button at the top of the Menu Page Properties pane Select the Highlight mask box click the down arrow button and choose Replace from the menu oO o Browse to the file that you want to use d Choose a setting from the Highlight mask mapping control to indicate how transparency is determined from the mask 10 Choose the color sets that you want to use to highlight buttons on the menu when they are selected activated or inactive a Click the General button at the top of the Menu Page Properties pane b Choose a setting from the Selected button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight buttons on the menu when they are selected using the arrow buttons on the remote control c Choose a setting from the Activated button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight the selected buttons on the menu when the user presses the Enter button on the remote control d Choose a setting from the Inactive button colors drop down list to choose the color set that will be used to highlight buttons on the menu when they are not selected USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 107 Working with themes A theme is a style sheet for a menu page Each theme will include all pertinent information about the menu including layout parameters for example button sizes positioning and spaci
148. dy compliant you need to select the Recompress control click the button and choose Yes from the menu to edit its recompression settings 3 Click the expand button next to the Recompress settings heading to expand the controls if they are not already expanded GETTING STARTED 31 4 Select the Format box and click the down arrow button to display a menu Choose a setting from the menu to determine the file type and settings bit rate or bit depth and sample rate that will be used to recompress the selected file For more information about audio settings see Audio defaults on page 144 Adjusting project wide settings The area at the bottom of the Optimize Disc dialog shows information about your project The Project video format and Project audio format settings from the Project Properties dialog are displayed and your project size is estimated based on these formats and the Default video bit rate setting 1 Drag the Default video bit rate slider or type a value in the edit box to adjust the size of your project e 9 8 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for DVD players e 28 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for Blu ray Disc projects burned to DVD media e 48 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for Blu ray Disc projects burned to Blu ray Disc media e Increasing the bit rate can improve quality but you can fit less media on the disc e Decreasing the bit rate can allow you to fit more video on the disc but quality will be decreased 2 To c
149. e Athumbnail mask is applied so only the portion of the image within the wooden frame is visible e A frame mask is applied so the user can see through the frame to the menu background and the button thumbnail e A highlight mask identical to the frame mask is applied so the wooden frame and the thumbnail within the frame are highlighted when the button is selected Thumbnail Thumbnail Mask Frame Highlight Mask DVD Architect Pro software uses the color value of the red channel to determine which portions of an image are visible white Red 255 Green 255 Blue 255 represents the portions of the thumbnail or frame that will be visible black Red 0 Green 0 Blue 0 represents the portions that will be masked out allowing the menu background to show through Gray areas are partially visible USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 97 Thumbnail masks A thumbnail mask limits the portion of a thumbnail image that will be visible under a button Themes can apply thumbnail masks automatically or you can create your own When you select a button in the workspace the Properties window displays information about the selected button To see more information about the thumbnail image and its mask click the Media button in the Button Properties pane and look under the Thumbnail Properties heading e The Thumbnail Media box displays the path to the current thumbnail file e The Mask box displays the path to the current mask file Tip f y
150. e for subtitles while previewing your project Restores the Preview page to the default settings Burning tab The Burning tab allows you to specify options for project preparation and burning Preference Description Free space display type Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose how your project size is represented in the bottom right corner of the window as Disc Space Used Default prepare folder Displays the path to the folder where DVD Architect Pro software will prepare your project Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Temporary files folder Displays the path to the folder where DVD Architect Pro software will store temporary files it creates Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Minimum video bit rate Allows you to specify the minimum allowed bit rate that will be used when DVD Architect Pro software compresses the selected video Use legacy disc drivers Select this check box to use the legacy DVD Architect Pro disc drivers for burning discs Clear this check box to use the Microsoft Image Mastering API IMAPI disc drivers to burn discs in DVD Architect Pro software This can be useful if burning discs with the legacy disc drivers is not working as you expect Default All Restores the Burning page to the default settings Mastering tab The Mastering tab allows you to specify options for project preparation and mastering Preference Description Mastering output folder Displays t
151. e Disc or Title on page 75 Tip Click the Insert Object button and choose Media in the Project Overview window Note Once you have inserted a single movie title and added chapter markers you can automatically create a scene selection menu based on your markers For more information see Inserting a scene selection menu on page 41 Editing title order From the File menu choose Order Titles to display the Order Titles dialog where you can change the order in which titles are arranged on the disc Reordering titles can be useful when fine tuning the layer break on dual layer discs or to ensure that the titles in a playlist will play back sequentially when a user interrupts playback by pressing the Next button on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control 1 From the File menu choose Order Titles The Order Titles dialog is displayed By default the title order matches the order in which you added titles to the project 2 Selecta title and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the selected title s order 3 Repeat step 2 as needed Click OK to close the Order Titles dialog and save your changes Adding graphics You can add an image or video to serve as a design element for a menu or page If you add a video to a menu it will automatically begin playback when the user accesses the menu Note Graphics are for design purposes only and cannot be used for navigation Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or
152. e Finish button to start burning When burning a previously mastered folder after clicking the Finish button click Continue to burn the next mastered layer Note When burning a dual layer mastered project each layer must be burned to separate discs You cannot burn both layers to one dual layer disc If you are preparing and burning a dual layer disc the Choose Layer Break Behavior page is displayed to allow you to choose if you want to choose a layer break or if you would like the software to choose a break for you PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 169 a Select one of the following options Option Choose a layer break point automatically Prompt me to choose a layer break point only if the break must be placed within a title Prompt me to choose the layer break point Description The software will choose a layer break for you Tip f the layer break must occur in a compilation you ll be unable to burn your project To resolve the situation try the following Reordering title may allow a suitable layer break to be found For more information see Editing title order on page 38 Changing the length of slides in the compilation may allow a suitable layer break to be found For more information see Setting display duration from the Picture Compilation Properties window on page 70 After the project is prepared the software will interrupt the mastering process to prompt you to choose a layer break point if a brea
153. e Prepared folder box or click Browse to choose a folder Select the Previously mastered folder radio button to burn a previously mastered project Type the path to the folder that contains a previously mastered project in the Mastered folder box or click Browse to choose a folder 5 6 Fa 10 If you selected the Current project radio button in step 3 DVD Architect Pro software displays a list of messages about your project and estimates the project s final size on the Review Message List page a Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Message Type Description a Informational Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action E3 Warning Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action Error Produces an invalid DVD and must be resolved b Click the Optimize button to display the Optimize Disc dialog where you can make changes to individual media files and project settings often allowing you to resolve warnings or errors For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 c Click the Next button The subtitle and menu highlight mask files in your project are analyzed to ensure that they are ready for burning and a message list is displayed with the results Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Select the burn parameters a Inthe Volume name box type the name of your disc b From the Device drop down list choose your DVD Blu ray Disc burner or ISO Image W
154. e View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Available layouts in current folder box This box lists the DDVDArchWindowLayout files in the folder displayed in the Current layout folder box If the layout you want to use is saved in a different folder you can click the Browse button to choose a new folder 3 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 4 Click the Assign or Replace button to add the layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu You can click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of the layouts in the menu 5 Click the Activate button to apply the selected layout to the DVD Architect Pro workspace 6 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 3 Click the Clear button to remove the selected layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu If you want to replace the selected layout select a layout in the Available layouts in current folder box and click the Replace button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Note Removing
155. e frames are interpolated Additional keyframes can be added to create more complex effects Crop and video effects keyframes are created using the Crop and Adjust window while transformation size and position keyframes are created using the Timeline window For more information see Transformation keyframes on page 52 Keyframes Crop Video Effects Note Animated button highlights are not supported If a button has keyframe animation applied button highlighting is not animated or may not be visible when you burn your project You will see the button highlighting when you preview your DVD Architect Pro project but not after it is burned 48 CHAPTER 4 Adding keyframes 1 Inthe Keyframe Controller click to position the cursor where you want to add a keyframe 2 Click the Insert Keyframe button A keyframe is added to the Keyframe Controller timeline The new keyframe s attributes are copied from the previous keyframe Tip To quickly add a keyframe double click on the Keyframe Controller timeline or position the cursor on the Keyframe Controller timeline and modify your cropping properties Deleting keyframes 1 Select a keyframe by clicking it 2 Click the Delete Keyframe button Navigating between keyframes To jump to the next or previous keyframe click the Previous Keyframe and Next Keyframe buttons or press Ctrl Left Arrow or Ctrl Right Arrow To jump to the first or last keyframe cli
156. e from the menu The Open Media dialog is displayed Select a new image and click the Open button The image is replaced with your new selection Generating slideshow animation If you want to spice up a picture compilation you can add animation to your static images For example you could pan across an image or zoom in to simulate camera motion Important Generated animation is created by creating a crop keyframe at the beginning and end of each picture Any cropping applied via the Crop and Adjust dialog will be overwritten when you generate slideshow animation For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the picture compilation you want to edit For more information see Project Overview window Ctr Alt 1 on page 14 2 Inthe Compilation window select the pictures you want to animate or press Ctrl A to generate animation for all pictures For more information see Compilation window Alt 7 on page 19 Tip Select a single image when you want to be able to control the specific type of animation that is used for that image For example what if you wanted to use pan or zoom animation throughout a picture compilation but wanted to be sure to use panning on a wide landscape image Press Ctrl A to select all images in the compilation You can then use the Generate Slideshow Animation dialog to set up pan or zo
157. e wizard and add a chapter marker manually The wizard will suggest a title and approximate location e If layer break points are not available in suitable locations try rearranging the titles in the Project Overview window By changing the title order you may be able to achieve that layer break at a more desirable location b Select the layer break point that you want to use 12 The application displays a dialog box prompting you to burn another disc e Click the Yes button to burn another copy The application displays the Make DVD Select Burn Parameters page where you can begin the process again e Click the No button if you do not want to burn another copy of your DVD 170 CHAPTER 16 Burning 8 cm discs to 12 cm discs You can burn a camcorder prepared DVD 8 cm disc onto a standard DVD 12 cm disc using DVD Architect Pro Connect the camcorder via the USB port to the computer and insert a writable DVD into your DVD drive Note To locate the camcorder s USB connection please review the camcorder s user instructions 1 Click the Make DVD button The Make DVD wizard is displayed 2 Click the Burn button The Select Prepare Folder page is displayed 3 Select the Previously prepared folder radio button and click Browse to choose the USB drive Note The DVD must be finalized in the camcorder before the disc can be copied 4 Click the Next button 5 Select the burn parameters a Inthe Volume name
158. e workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list For more information see Picture Compilation Properties on page 131 CREATING A PICTURE COMPILATION 73 74 CHAPTER 6 Chapter 7 Creating a Single Movie Disc or Title You can use DVD Architect Pro software to create a single movie DVD or Blu ray Disc or add a single movie title to a menu in a menu based project If you re creating a single movie project you already know how to start a project and locate your media For more information see Getting Started on page 25 Adding a movie title to a menu If you want to add a single movie title to a menu in an existing menu based project the process is easy 1 3 4 5 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu from which you want to link to the movie From the Insert menu choose Media The Insert Media dialog is displayed Tip Click the Insert Object button in the Project Overview window and then choose Media Locate and select the file you want to use Click the OK button A button is added on the menu as a link to the video Double click the movie s button in the workspace to open the video file After you ve chosen your media file you can use the Timeline window to set in and ou
159. ect Pro for your computer INTRODUCTION 11 Getting help You can access three types of help within DVD Architect Pro software e Online help e Interactive tutorials Help on the Web Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press F1 DVD Architect Pro Online Help ee _ aik 2 Too ba r Hide Print Options Glossary Shortcut Keys Tabs gt Contents Index Search Favorites C2 Introduction 2 Using the Online Help 2 Technical Support 2 Legal Notices The DVD Architect Window How Do DVD ARCHITECT PRO Using DVD Architect Software Creating Custom Menus and Masks Themes Previewing Your Project Customizing DVD Architect Software 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Sony Creative Software Inc proudly introduces DVD Architect Pro software your one stop shop for authoring and burning DVD and Blu ray Disc projects DVD Architect Pro software lets you create menu based discs music video f compilations picture compilations or single movie discs that will play back automatically in your DVD or Blu ray Disc player 2 Using a Multimedia Controller Information pane e Troubleshooting 2 Glossary What s new in version 6 0 s Support for burning stereoscopic 3D video to Blu ray Disc Interactive tutorials ACID ACIDized ACIDplanet com ACIDplanet the ACIDplanet logo ACID XMC Artist Integrated the Ar
160. ect a menu or video title from the list 2 Click the Video 1 button to display the controls Information about the video format of the selected item is displayed If your title has multiple video tracks a separate Video button is displayed for each track Note f the video is already compliant you need to select the Recompress control click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu to edit its recompression settings 3 Click the expand button next to the Recompress Settings heading to expand the controls if they are not already expanded Select the Use default bit rate box and click the down arrow button to display a menu e Choose Yes if you want the selected video to use the bit rate from the Default video bit rate slider at the bottom of the Optimize Disc dialog e Choose No if you want to specify a custom bit rate for the selected video You can then select the Bit rate Mbps control to specify the bit rate you want to use Type a number in the box use the spin control or click the down arrow button to display a slider you can use to adjust the bit rate 30 CHAPTER 3 5 Select the Aspect ratio control click the down arrow button and choose a command from the menu if you want to choose a new video format for the recompressed video Note This control is not available when a menu is selected All menus in a project must have the same aspect ratio and resolution Use the Project Properties dialog
161. ed next to the current layout CUSTOMIZING DVD ARCHITECT PRO SOFTWARE 179 3 Inthe Name box type the name you want to use to identify the layout This name will be used in the Organize Layouts dialog 4 Choose a setting from the Shortcut drop down list to set the shortcut that will be used to load the layout For example if you choose 4 you could press Alt D release the keys and then press 4 on your keyboard to load the layout 5 The Folder box displays the path to the folder where the layout will be saved Window layouts are saved in the following folders by default e Windows XP C Documents and Settings Your Username Application Data Sony DVD Architect Pro 5 2 e Windows Vista C Users Your Username AppData Roaming Sony DVD Architect Pro 5 2 You can click the Browse button to choose a different folder 6 Click OK to save the new layout Loading a saved layout From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose the window layout you want to use from the submenu Tip To load a layout quickly press Alt D release the keys and then press anumber on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to recall the layout saved in that in that space If no layout is saved in that space nothing will happen when you press the shortcut If you ve modified the current window layout choose Window Layouts and then choose Reload Selected Layout from the submenu to reset the window layout to the last saved version Adding a layout to th
162. ed the media files are added to the menu and existing object positions are preserved From the Edit menu choose Reapply Theme Layout to realign objects at any time Deleting a theme 1 Inthe Themes window select the theme that you would like to delete Note Default DVD Architect Pro themes or themes used in your project cannot be deleted 2 Click the Delete Theme button 3 A warning dialog is displayed asking you to confirm your theme deletion 3 Click the Yes button to continue Creating custom themes To create your own theme you ll need an understanding of XML Themes are installed into the following folders e Windows XP C Documents and Settings Your Username Application Data Sony DVD Architect 5 2 Themes e Windows Vista C Users Your Username AppData Roaming Sony DVD Architect Pro 5 2 Themes Each theme is saved as a thm file which is essentially a zip file that contains the theme s XML file and media Note n previous versions of DVD Architect Pro themes were installed in a subfolder below the program folder However not all users could access the Program Files folder and the theme information With the current folder location if two or more people are using DVD Architect Pro from the same computer the theme information will be duplicated The easiest way to create your own themes is to work on a copy of an existing theme 108 CHAPTER 10 Create a copy of the theme you want to modify and rename the file O
163. ed button colors drop down list on the General page of the Menu Page Properties pane The most opaque pixels those with alpha values of 192 to 255 are mapped to the O color set s fill color color 1 and the most transparent pixels those with alpha values i of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 Intensity Maps the average pixel intensity of the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors Activated button colors or Inactive button colors drop down list The lightest pixels those with an average intensity of 192 to 255 are mapped to the color set s fill color color 1 and the darkest pixels those with an average intensity of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 Color Channel Maps color channels in the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activated button colors drop down list A pixel containing any red channel component uses the color set s fill color color 1 a pixel containing any green channel component uses the color set s anti alias color color 2 a pixel containing any blue component uses the color set s outline background color color 3 and a completely black pixel uses the color set s transparent color color 4 Choose the color sets that you want to use to highlight buttons on the menu when they are selected a
164. ed for text B Bold Sets text in bold typeface Italic Sets text in italic typeface ka Shadow Allows you to select position color and blurring of a shadow behind text of 4 Justify Left Aligns text to left edge of text box Justify Center Aligns text in center of text box 16 CHAPTER 2 Justify Right Aligns text to right edge of text box iji Justify Top Aligns text to top edge of text box i Justify Vertical Center Aligns text to vertical center of text box hil Justify Bottom Aligns text to bottom edge of text box Font Foreground Color Allows you to set foreground color for text Edit Text Edit Text Makes selected text box editable Window Docking Area F11 You can dock anchor windows around the edges of the DVD Architect Pro window to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are working with a project You can dock several windows in the same area of the screen and the windows will be layered Click a window s tab to bring it to the top Explorer window Alt 3 The Explorer window is similar to the Windows Explorer Use the Explorer tab to select media files to drag to the workspace or Project Overview window From the View menu choose Explorer to show or hide the Explorer window You can also use the Explorer to perform common file management tasks such as creating folders renaming files and folders and deleting files and folders Use the Start Pr
165. ed to allow you to choose if you want to choose a layer break or if you would like the software to choose a break for you a Select one of the following options Option Description Choose a layer break point The software will choose a layer break for you automatically Tip f the layer break must occur in a compilation you ll be unable to burn your project To resolve the situation try the following Reordering title may allow a suitable layer break to be found For more information see Editing title order on page 38 e Changing the length of slides in the compilation may allow a suitable layer break to be found For more information see Setting display duration from the Picture Compilation Properties window on page 70 Prompt me to choose a layer After the project is prepared the software will interrupt the mastering process to break point only if the break prompt you to choose a layer break point if a break point cannot be placed at the must be placed within a title beginning of a title Prompt me to choose the After the project is prepared the software will interrupt the mastering process to layer break point prompt you to choose a layer break point Click the Finish button DVD Architect Pro software prepares the project PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 173 10 If you are mastering a dual layer disc from a prepared project the Select Layer Break page is displayed to assist you with where to place the layer
166. edia effects between buttons and graphic objects Button properties are pasted based on the order in the Project Overview window for example if you copy buttons 1 through 3 in one menu and then paste attributes to buttons 1 through 3 in another menu attributes will be pasted from button 1 to button 1 button 2 to button 2 and button 3 to button 3 If you copy buttons 1 through 3 in one menu and then paste attributes to buttons 5 through 7 in another menu attributes will be pasted from button 1 to button 5 button 2 to button 6 and button 3 to button 7 Properties are pasted based on object position for example if you copy two text objects in one menu and then paste attributes to two text objects in another menu the attributes from each text object in the source menu will be pasted to the closest text object in the destination menu The Navigation tool Navigation controls determine which button is selected when you use the Up Down Left and Right buttons on your DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control 1 2 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and then choose Navigation Tool Tip Click the Navigation Tool button amp in the Editing Toolbar area Select a button in the workspace Arrows are displayed to indicate the current navigation Note White arrows represent autolinked navigation while blue arrows re
167. educe interlace flicker box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to turn flicker reduction on or off Turn flicker reduction on when using still images that contain thin horizontal lines Start Script If you have already created at least one DVD script in your project select the Start Script box click the down arrow button and choose the script that will be played when the media file is accessed Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 127 Track Media The Video and Audio controls in the Track Media page determine which files are used to play a title s audio and video Item Video Audio End Action Description Displays the path to the video file that will be used Select the Video control and click the down arrow button to display the a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file edit the file in your specified graphics editor or explore the file s containing folder on your drive Tip To change a file quickly drag a file from the Explorer window to the Video box Displays the path to the audio file that will be used If a title has multiple audio tracks there will be a separate Audio control for each track Select the Audio control and click the down arrow button to display the a menu where you can choose a new file view media properties or remo
168. ee End Action on page 132 Note The Menu button is not supported for Blu ray Disc projects Allows the user to press the Resume Menu button on the remote to resume playback of a title after exiting it by pressing the Menu button Allows the user to press the Up Down Left Right buttons on the remote to navigate between menu buttons Allows the user to press the Pause button on the remote to temporarily suspend playback Allows the user to press the Audio button on the remote to choose which audio track is played Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Subtitle button on the remote to choose which subtitle track is displayed Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Angle button on the remote to choose which video track is played THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 133 Item Video mode Slide Description Allows the user to press the Video Mode button on the remote to switch widescreen letterboxed and pan and scan presentation in a 16 9 video The Slide page of the Properties window displays the settings for the selected slide Item Image Stretch type Length Orientation Color Sets Description The Image box displays the path to the image file that will be used Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the curr
169. ee Pe Pee Pe Pl ata Q a a o s 0 4 8 8 4 2 a s 2 a 2 8 _ 8 8 et Pad bal be pe ee Pee ee Pe Pe eT PS td be be pa Pe Pe Pe dt tal al ed pe pa Pe pe Pe Pe ta bel pe ee fe Pe P ee Yt oe oe oe fe oe ee a ot oe 2 fe se ae ee oe ae oe ee ae oe oe oe ee oe r oe oe ae oe ie F F p Revised October 26 2012 What s new in version 6 0 e Support for burning stereoscopic 3D Blu ray Disc For more information see Working with Stereoscopic 3D Media on Blu ray Disc on page 161 e Interactive tutorials Welcome After DVD Architect Pro software is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard appears This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Creative Software Inc Alternatively you can register online at https www sonycreativesoftware com reg software at any time Registering your product will provide you with exclusive access to a variety of technical support options notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive to registered DVD Architect Pro users Registration assistance Registration assistance is available online at http www sonycreativesoftware com reg fag or by fax at 608 250 1745 Customer service sales For a detailed list of Customer Service options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday busines
170. ee e eee e nese ee eeeeaeees 153 Removing a statement from a script 2 ccc cece eee eee eee ene eeeeennees 153 Rearranging statements in a script cc cc ccc ccc cee ct eee eee eee cent eee eeeeenenes 153 Editing a script s statements in the Script Properties WINdOW ccc cece eee eens 153 TSUN Oia SCUlIOG EEEE E seebeiadaaieacwien eae ncwseec Genes eseme ieee as 156 RENAMING a SCD Unsassuw esd ew ons beveneasons ees eS ranee eer senbwensereneseesayw cans 156 DeleUING a SCHOE andes novos doen ET EE T EE E E T 156 Setting a DVD start script ssssssnsssssressseeessseersssseesseresssersesrereo 157 General Purpose Register Memories GPRMS cece cece eee e teen eee eeeaeaes 157 System Parameter Register Memories SPRMs cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 157 Language CODES wa h c0u cd ourvt dave Ear ENEA dened Adak Seated aaa ERETTE 158 REGION COCs ee ere soi eos ce oes eaters EEEE EEE ESN 159 Working with Stereoscopic 3D Media on Blu ray Disc ccc ccc cee eee 161 Previewing ProjectS 0 ccc cc ccc cence eee eee nese eee eee eseeeeeeeeeeees 163 a NVA LS AVAVANAVAL AL sc 163 Preview TOOIDAN santo sacs asues oo oeeu weave cb ouwins ada cemeun eon ar 163 Previewing your PIO CC ies cures coun dastdbootiecs Chaos de doetna cede coadete Pidews sacs 164 Previewing on an external video MONITOL 6 ccc ccc ce cette teen eeees 164 Previewing video on a secondary Windows display 0 cece
171. efault selected button in the destination menu If you choose Default the first button listed under the menu in the Project Overview window is used as the default Item Set audio track Set subtitle track Set video angle Remote Buttons Description Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set audio track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty audio tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding audio tracks on page 87 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Choose Off to turn subtitles off or choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set subtitle track control to change the subtitle track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When se
172. elect the Set subtitle track control click the down arrow button and choose 1 4 Double click the object in the workspace to open it 5 Inthe Media Properties pane click the Remote Buttons button 6 Select the Subtitle track change control click the down arrow button and choose Off Editing a subtitle event s color set You can use the Subtitles Event page in the Properties window to adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle text You can adjust color sets independently for each subtitle track For more information about color sets see Subtitle Event on page 126 Setting the subtitle track for timeline playback Select the Activate Track button S in a subtitle track header in the Timeline window to determine which track is played when you click the Play From In Point or Play button in the Timeline window Changing subtitle track colors 1 Right click the header and choose Track Display Color from the shortcut menu 2 Choose a color from the submenu to set the selected track s color in the track list and the audio waveform in the timeline Note Track color settings are saved with your project Subtitle properties You can use the Properties window to adjust subtitle text positions and adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle text You can choose which color set is used for each subtitle event independently To edit subtitle properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a menu in
173. elected items so an equal amount of vertical space exists between the objects CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 55 Deleting objects 1 Select the Selection tool or Sizing tool 2 Select the objects you want to delete You can select multiple files at once using the Shift key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files 3 From the Edit menu choose Delete The objects are deleted from the menu and from your project Enabling snapping To use snapping choose Enable Snapping from the Options menu Once snapping is enabled there are several options to which objects can snap e The grid in the workspace e The borders of other objects Title and action safe areas Tip To temporarily override horizontal snapping hold the Shift key To temporarily override vertical snapping hold the Ctrl key Snapping to the grid Once snapping is enabled choose Snap to Grid from the Options menu to allow objects to snap to the workspace s grid To show or hide the grid choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Grid from the submenu Note To change the color or spacing of the grid choose Grid Settings from the Options menu Snapping to other objects Once snapping is enabled choose Snap to Objects from the Options menu to allow objects to snap to other objects on the menu Snapping to safe areas Once snapping is enabled choose Snap to Safe Areas from the Options menu to al
174. em Command Destination Most recent menu Destination item Start Destination button M A Set audio track No change Set subtitle track No change Set video angle No change To edit the playlist s properties perform the following steps 84 CHAPTER 8 1 Double click a playlist in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the playlist you want to edit or choose a playlist from the drop down list at the top of the Playlists window 2 Select the playlist item that you would like to edit 3 Click the General End Action or Playlist Item button 4 Select the specific control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list For more information see Playlist Properties on page 139 CREATING PLAYLISTS 85 86 CHAPTER 8 Chapter 9 Adding Audio Video and Subtitles You can add multiple audio video and subtitle tracks using DVD Architect Pro software This will allow you to add support for multiple languages and multiple viewing angles Audio tracks You can add multiple audio tracks to videos and picture compilations to add support for multiple languages audio description and running commentaries When your disc is played the DVD or Blu ray Disc player will attempt to determine the appropriate default audio track If the player cannot determine the correct language the first track is used If multiple tracks match the player s language setting if you have an
175. en the playlist you want to edit 2 Add titles to your playlist by completing the following steps a Click the Insert Playlist Items button 52 in the Playlists window toolbar to display the Select Titles dialog b Choose the titles that you want to include in your playlist c Click OK The titles are added to the end of your playlist Tip You can also drag titles from the Project Overview window to the Playlists window 3 To control which chapter audio track and subtitle track are played when each title is played use the Playlist Properties For more information see Playlist Properties on page 139 Deleting titles from a playlist 1 Inthe Playlists window select the titles that you want to delete 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete The items are deleted from the playlist Rearranging titles in a playlist You can quickly rearrange the titles in the Playlists window by selecting the title that you would like to move dragging it and then dropping it to another position in the Playlists window Renaming a playlist 1 Right click a playlist in the Project Overview window and choose Rename from the shortcut menu 2 Type anew name in the edit box 3 Press Enter Playlist properties The Playlist Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust settings for each item in a playlist specify the playback order or to set the end action for the selected playlist Playlist Properties General Playlist It
176. ent file edit the image in your specified graphics editor or explore the image s containing folder on your drive Tip You can also change the slide image by dragging a new image from the Explorer window to the Image box or to a slide in the Compilation window Select the Stretch type box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate how the image will be scaled to fit the screen Letterbox The image fills the width of the menu and black letterboxing bars are displayed above and below or to the right and left as needed Zoom to fit The image is magnified to fill the screen If the aspect ratio of the image doesn t match your project s aspect ratio the image will extend beyond the screen e Stretch to fit The image is stretched horizontally and vertically to fill the screen If the aspect ratio of the image doesn t match your project s aspect ratio the image will be distorted The Length box displays the duration that the selected slide will be displayed To change the duration select the box click the button and drag the slider or type a value in the edit box To rotate the selected slide select the Orientation box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu Tip You can also rotate the slide image using the Rotate Clockwise 43 and Rotate Counterclockwise 0 buttons in the Compilation window You can use the Color Sets page in the Pro
177. enu choose Save Note The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears In subsequent saves the dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project Type the project name in the File Name box Click the Save button Saving a copy of your project Save As After you have been working with your project you can use the Save As command on the File menu to create a copy of the project file with a different name Saving a number of different versions of a project is a low risk way to try new techniques 1 2 3 4 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog is displayed Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project Type a new name in the File name box Choose a setting from the Copy media drop down list if you want to copy your project s assets to the same folder as your project file e Normal saves a standard DVD Architect Pro project without copying media e Copy user media with project creates copies of your media files in the project folder e Copy user and theme media with project creates copies of your media files and any required theme files in the project folder Click the Save button GETTING STARTED 33 34 CHAPTER 3 Chapter 4 Creating a Menu Based Project When you start a menu based project with DVD Architect Pro a main menu i
178. enu from a file on page 36 Naming requirements for layers DVD Architect Pro software will determine which layers will be used for each part of a menu based on the layer name in your psd file using the following format Type ID Subtype Name Important Layer names cannot contain spaces Item Description Type Indicates the contents of the layer background Used for menu background images and menu highlight masks _ button Used for button images and masks ID A numeric identifier that is used to represent related items For example the layers used to create button 1 in your menu would be named as follows button 01 thumbnail button 01 thumbnailmask button 01 frame The button ID also determines a menu s button order button 01 will be the first button button 02 will be the second button and so on Subtype Indicates the type of image contained in the layer thumbnail A layer containing a thumbnail image for a menu or button Can be abbreviated tmb thumbnailmask A layer containing a button s thumbnail mask Can be abbreviated tmbmsk highlight A layer containing a highlight mask for a menu background or button Can be abbreviated hlt By default a highlight layer uses color channel mapping to determine transparency If you want to specify the mapping mode use the following subtypes highlightrgb highlightintensity can be abbreviated highlightint or highlighttransparency can be abbreviated highlighttrans or hittran
179. enus from a file to create a new menu using a psd file that contains menu background buttons and related mask images in a single layered file For more information about layered graphics see Creating custom menus and buttons using layered graphics on page 102 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 From the Insert menu choose Submenu from File and browse to the file A new menu is created below the current menu and a button is added to the current menu as a link to the submenu 3 Double click the submenu in the Project Overview window or double click the submenu s button in the workspace to open the new menu in the workspace 4 Add links for each button a Select a button in the workspace b On the Button Properties pane click the Action button c Click Command click the down arrow button and choose Link d Click Destination click the down arrow button and choose the button s destination from the menu Tip fyou re linking to a title the title must be in your project before you can choose it as a destination Drag the media file from the Explorer window to the Project Overview window to add it to your project 5 Edit the menu as needed Reapplying a file s layout to menu objects You can automatically update menu objects at any time after importing a menu from a layered image file The update will restore the initial look
180. eo Track in the Timeline window A blank video track is added to the timeline Note You can add a video file by dragging it to the track or using the Media Properties pane in the Properties window 88 CHAPTER 9 Adding video to tracks Unlike a standard video track additional video tracks can contain multiple events from different media files and you can trim the ends of the events 1 Drag a video from the Explorer window to a track in the Timeline window A video event is created where you drop the file Tip Click the Insert Video Event button jig in the Timeline window and browse to the file that you want to add 2 Drag either end of an event to trim its length as needed 3 Drag the event to position it on the timeline Note f the Auto Ripple button 3 is selected video events that occur later in the same track move automatically When the Auto Ripple button is not selected only the video event you drag will move the positions of all existing video events are preserved Setting the video track for timeline playback Select the Activate Track button amp in the track header in the Timeline window to determine which track is played when you click the Play From In Point I or Play button in the Timeline window Changing video track colors 1 Right click the header and choose Track Display Color from the shortcut menu 2 Choose a color from the submenu to set the selected track s color in the track list and
181. epare your project again The path to the extras folder is displayed on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Disc properties on page 143 The extra content folder is too large The extras folder contains more files than the space available on your disc Delete some files from your extras folder and prepare your project again The path to the extras folder is displayed on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Disc properties on page 143 The inactive button default colors should be set to None Color sets are not supported for inactive buttons in Blu ray Disc projects You must set the Inactive button colors drop down list to None all transparent on the General tab of the Menu Page Properties For more information see General on page 121 The menu end action is broken The link for the specified menu s end action is broken This can occur when you delete items from your project For example if the end action of menu one is set to activate a button that navigates to menu two the end action of menu one will be broken if you delete menu two from your project 1 Navigate to the menu with the broken end action and click the expand button next to the Menu Page Properties heading to expand the Menu Page Properties controls 2 Click the expand button next to the End Action heading to expand the controls 3 Choose anew setting from the
182. er to set the point at which buttons will be displayed and when looped playback will begin You can also apply keyframe animation to buttons before the loop point The loop point is shown with a green marker in the Timeline window For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 Note f the menu end action is not set to Loop the menu loop point will set the point at which buttons are displayed but the menu will not loop Choose a color set that will be used to display the selected button on a page Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Choose a color set that will be used to display the selected button when you press Enter on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control to activate it Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Choose a color set that will be used to display unselected buttons on the menu Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Note The Inactive button colors control must be set to None for Blu ray Disc projects Background media plays in the background of a menu when it is displayed You can choose to use no background media the media associated with the menu s current theme or specific audio and or video files Notes e When using background video in DVD menus we recommend rendering the video in progressive scan format before adding it to your project Leave the Progressive
183. er to use an external monitor Some PAL camcorders do not support this feature Configuring an external monitor 1 Use the Video Device tab in the Preferences dialog to configure the display you want to use as a video preview monitor For more information see Configuring an OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV device on page 184 The output is directed to the camcorder through the IEEE 1394 card You can preview this output on the camcorder s LCD screen or connect the camera to a television monitor to preview the output there Once you have verified that the external monitor settings are working correctly you can use it to preview your project 2 Click the Preview on External Monitor button G in the Video Preview window 3 To end the preview and return to the main window click the Close button E Close 166 CHAPTER 15 Chapter 16 Preparing and Burning Your Project Once you ve finished building your project using DVD Architect Pro software and are satisfied with the results you see after previewing you re ready to begin the final stage preparing and burning your project Preparing and burning DVD projects Preparing a DVD project During the prepare process DVD Architect Pro software develops the files and structure necessary to burn your project without actually starting the burning process 1 Click the Make DVD button The Make DVD wizard is displayed Make DVD 2 me Select Operation to Perform Prepare
184. es buttons vertically 6 USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 111 Horizontal alignment Specifies the horizontal alignment for all buttons that are non navigational in the menu Item Description Left Horizontally aligns buttons to the left of the cells in the grid Center Horizontally aligns buttons to the center of the cells in the grid Right Horizontally aligns buttons to the right of the cells in the grid Vertical alignment Specifies the vertical alignment for all buttons that are non navigational in the menu Item Description Top Vertically aligns buttons to the top of the cells in the grid Center Vertically aligns buttons to the center of the cells in the grid Bottom Vertically aligns buttons to the bottoms of the cells in the grid Margin Allows you to specify the left right top and bottom margins of the grid for button placement Item Spacing Allows you to specify the horizontal and vertical spacing between items Item Next Previous and Up Button Click the expand button button to the left of the Item Button Next Button Previous Button and Up Button and edit the appropriate property settings Item Description Button rectangle Allows you to specify the Left Right Top and Bottom position of the button Image rectangle Allows you to specify the Left Right Top and Bottom position of the image related to the button Text rectangle Allows you to specify the Left Right Top and Bottom position of the t
185. es to configure the Contour A V Solutions ShuttlePro or ShuttlePro v2 for use with DVD Architect Pro software After you use the ShuttlePro Control Panel to import the appropriate pref file the controls will behave as follows Tip f you have version 2 5 or later of the Shuttle Pro driver you can use the driver s Export Settings Info feature to create a graphical representation of your current settings Top Button Row Second Button Row Shuttle Ring Jog Dial Bottom Button Row Set In Point Timeline Go to Set In Point Timeline Set Subtitle Start Point Timeline Play Pause Timeline Play Stop Timeline Rewind Forward Go to Set Out Timeline Timeline Point Timeline Set Subtitle End Set Next Set Out Point Timeline Subtitle Timeline Timeline Turn left or right for variable speed cursor positioning in the Timeline window Move One Move One Frame Left Frame Right Timeline Timeline Zoom In Timeline Zoom Out Timeline USING A MULTIMEDIA CONTROLLER 199 Contour ShuttleXpress formerly SpaceShuttle default settings DVD Architect Pro software includes a ShuttleXpress pref file that you can use to configure the Contour A V Solutions ShuttleXpress for use with DVD Architect Pro software After you use the ShuttleXpress Control Panel to import the ShuttleXpress pref file the controls will behave as follows Tip Ifyou have version 2 5 or later of the ShuttleXpress driver you can use t
186. es window 78 CHAPTER 7 For more information see Media Properties on page 127 Adding buttons to videos You can add buttons to a video title to make your projects more interactive For example add a button to a video title to take the viewer to a disc s outtakes or special features like those found on commercial discs Tip You can also add buttons to picture and music video compilations To add a picture compilation to your project see Adding a picture compilation toa menu on page 67 To add a music video compilation to your project see Adding a music video compilation to amenu on page 61 Double click a video title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open it 2 Inthe Timeline window click to position the cursor where you want to add the button to your project 3 Adda button using any of the following methods From the Insert menu choose Empty Button From the Timeline window click Insert Button 9 From the Buttons window double click a button to insert it into the workspace e From the Buttons window click a button and drag it into the workspace From the Buttons window toolbar click Insert Button 9 Notes e A4 3 DVD project can contain a maximum of 36 buttons per title or menu A 16 9 widescreen DVD project can contain a maximum of 18 buttons per title or menu e A Blu ray project can contain a maximum of 255 buttons per title or menu 4 Youcan use the Button Pro
187. etermine the image displayed for a graphical element and adjust its appearance You can use still images or video files as graphics If you use a video file you can choose to display a static frame or you can animate the graphic by playing the video Item Description Object Media Displays the path to the current media file Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file or open it in a graphics editor Tip To change a file quickly drag a file from the Explorer window to the Object Media box Start time Select the Start time box click the down arrow button l and drag the slider or type a value in the box to indicate which frame is displayed for a still image or the frame at which playback will begin for an animated graphic Style Select the Style box click the down arrow button and choose a command from the menu to indicate whether you want to display a still image or animated graphic Color Sets Color sets determine which colors are used to indicate selected activated and inactive buttons on your menu page You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every menu page in your project and each menu page in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color
188. etermined from the mask select the Mask mapping control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list Transparency Maps the alpha channel of the button highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activated button colors drop down list on the Cc E General page of the Menu Page Properties pane Dianon ioa The most opaque pixels those with alpha values of 192 to 255 are mapped to the color set s fill color color 1 and the most transparent pixels those with alpha values of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Intensity Maps the average pixel intensity of the button highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activated button colors drop down list The lightest pixels those with an average intensity of 192 to 255 are mapped to the color set s fill color color 1 and the darkest pixels those with an average intensity of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 119 Item Description Color channel Maps the color channels in the button highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activated button colors drop down list A pixel containing a
189. etween items These markers cannot be moved or deleted Inserting scene chapter markers Using the Timeline window you can place scene chapter markers in your video file for viewers to use as navigation points Scene chapter markers allow you to move to certain portions of the video and begin playback You can also use scene chapter markers to link to a point in a video using end actions or to automatically create scene selection menus using the Insert gt Scene Selection command For more information about automatic scene selection menus see Creating a menu that continues playback after playing the selected scene automatic scene selection menus on page 41 For more information about linking to chapter markers using actions see Linking titles to chapter markers on page 78 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the video 2 Inthe Timeline window click to position the cursor where you want to place the marker 3 Click the down arrow next to the Insert Scene Chapter Marker button and choose Insert Scene Chapter Marker Inserting chapter markers Chapter markers are used to denote different sections of your project You can place chapter markers in your video file for viewers to use as navigation points to skip through the project Chapter markers are ignored when you create scene selection menus using the Insert gt Scene Selection command but you can use chapter markers
190. eview and Auto Preview buttons to preview files before adding them to the project If you have the Auto Preview button selected any video or graphic file you click in the Explorer will automatically display in the workspace Preview selected media files before placing them in the project m DVDA Sample Project ha E EF x Ga gt E E EE ra Name Size Type E istplayl m2w 1 61MB Movie Clip _ iD DVDA Sample Pro E lt tolayd mpg 300 00KB Movie Clip to GR Network 3 1stplaylaudi 936 13KB WAVE Audio File E Istplay2 m2v 360MB Movie Clip Select media to place in the project Select drive 1stplay2 mpg ee by dragging or double clicking ortold r 3 1stplay2audi 938 55KB WAVE Audio File E lstplay3 24p 135MB Movie Clip lstplay3 mpg 392 00KE Movie Clip ea 4 Di Li 4 I mam Prr Erai A E rma 4 Explorer Themes Buttons Backgrounds Using Explorer window views You can control the information that is displayed in the Explorer window by clicking the Views button and selecting a view View Description Tree View Displays all of the available drives and folders that you can choose from to find files Summary View Displays everything shown in the Tree View but adds an area below the file list where summary information for the selected file is displayed such as the file type and properties Details Displays all the properties for each file The information is presente
191. ew window or navigate in the workspace to open the video 2 Inthe Timeline window click to position the cursor where you want to place the marker 3 Click the down arrow next to the Insert Buttons on Video Marker button P and choose Insert Buttons on Video Marker You can drag the edge of the button region to align with buttons on video markers Notes e Markers must be at least one second apart e A4 3 DVD project can contain a maximum of 36 buttons per title or menu A 16 9 widescreen DVD project can contain a maximum of 18 buttons per title or menu A Blu ray Disc project can contain a maximum of 255 buttons per title or menu Snapping markers to I frames In DVD projects markers must occur at I frames If a marker does not occur at an I frame the yellow exclamation tag F will appear To snap the marker to the I frame drag the marker along the timeline to one of the I frame reference points When the marker has snapped to the I frame the yellow exclamation tag F will clear from the marker For more information see Moving markers on page 77 Notes Ifa marker is not on an l frame you can recompress the video title to add an I frame at that location However if you don t manually recompress the title DVD Architect Pro will automatically move the marker to an I frame For more information about recompressing video titles see Optimizing your project on page 29 e This feature is not applicable to Bl
192. ext related to the button Button style Allows you to select how the buttons will display on your menus Text only Displays a text only link Image only Displays only a graphical button Text and image Displays a graphical button with a text label 112 CHAPTER 10 Chapter 11 The Properties Window From the View menu choose Properties to show or hide the Properties window The Properties window gives you total control over menu and object settings Note The contents of the Properties window will vary depending on the current selection if you have a graphical element selected in the workspace Graphics Properties are displayed if you have a music video compilation selected Music Video Compilation Properties are selected and so on Graphics Properties The Graphics Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the position size and appearance of graphical elements on a menu or compilation Graphics Properties Media Color Sets X position Y position 240 0 X size 14 0 Y size 85 4 Maintain aspect ratio Yes Show before loop point No To edit the graphic s properties perform the following steps 1 Select a graphic with the Selection tool or Sizing tool 4 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Select the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Graphics Pro
193. eyframe bar and modify your Transformation properties in the Properties window Select the keyframe tool in the workspace and drag the object For more information see The Keyframe tool on page 53 Removing keyframes Right click a keyframe and choose Delete from the submenu 52 CHAPTER 4 Changing the interpolation curve between keyframes The interpolation curve determines the rate of animation between two keyframe settings To change the interpolation curve right click a selected keyframe and choose a command from the shortcut menu The curve type is updated for all selected keyframes Command Description Looks like Linear Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a linear path ne bk Fast lt gt Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a fast logarithmic path a Wee Slow gt Keyframe parameters are interpolated in a slow logarithmic path o Smooth Keyframe parameters are interpolated along a smooth natural curve Sharp Keyframe parameters are interpolated along a sharp curve Poa gt Hold No animation will take place The keyframe s settings will be maintained until the next lt gt keyframe gt Moving keyframes After you ve set your keyframes you may need to adjust their positions along the timeline Drag a keyframe to a new position in the timeline to change its position Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple keyframes A selected keyframe is displa
194. f you selected random playback the Infinite control determines the number of items to play from your playlist e Yes Playback includes all items in your playlist and continues until the user makes another selection e No Playback includes only the number of items you specify in the Count box which DVD Architect Pro randomly selects from your playlist Once playback of the specified number of items is complete the disc returns to the destination specified in the End Action properties End Action Item Description Command Determines what happens after the last item in the playlist is played e Link you can link to any menu media file and chapter point Use the Destination Destination chapter Destination item or Destination button controls to set the target You can also use the Destination button control to choose the default selected button in the destination menu e Stop your disc will stop playing after the last item THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 139 Item Destination Destination chapter Destination item Destination button Set audio track Set subtitle track Set video angle Playlist Item Item Start chapter Set audio track 140 CHAPTER 11 Description When Link is selected in the Command drop down list choose the menu title or playlist that will be displayed Note fno menu has been displayed Most recent menu will display the first menu on the disc When your end action links to a video music vi
195. fication For more information see Text bar Alt 2 on page 16 94 CHAPTER 9 e Use the Subtitle Event page in the Properties window to change the color set used to display subtitle text For more information see Subtitle Event on page 126 4 Right click the event you edited and choose a command from the shortcut menu to indicate where you want to apply the formatting e Choose Apply Formatting to Selected Events to apply the formatting and position of the text object you click to other selected subtitle events e Choose Apply Formatting to Selected Tracks to apply the formatting and position of the text object you click to other selected subtitle events Note f subtitle events have multiple text boxes formatting will be applied to the appropriate text boxes if possible based on object order For example if the event you edit has three text boxes with object order 1 2 and 3 editing the text box with object order 2 will modify only text boxes with object order 2 on the selected events or active track Setting a subtitle to display automatically You can set an object to automatically display subtitles during DVD playback regardless of the users settings Note To do this subtitles for an object need to be created in your project For more information see Adding a subtitle track on page 90 1 Inthe workspace select the object for which you have created subtitles 2 Inthe Button Properties pane click the Action button 3 S
196. figure an external monitor Your video will be sent to this device when you click the Preview on External Monitor button m in the Video Preview window For more information see Video Device tab on page 184 164 CHAPTER 15 Previewing video on a secondary Windows display If your Windows desktop is extended across multiple displays you can use one of those displays to preview your project Important f you intend to deliver your project in an interlaced format previewing on a computer monitor is not a substitute for previewing onan interlaced broadcast monitor Windows secondary display preview requirements e A multiple output graphics card that supports 3D acceleration or multiple graphics cards you could install AGP and PCI video cards in your system for example You can also use the Windows Secondary Display device on a computer with a single monitor When you enable the external monitor the video preview will fill your screen e A CRT LCD or projector connected to your computer s secondary video output e The Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box must be selected on the Settings tab or the Display Properties dialog Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display Configuring a secondary Windows display 1 Use the Video Device tab in the Preferences dialog to configure the display you want to use as a video preview monitor For more information see Configuring a Windows Secondary Display on page
197. ftware you can use the Blu ray rendering templates to render your video stream You ll need to render your audio stream separately according to the parameters listed in the AC 3 audio for Blu ray Disc projects or PCM audio for Blu ray Disc projects sections above Template Name Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum Max Bit Rate Group of Pictures Blu ray 1920x1080 24p 25 Mbps video stream 1920x1080 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps Blu ray 1920x1080 50i 25 Mbps video stream 1920x1080 25 16 9 25 40 Mbps Blu ray 1920x1080 60i 25 Mbps video stream 1920x1080 29 970 16 9 30 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 24p 25 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 50i 25 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 25 16 9 25 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 60i 25 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 29 970 16 9 30 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 24p 8 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 23 976 16 9 24 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 50i 8 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 25 16 9 25 40 Mbps Blu ray 1440x1080 60i 8 Mbps video stream 1440x1080 29 970 16 9 30 40 Mbps If you re rendering with a different application the following settings will produce compliant MPEG 2 video stream Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum Max Bit Rate Group of Pictures 720x480 29 970 interlaced 4 3 30 40 Mbps 720x480 29 970 interlaced 16 9 30 40 Mbps 720x576 25 interlaced 4 3 25 40 Mbps 720x576 25 interlaced 16 9 25 40 Mbps 1280x720 29 970 interlaced 16 9 60 40 Mbps 1280x720 50 16 9 50 40 Mbps 1
198. g images in music video compilations 63 in picture compilations 69 safe areas snapping to 56 saving copies of projects 33 markers 78 projects 33 scene selection menus 41 scene chapter markers 76 Script Debugger pane 156 Script Properties window 153 155 scripts adding to menus or titles 152 appending statements 153 comments 155 creating 152 deleting 156 DVD Scripts window 23 editing commands 154 editing statements 153 155 General Purpose Register Memories GPRMs 157 inserting statements 153 labels 155 removing statements 153 renaming 156 setting conditions 155 setting DVD start script 157 testing 156 selected button colors button properties 120 menu page properties 122 Selected item color 186 sequential videos linking 83 Set GPRM command type 154 SetMode GPRM command type 154 vi INDEX SetStreams command type 154 setting disc introduction media 28 disc start item 28 DVD start script 157 in and out points 75 loop points 40 menu length 121 object order 59 preferences 182 187 thumbnail size 72 setting up external monitors 165 setup menus 42 shortcuts keyboard 189 191 mouse 191 Show before loop point 40 52 81 114 115 Shuttle Pro 199 ShuttleXpress 200 single movie titles adding to menus 38 75 Slides inserting empty 70 smart prepare 167 172 snapping grid 56 markers to I frames 77 objects 56 to action safe area 56 to safe areas 56 to title safe
199. ge 196 Template Name Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum Max Bit Rate Group of Pictures DVD Architect NTSC video stream 720x480 29 970 4 3 36 9 8 Mbps DVD Architect NTSC widescreen video stream 720x480 29 970 16 9 36 9 8 Mbps If you re rendering with a different application the following settings will produce a compliant NTSC MPEG 2 video stream Frame Size Frame Rate fps Aspect Ratio Maximum Max Bit Rate Group of Pictures 720x480 29 97 or 4 3 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown 704x480 29 97 or 4 3 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown 352x240 29 97 or 4 3 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown 352x480 29 97 or 4 3 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown 720x480 29 97 or 16 9 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown 704x480 29 97 or 16 9 36 9 8 Mbps 23 976 2 3 pulldown Note The MainConcept MPEG 2 encoder in Vegas Pro renders with the Low Delay flag turned off If you re rendering with a different encoder ensure Low Delay is turned off 196 APPENDIX B PAL MPEG video m2p mp2 mpg mpeg mpv If you re using the MainConcept MPEG 2 encoder in Vegas software use the DVD Architect PAL video stream or DVD Architect PAL Widescreen video stream template to render your video stream You ll need to render your audio stream separately according to the parameters listed in AC 3 audio ac3 for DVD projects on page 196 or PCM audio wav or w64 for DVD projects on page 196 Template Name DVD Architect PAL video stream Frame
200. h buttons are displayed choose Customize Toolbar from the Options menu To toggle display of the main toolbar choose Toolbar from the View menu D New Project Creates a new project Open Project Opens an existing project Save Project Saves the current project Properties Opens the Project Properties dialog at Cut Cuts selected events or time range Copy Copies selected events or time range Paste Pastes items from the clipboard into your project Project Overview window Ctrl Alt 1 S caf S e e Undo Reverses the last command performed Redo Reverses an undo command Enable Snapping Enables snapping to grid lines Preview Shows or hides the Preview window Make DVD Opens the Make DVD wizard Make Blu ray Disc Opens the Make Blu ray Disc wizard The Project Overview window provides a high level view of the menus and titles in your project You can use this window to arrange the menus and titles in your project and add or delete titles To toggle the display of the window choose Project Overview from the View menu en TX The Wayfaring Stranger dar ei Main Menu d Main Menu Page 1 1 SongVideo ei 2 Options Chapters GB Options Chapters Page 1 1 Chapter Select e Chapter Select Page 1 1 Link SongVideo 1 Scene Chapter 2 Link SongVideo 2 Chapter 1 G9 3 Link Options Chapters Page 1 09 2 Link Main Menu Page 1 aia 3 Alternate Audio Alternate Audi
201. h color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color By choosing different color sets you can display button highlighting using one color set to indicate that the button is selected and a different color set to indicate that it has been activated or you can assign distinct colors to subtitle events If the window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu and click the expand button next to the Color Sets heading to expand the controls Editing a color set 1 On the Graphics Properties Menu Page Properties Button Properties Subtitle Properties Media and Event Properties Music Compilation Properties Picture Compilation Properties or Playlist Properties pane click the Color Sets button 2 Click the expand button next to the color set you want to edit 3 Choose a setting from the Color Set X drop down list to indicate whether you want the color set to be available to your entire project Project wide or only the currently selected menu or title Custom 4 Select the Mode box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the colors in your color set Item Description Blend colors You only need to choose the color set s fill color the other colors will be determined automatically by the software Specify colors You need to choose the fill color anti alias color outline background color and transparent color
202. hange the video or audio format of your project click the Project Properties button For more information see Disc properties on page 143 3 Ifyou want to automatically adjust the project video bit rate click the Fit to Disc button to fit a project that is greater than the Target media size setting on the Disc Properties tab For more information see Disc properties on page 143 Note Only video that requires recompression will be adjusted When your project cannot be made to fit on a disc you can change the video settings so all titles and menus will be recompressed or you can remove video from your project Editing a media file s source project When your DVD Architect Pro project uses source media files that are rendered with an embedded project path reference you can easily open the source project from the Explorer window in the associated application if you need to edit the media By saving your project path reference when you render files in ACID 5 0 ACID Music Studio 6 0 Sound Forge 8 0 Vegas 6 0 or Vegas Movie Studio 6 0 or later you can quickly access the media from DVD Architect Pro via the Edit Source Project shortcut menu Note The project information in the rendered file is only a reference to a project file If you modify the source project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer
203. hat alternate between colors in a horizontal line and reduce colors in those areas e You can reduce overall complexity by reducing the amount of detail in the highlight mask image e Reduce the number of colors in the image If you re using a text mask when the Mask overlay or Text mask overlay highlighting style is selected in the Button Properties controls try the following e Apply a different highlighting style Reduce the amount of button text e Reduce the number of buttons on each menu page One or more files in the extra content folder are too large The maximum allowed file size for a file in your extras folder is 2 GB Delete the offending files from your extras folder and prepare your project again The path to the extras folder is displayed on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Disc properties on page 143 One or more menu links overlap This message indicates that a button or text box is overlapping another link If you re creating a DVD project you can burn your project with overlapping links but your disc can be more difficult to navigate when you highlight one link the overlapping link may also be highlighted If you re creating a Blu ray Disc project you cannot prepare your project with overlapping menu links you must fix the issue before proceeding Navigate to the page and move the link as necessary When you preview the page move the highlight among links un
204. he Properties window to type a new location for the text box in the X position and Y position boxes Tip You can also use transformation keyframes to animate text in your project For more information see Transformation keyframes on page 52 Deleting text 1 Select a song in the Compilation window If necessary click the Selection tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool In the workspace select the text box you want to delete E From the Edit menu choose Delete Tip You can add graphics to text and use keyframes to animate them For information about adding graphics and using keyframes see Adding graphics on page 38 and Transformation keyframes on page 52 Setting thumbnail display You can set the size of the thumbnail displayed for the song images in the Compilation window Click the down arrow button to the right of the Thumbnail Size button Esmail and choose Small Medium or Large to select the desired size 64 CHAPTER 5 Music video compilation properties The Music Video Compilation Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected music or video compilation Music Video Compilation Properties General End Action Remote Buttons Slide Color Sets Saeeduce interlace flicker Start Script None Reduce interlace flicker When enabled reduces flicker caused by interlacing video frames To edit
205. he United States and other countries Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dolby Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the production of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2008 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories FLAC Ogg File Formats 2008 Xiph org Foundation Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the foundation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract
206. he driver s Export Settings Info feature to create a graphical representation of your current settings Buttons Play Stop Select Subtitle Set Subtitle End Set Next Play Pause Timeline Start Numeric Keypad 5 Subtitle Timeline Timeline Timeline Shuttle Ring Turn left or right for variable speed cursor positioning in the Timeline window Jog Dial Move One Move One Frame Left Frame Right Timeline Timeline Navigating the timeline with a ShuttlePro or ShuttleXpress Use shuttle ring and jog dial to navigate the timeline The shuttle ring moves the cursor left or right and the jog dial moves the cursor in one frame increments Navigating the timeline with a PowerMate or other controller If you have a multimedia controller such as the Griffin Technology PowerMate you can map your controller to the Alt Left Right Arrow frame jog keys Map the single button function to the F9 key for Preview 200 APPENDIX C Appendix D Troubleshooting In this chapter Error messages on page 201 Warning messages on page 206 Informational messages on page 210 Error messages Could not suggest a valid layer break The smart prepare data for your project is corrupt or not accessible To recover this data reprepare your project For more information see Preparing a DVD project on page 167 or Preparing a Blu ray Disc project on page 175 DVD script uses too many instructions Each DVD script can contain a maximum of 1
207. he event into multiple events e Turn off text outlining e Use a different font or font size Subtitle event is too complex due to horizontal lines If a subpicture graphic is overly complex overall or on a horizontal line it cannot be compressed to meet the requirements of the DVD specification This message indicates a subtitle event that is too complex in a horizontal line Try the following to reduce horizontal complexity e Add line breaks to the subtitle event e Turn off text outlining e Use a different font or font size The estimated size of all menus is greater than the maximum The total size of all menus cannot exceed 1 GB Your project s estimated menu size exceeds the limit and your project cannot be prepared until you reduce the total menu size Deleting background images and audio from your menus may help you conserve space The extra content folder can neither contain the prepare folder nor be contained by the prepare folder The project s extra content folder cannot contain or be contained by the folder where you prepare your project Move the extra content folder and then update the Extras folder specified on the Disc Properties page in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Disc properties on page 143 TROUBLESHOOTING 203 The extra content folder contains too many files You can have a maximum of 10 000 files in your extras folder Delete some files from your extras folder and pr
208. he grid Lock sizes Locks the grid size so the height and width are equal Color Sets the red green blue and alpha channels for your grid Start all new projects Use the grid settings you have specified whenever a new project with these settings is created Show grid Displays the grid in the workspace Saving and recalling window layouts A window layout stores the sizes and positions of all windows and floating window docks in the DVD Architect Pro workspace You can store any number of window layouts on your computer and up to ten window layouts are available in the View menu and via keyboard shortcuts so you can quickly recall frequently used layouts Notes Window layouts are saved in the following folders e Windows XP C Documents and Settings Your User Name Application Data Sony DVD Architect Pro 5 2 e Windows Vista C Users Your User Name AppData Roaming Sony DVD Architect Pro 5 2 You can transfer layouts between computers by copying the DVDArchWindowLayout files Saving a window layout 1 Arrange the windows and docked windows as desired Tip Press Ctri Alt D release the keys and then press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to save the layout in that space 2 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Save Layout As from the submenu The Save Layout As dialog is displayed Choose Save Layout from the submenu if you want to update the current window layout A bullet is display
209. he path to the folder where DVD Architect Pro software will master your project output Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Note Mastering is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Default All Restores the Mastering page to the default settings CUSTOMIZING DVD ARCHITECT PRO SOFTWARE 187 188 CHAPTER 17 Appendix A Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts Project file Press Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Alt Enter Alt F4 Magnification and view Press Alt 0 Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 6 Alt 7 Alt 8 Alt 9 Ctrl Alt 1 Ctrl Alt 2 Ctrl Alt 3 Ctrl Alt 4 F11 Shift F11 Ctrl G Ctrl B Home End Page Up Page Down Alt D then press 0 9 Ctrl Alt D then press 0 9 Result Create a new project Open an existing project Save modified project back to the file Display the Project Properties dialog Exit the application Result Set input focus to the workspace Show hide editing toolbar Show hide text bar Show set input focus to the Explorer window Show set input focus to the Themes window Show set input focus to the Buttons window Show set input focus to the Backgrounds window Show set input focus to the Compilation window Show set input focus to the Properties window Show set input focus to the Timeline window Show set input focus to the Project Overview window Show set input focus to the Playlists window Show set input focus to the DVD Scripts window Show set input focus to the Crop a
210. he user to press the Audio button on the remote to choose which audio track is played Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Subtitle button on the remote to choose which subtitle track is displayed Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Allows the user to press the Angle button on the remote to choose which video track is played Allows the user to press the Video Mode button on the remote to switch widescreen letterboxed and pan and scan presentation in a 16 9 video The Slide page of the Properties window displays the settings for the slide selected in the Compilation window Description The Video control displays the path to the image or video file that will be used Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file open the file in your specified graphics editor or explore the file s containing folder on your drive Tip You can also change the slide image by dragging a new image from the Explorer window to the Video box or toa song in the Compilation window The Audio control displays the path to the background audio file that will be used Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties remove the current file or open the file in your specified graphics editor
211. he user to press the Previous Up button on the remote to navigate to the previous chapter or menu page Item Next Fast scan Backward scan Top menu Menu Resume Button navigation Pause Audio track change Description Allows the user to press the Next button on the remote to navigate to the next chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Fwd button on the remote to seek forward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Rev button on the remote to seek backward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote to navigate to the top menu of the disc These controls are not available for menu pages Allows the user to press the Resume Menu button on the remote to resume playback of a title after exiting it by pressing the Menu button Allows the user to press the Up Down Left and Right buttons on the remote to navigate between menu buttons Allows the user to press the Pause button on the remote to temporarily suspend playback Allows the user to press the Audio button on the remote to choose which audio track is played Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Subtitle track change Allows the user to press the Subtitle button on the remote to choose which subtitle track is displayed Note Choose No Change to use the last set track Video angle change Allows
212. ic scene in a video You can quickly and easily create a scene selection menu from an existing video title Creating a menu that continues playback after playing the selected scene automatic scene selection menus 1 Insert your video title and add your scene chapter markers These markers are used to create your scene selection menu For more information about inserting video titles see Adding a movie title to a menu on page 75 For more information about adding scene chapter markers see Inserting scene chapter markers on page 76 Return to the menu to which you added the video title and select its button in the workspace or select the title in the Project Overview window Right click the video title and choose Insert Scene Selection Menu from the shortcut menu in the Project Overview window The Insert Scene Selection Menu dialog is displayed Insert Scene Selection Menu Page title Scene Selection ake Links per page Eenes In the Page title box type the title you want to be displayed on the new menu In the Links per page box type the number of links you want to display per page For example if your video includes 15 scene chapter markers typing 5 in this box will create a scene selection menu with three pages Click the OK button to create the menu and pages You can then edit the menu as necessary Tip Ifyou want to create individual thumbnails that link to chapter points without creating a scene select
213. idual keyframes 1 Inthe Keyframe Controller select the keyframe you want to edit CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 49 2 Inthe Properties pane click the button next to the Crop box to display the controls 3 Edit the crop settings For more information see Cropping graphics on page 48 Viewing and editing media properties The Media Properties window allows you to display information about the selected media file The application will try to detect the properties of your media files automatically In most cases you will not need to edit file properties Note Editing media properties will affect all instances of the media throughout your project Double click a media file in the Project Overview window or the workspace area On the Media Properties pane click Track Media Select the path to the file in the Audio or Video box oa a Click the down arrow button and choose Media Properties from the menu Media Properties General Track Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets pct istplay 1 m2v E3 Audio 1 Replace Media Properties Crop and Adjust k Remove Edit Source Project Open in Graphics Editor Explore Containing Folder The Media Properties window is displayed The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Media Properties window General The File name displays the name of the selected media file 50 CHAPTER 4 Video Stream Item Descript
214. ilation Allows the user to press the Stop button on the remote to stop the disc Allows the user to press the Time button on the remote to skip to a specific play time or chapter Allows the user to press the Previous Up button on the remote to navigate to the previous chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Next button on the remote to navigate to the next chapter or menu page Allows the user to press the Fwd button on the remote to seek forward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 129 Item Backward scan Top menu Menu Resume Button navigation Pause Audio track change Subtitle track change Video angle change Video mode Description Allows the user to press the Rev button on the remote to seek backward through a video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote to navigate to the top menu of the disc Allows the user to press the Menu button on the remote during playback Click the expand button to expand the Menu controls so you can define the behavior of the Menu button for a title For more information see End Action on page 128 Note The Menu button is not supported for Blu ray Disc projects Allows the user to press the Resume Menu button on the remote to resume playback of a title after exiting it by pressing the Menu button Allows the user to press the
215. ilation Picture Compilation Properties General Track Media End Action Remote Buttons Slide Color Sets Reduce interlace flicker Off Start Script None Reduce interlace flicker When enabled reduces flicker caused by interlacing video frames To edit the picture compilation s properties perform the following steps 1 Double click a picture compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Click the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Picture Compilation Properties pane General Item Reduce interlace flicker Start Script Track Media Item Audio Description Select the Reduce interlace flicker box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to turn flicker reduction on or off Turn flicker reduction on when using still images that contain thin horizontal lines If you have already created at least one DVD script in your project select the Start Script box click the down arrow button and choose the script that will be played when the selected compilation is accessed Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Description The Audio box displays the path to the background audio file th
216. ing Option Description Do not erase Does not erase the contents of the disc Quick erase Erases only the table of contents Full erase Erases all data from the disc Select the Burn disc radio button if you want to burn your project or select the Test only button to perform a test burn without activating your burner s laser Note Test burns are not available when using BD RE media or when the Use legacy disc drivers check box is cleared on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog Select the Eject disc when done check box so the Blu ray Disc drive will open when the burn is completed 8 Click the Finish button to start burning 9 When burning a previously prepared dual layer image after clicking the Finish button click Continue to burn the next layer The layer break is selected automatically 10 The application displays a dialog box prompting you to burn another disc Click the Yes button to burn another copy The application displays the Make Blu ray Disc Select Burn Parameters page where you can begin the process again Click the No button if you do not want to burn another copy of your project 176 CHAPTER 16 Erasing discs From the File menu choose Erase Disc to delete data from a rewritable disc 1 2 3 From the File menu choose Erase Disc The Erase Disc dialog is displayed From the Drive drop down list choose the drive that contains the disc you want to erase Choose the speed of the drive fr
217. inks to a menu choose Start or Loop Point to indicate the point from which the menu will be played For more information see Setting loop points on page 40 When your button links to a menu choose the button you want to use as the default selected button in the destination menu If you choose Default the first button listed under the menu in the Project Overview window is used as the default Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set audio track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty audio tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding audio tracks on page 87 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Choose Off to turn subtitles off or choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set subtitle track control to change the subtitle track the new track will be used whe
218. io compression and signal processing for Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress wav files Bit A bit is the most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples Bit Depth The number of bits used to represent a single sample Higher values will increase the quality of the playback and any recordings that you make While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Brightness Adjusting brightness adds or subtracts values from the color channels in an image to make the image lighter or darker The maximum brightness setting adds 255 pure white and the minimum setting adds 0 pure black Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store GLOSSARY 213 Clipboard The clipboard is where data that you have cut or copied in DVD Architect Pro software is stored You can then paste the data back into DVD Architect Pro software at a different location or paste it into other applications such as Microsoft Word or
219. ion X size Y size Maintain aspect ratio Show before loop point Description Edit the X position and Y position values to change the center of the selected button s position These coordinates are based on the frame size of your project For example if you re creating an NTSC project with a frame size of 720x480 0 0 is the top left corner of the frame and 720 480 is the lower right corner Perform any of the following to change the setting e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value e Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value Edit the X size and Y size values to change the size of the selected button Perform any of the following to change the setting e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value Select the Maintain aspect ratio box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the drop down list if you do not want the button image to be stretched when you change the height or width Select the Show before loop point box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the drop down list if you want the button to be displayed before a menu s loop point By default buttons are not displayed before playback reaches the set loop point
220. ion Media attributes Displays the size resolution and length of the selected media file Media format Displays the format of the selected media file Frame rate Displays the frame rate of the selected media file Field order Allows you to choose the field order of the selected media file It is recommended to review the documentation for your capture video output card to ensure proper field order None progressive scan Use for viewing on a computer interlacing is ignored Upper field first Use for video that will be viewed on a television Lower field first Use if the Upper field first displays shaky output or if your hardware manual specifies lower field first Pixel aspect ratio Allows you to choose the pixel aspect ratio of the selected media file It is recommended to review the documentation for your capture video output card to ensure proper settings Alpha channel Allows you to choose how the alpha channel will be handled for the selected media file Undefined Video provides no alpha channel information and ignores any alpha channel information and in the file None Video has no alpha channel or there is an alpha channel but it s completely opaque solid Straight unmatted Transparency information is maintained in only the alpha channel Alpha information must be applied to the RGB channels before compositing Premultiplied The standard method of handling alpha information Transparency information is m
221. ion see Creating a script on page 152 142 CHAPTER 11 Chapter 12 Setting Project Properties When you start a new project you select various properties for the project However if you need to view those properties or make changes to them while you re working on the project you can do so at any time by choosing Properties from the File menu The Project Properties dialog is displayed containing two tabs Properties and Summary If your projects typically use the same settings select the Start all new projects with these settings check box at the bottom of the dialog Disc properties You can use the controls on the Disc Properties page to adjust general settings for your disc Item Disc format Target media size GB Video defaults Video format Bit rate Mbps Aspect Ratio Resolution Description Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate whether you want to create a Blu ray Disc project or a DVD project Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the capacity of your media This setting will be used to calculate how much space is available on disc If you want to burn a Blu ray Disc project to DVD media choose 8 50 or 4 70 Tip You can also change this setting by right clicking the Disc Space Used display in the bottom right corner of the DVD Architect Pro window and choosing a command from the shortcut menu Displays the default video settings for your project You can use the c
222. ion see Creating custom masks on page 97 If the current mask file uses layers you can choose to use a single layer or the combined layers as a mask for your thumbnail image 1 Click the expand button next to the Mask heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to use the combined layers as a mask choose Composited layer If you re using an animated file as a button frame the Start time setting determines the point at which playback will start in the animated frame If you want to display a single frame from an animated file as a static button frame the Start time setting determines which frame is displayed To change the start time select the box and type a new setting or select the box and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the setting Determines whether the frame is displayed as a static image or an animated frame e Still Choose Still to display the frame as a static image If your frame file is animated the Start time setting determines which frame is displayed e Animated The animated file is played as the button frame Highlight Note Animated button highlights are not supported If a button has keyframe animation applied button highlighting is not animated or may not be visible when you burn your project You will see the button highlighting when you preview your D
223. ion menu add an empty button to your menu and use its button action to link to a title and chapter Creating a menu that returns to the menu after playing the selected scene chapter manual scene selection menus Is Add a title to the menu you want to use as a scene selection menu For more information see Adding a movie title to a menu on page 75 Select the title s button in the workspace or select the title in the Project Overview window From the Edit menu choose Copy The button is copied to the clipboard From the Edit menu choose Paste A copy of the button is added to your menu Note Even though you re creating multiple copies of your title the title will be saved to the disc only once Multiple titles that use the same video audio and subtitle tracks will only be saved once on the disc For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 Repeat step 4 for each scene you want to be able to play from the menu Set the in and out points for each button a Double click the button in the workspace or double click the title in the Project Overview window to open it CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 41 7 b In the Timeline window position the cursor where you want the button to begin playback and click the Set In Point button Fa c Position the cursor where you want the button to stop playback and click the Set Out Point button m Repeat step 6 for each button Creating a scene selection only di
224. isible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click the specified DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose the script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script 3 Inthe DVD Scripts window review the script statements for a Link command that displays as Broken link Click the statement 4 Inthe Script Properties pane click the Destination box and choose a title or menu from the drop down list to which you want to link The script contains a GotoLabel command which points to an invalid label The specified script contains a GotoLabel command which points to an invalid label in the script To edit a script s properties perform the following actions 1 Ifthe Script Properties window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click the specified DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose the script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script 3 Inthe DVD Scripts window review the script statements for a GotoLabel command that displays as Invalid label Click the statement 4 Inthe Script Properties pane click the Label box and choose a label from the drop down list Note Label statements can only be used to link within a script Links from one script to a label in another script are not supported TROUBLESHOOTING 209 The video has a length of zero You cannot burn a video with a le
225. items From the Edit menu choose Paste Attributes and then choose one of the following items from the submenu Item Description Button Frame Replaces the button frame and associated mask of the selected object with the attributes from the button you copied Media Effects Replaces media effects of the selected object with the attributes from the object you copied Text Properties Replaces text properties of the selected object with the attributes from the text you copied Note The actual text is not replaced CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 57 Item Description Size Changes the size of the selected object with the size of the object you copied Size and Position Changes the size and position of the selected object with the size and position of the object you copied All Replaces all attributes of the selected object with the attributes of the copied object When you are copying and pasting attributes and have multiple objects selected the software will assign attributes according to the following rules If you copy a single object and paste size and position or all attributes to multiple selected objects attributes will be pasted to the first object only to avoid creating overlapping objects Properties are pasted from objects of the same type text attributes are pasted to text objects graphic properties are pasted to graphic objects and button properties are pasted to buttons However you can paste size position and m
226. k control to change the subtitle track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty subtitle tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding a subtitle track on page 90 Item Description Set video angle Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video angle the new angle will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the angle Remote Buttons For each picture compilation you can allow or suspend operation of individual buttons on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control Turning buttons on or off helps to ensure the viewer will see your project as you intended it If you have an animated menu for example turning off buttons will prevent the user from navigating away from the menu before it s finished playing To turn each button on or off select the box click the down arrow
227. k point cannot be placed at the beginning of a title After the project is prepared the software will interrupt the mastering process to prompt you to choose a layer break point b Click the Finish button DVD Architect Pro software prepares the project 11 If you are burning a dual layer disc from a prepared project the Select Layer Break page is displayed to assist you with placing the layer break Notes All media after the selected layer break will be placed on the second layer If you re preparing and mastering the Select Layer Break page will be displayed only if you did not choose the Choose a layer break point automatically radio button in step 10 or if the software is unable to find a preferred layer break point a Atthe top of the page select a setting from the drop down list to indicate whether you want the preferred layer break points or all available layer break points to be displayed Break points are determined by chapters in your titles e A preferred layer break point occurs at the beginning of a title These chapter markers are preferred because they will not result in a visible pause when the DVD or Blu ray Disc player changes layers e Ifno preferred layer break points are available you can choose to display all possible layer break points If you choose a nonpreferred break point viewers may notice a pause when the player changes layers e Ifno layer break points are available you can close th
228. key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files 3 While holding the Ctrl or Shift key select the object to which you want to align the selected objects 4 Click a button on the left edge of the workspace Tool Name Description E Align Left Aligns all selected objects to the left edge of the last selected object ry Align Horizontal Aligns all selected objects to the horizontal center of the last selected Center object a Align Right Aligns all selected objects to the right edge of the last selected object Te Align Top Aligns all selected objects to the top edge of the last selected object Je Align Vertical Center Aligns all selected objects to the vertical center of the last selected object To Align Bottom Aligns all selected objects to the bottom edge of the last selected object Automatically aligning objects based on current theme If you ve applied a theme to a menu menu objects can automatically align when you add media to the menu Select the Double clicking files in Explorer reapplies theme layout check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to automatically realign objects according to the current theme when you double click media files in the Explorer window When you double click a file the new file is added and the objects are realigned on the menu When the check box is cleared the media files are added to the menu and existing object positions are preserved From the Edit men
229. kpoints suspend playback and display the debugger area in the lower left corner of the preview window allowing you to step through the script in a certain area and then resume playback Crop and Adjust Ctrl Alt 4 From the View menu choose Crop and Adjust to display the Crop and Adjust window where you can crop a video or graphic or adjust its appearance You can set these changes to occur over time through the use of keyframes For more information see Cropping and adjusting video and graphics on page 45 LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 23 24 CHAPTER 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter details what you need to know to start authoring your project using DVD Architect Pro software How it works The basic process for creating a DVD or Blu ray Disc is essentially the same regardless of the type of project you choose to create The steps listed below are discussed in more detail in this and other chapters 1 Start anew project and specify the type of project you want to create menu based music video compilation picture compilation or single movie For more information see Starting a new project on page 25 2 Choose and add your media For more information see Choosing your media files on page 27 and Adding files to your project on page 27 3 Preview your project For more information see Previewing Projects on page 163 Save your project For more information see Saving your project on page 33
230. ks 123 applying themes 108 arranging objects 51 automatically updating objects 36 changing background media 122 changing page order 37 choosing color sets for buttons 125 custom menus 102 106 default language 186 deleting pages 36 editing text 39 iv INDEX end actions 124 inserting graphics 38 inserting text 39 loop point 122 moving objects 51 properties 121 scene selection menus 41 setting length 121 setup menus 42 transitions 43 turning remote control buttons off 124 Minimum video bit rate 187 monitor external 166 mouse shortcuts 191 moving keyframes 49 markers 77 objects 51 text in menus 40 text in music video compilations 64 text in picture compilations 71 multimedia controllers 199 music video compilations adding audio 62 adding text 63 adding to menus 38 61 adjusting brightness and contrast of images 63 deleting text 64 editing images 63 editing text 64 end actions 135 formatting text 64 inserting images or videos 62 moving text 64 properties 135 138 replacing audio files 62 replacing images or videos 63 rotating images 63 setting thumbnail size 64 stretching or scaling images 63 navigating between keyframes 49 navigating timeline with multimedia controllers 200 navigation buttons 43 Navigation tool 58 Nop command type 154 NTSC MPEG video 196 objects adjusting spacing 55 aligning 55 arranging 51 automati
231. l The red areas represent portions of the menu where highlighting will be applied If your psd file will use button specific highlight mask images you can omit this layer 3 Create layers for your button images In the sample menu the house shaped button on the left is button 01 a Create a layer set named button 01 group optional b Create a layer named button 01 thumbnail for the main button image optional The simple magenta field represents the button s thumbnail image You can omit this layer if you plan to use the Media page in the Button Properties pane to assign a thumbnail For example you could use this method to use a title s video as an animated or still thumbnail c Create a layer named button 01 thumbnailmask for the button s mask image optional The mask determines which part of the thumbnail will be visible inside the button The white area represents the portion of the thumbnail that will be visible in the button The black area sets the size of the button and represents the portion of the thumbnail that is masked to allow the menu background to show through d Create a layer named button 01 frame for the button s frame image optional The frame image is displayed around the oO 2 gt The button frame is a wood textured pentagon that was created using several layers that were merged to a single layer e Create a layer named button 01 framemask for the fra
232. l Description Direction Select the box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu to set the direction for panning Speed Select the box click the down arrow button and drag the slider to set the panning speed If you selected Zoom only Pan or zoom or Pan and zoom in step 4 use the Zooming controls to fine tune the zoom animation that will be applied to your images Control Description Direction Select the box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the menu to choose whether you want to zoom in out or alternate between images Maximum zoom Select the box click the down arrow button and drag the slider to set the maximum zoom level If you use the Edge crop control to crop the image the maximum zoom is based on the edge cropped image If you want the cropped images to match the aspect ratio of your DVD Architect Pro project select the Match output aspect box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu Forcing the crop rectangle to match the project aspect ratio prevents the likelihood of seeing black borders around your pictures Click OK to close the dialog and generate the animation A Crop and Adjust keyframe is created at the beginning and end of each slide to create animation 10 Click the Preview button Preview to preview your settings 11 If you need to change your settings you can use either of the following procedures e
233. l be visible Notes e Click the Lock Aspect Ratio button ifyou want the selection box to retain its aspect ratio during resizing e Right click the selection box and choose Match Output Aspect to force the height width ratio of the selection box to match the Video format setting in your Project Properties 1 Click the expand button next to the Crop box to expand the controls 2 Use the Crop controls to add a crop to the edges of the graphic to frame the image a Select the Left box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to trim the left edge of the image b Drag the Top slider or type a value in the box to trim the top edge of the image c Drag the Right slider or type a value in the box to trim the right edge of the image Drag the Bottom slider or type a value in the box to trim the bottom edge of the image Crop and video effects keyframes Keyframes can be used in DVD Architect Pro to animate objects by cropping them or changing their size or position over time Your keyframes define an object s settings at a given point in time The Keyframe Controller displayed at the bottom of the Crop and Adjust window allows you to add and remove keyframes and control the parameters for individual keyframes For more information see Crop and adjust properties on page 47 Each keyframe contains a set of parameters for a specified point on the timeline The settings for intermediat
234. lacing audio in 88 automatic scene selection menus 41 Index automatically aligning objects based on current theme 55 Backgrounds window 18 Blu ray Discs 3D 161 burning 175 176 preparing 175 brightness contrast modifier 185 burning 8 cm discs to 12 cm discs 171 Blu ray Discs 175 176 DVDs 168 170 ISO Image Writer 168 170 preferences 187 button colors button properties 120 menu page properties 122 button overlap color 186 buttons actions 116 adding to menus 43 adding to videos 79 animating keyframes 81 choosing color sets 125 editing 115 120 editing order for menus 54 editing order for videos 79 highlighting 119 properties 115 120 style 117 Buttons window 18 buttons on video markers 76 centering objects 55 changing interpolation curves between keyframes 49 menu background media 122 menu page order 37 picture compilation thumbnail size 72 position of object 52 chapter markers 76 78 color sets applying 45 editing 44 media properties 130 menu page properties 125 music video compilation properties 138 picture compilation properties 134 subtitle properties 127 command types for scripts 154 Compilation window 19 INDEX i compilations See music video compilations picture compilations conditions for scripts 155 configuring external monitors 166 Contour ShuttlePro 199 Contour ShuttleXpress 200 Contour SpaceShuttle 200 copy protection 146 copying and pasting se
235. lder but this content will be available only when browsing the disc on a computer Click the Change Media button to browse to a folder Click the Clear Media button x to remove a folder Note Not available for Blu ray Disc projects The jacket picture feature allows you to specify a still image that will display when the Stop button has been pressed on the remote control Commercially produced discs often use an image of the disc cover hence the name but you can use any image Click the Change Media button to browse to a folder Click the Clear Media button x to clear the current jacket picture Notes e Notall DVD players support the jacket picture feature e Not available for Blu ray Disc projects If you want to specify the start script that will be executed when your project is played in a DVD player click the box and choose an available script from the drop down list If you have not yet created any scripts the only available option will be None For more information see DVD Scripts Ctrl Alt 3 on page 23 Notes The start script will execute prior to any item designated as the start item in your project e Not available for Blu ray Disc projects SETTING PROJECT PROPERTIES 145 Item Description Parental control You can restrict the disc s playback by selecting the parental controls ratings set by the Motion Picture Association of America MPAA e Off There are no parental
236. lect a new song and click the Open button The audio is replaced with your new selection Drag an audio file from the Explorer window or Microsoft Windows Explorer onto an existing song in the Compilation window The existing song is replaced with the dragged file Drag an audio file from the Explorer window or Microsoft Windows Explorer and drop it on a song in the Timeline window Select a song in the Compilation window From the Edit menu choose Slide Audio and then choose Set From File The Set Audio dialog is displayed Select a new song and click the Open button The audio is replaced with your new selection On the Music Video Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button Click Audio click the down arrow button and choose Replace from the menu The Open Media dialog is displayed Select a new song and click the Open button The audio is replaced with your new selection Adding and editing images or videos Inserting images or videos You can choose an image or video for each song in your compilation The image or video will display on screen while the song is playing There are several ways to add an image or video to a song Select a song In the Explorer window double click an image The image is added to the selected song Select a song From the Edit menu choose Slide Video Image and then choose Set from the submenu The Set Video Image dialog is displayed Select an image and click the Open button The image or vi
237. les unless another button action end action or user action via the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control changes the track Add a menu to your project Add a button for each audio track in your project a From the Insert menu choose Empty Button b Press F2 and edit the button s text to describe the audio track it will select c Inthe Button Properties pane click the Action button and use the Destination chapter drop down list to determine what happens when the button is clicked If Then You want the button to select an audio track Choose your setup menu from the Destination without navigating away from the setup menu drop down list You want to navigate away from the setup Choose a media file or menu from the menu after choosing an audio track Destination chapter drop down list For example choosing a media file would allow you to automatically start playback of a title using the selected audio Choosing a menu could navigate to a scene selection menu or a separate setup menu for choosing the subtitle track d Inthe Button Properties controls choose a track from the Set audio track drop down list to determine which audio track will be played in a destination title Note f you use the Set audio track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track e Repeat steps a through d for
238. liders to choose a color and drag the vertical alpha slider to set transparency Type values in the R G B and A boxes e Select the eyedropper tool to sample a color from your screen e Click the Change Color Space button EE to switch between RGB and HSL color modes When your re using the color picker a warning 4 is displayed when you choose an out of gamut color Click the color swatch below the warning to correct the color Click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the transparency of the image drag left to increase transparency or drag right to make the image more opaque CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 47 Item Description Crop Use the Crop controls to add a crop to the edges of the graphic to frame the image Select the Left box click the down arrow button and drag the slider or type a value in the box to trim the left edge of the image Drag the Top slider or type a value in the box to trim the top edge of the image Drag the Right slider or type a value in the box to trim the right edge of the image Drag the Bottom slider or type a value in the box to trim the bottom edge of the image Cropping graphics Perform either of the following procedures to crop a video or image Drag the handles on the selection box to adjust its size or drag from the center of the box to change its position The selection box represents the portion of the image that wil
239. logo that is displayed before your disc starts playing 1 Select an object in the Project Overview window 2 Click the Insert Object button 5 and choose Introduction Media from the menu The Insert Media dialog is displayed 3 Inthe Insert Media dialog select the media file you want to use and then click Open The file you selected is set as the disc start item and the previous disc start item is added to the new media file as an end action link For more information about end actions for media see End Action on page 128 The start item is displayed with a video strip icon g in the Project Overview window Setting your project properties When you start a new project you select various properties for the project However if you need to view those properties or make changes to them while you re working on the project you can do so at any time by choosing Properties from the File menu The Project Properties dialog is displayed containing two tabs Properties and Summary If your projects typically use the same settings select the Start all new projects with these settings check box at the bottom of the dialog For more information see Setting Project Properties on page 143 28 CHAPTER 3 Optimizing your project To display the Optimize Disc dialog choose Optimize Disc from the File menu You can use this dialog to optimize your project before burning or mastering to identify and correct potential problems or to force recompres
240. low objects to snap to the title safe or action safe areas The title safe area indicates the region within which titles will always be visible on a television monitor To show or hide this area choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Title Safe Area from the submenu The action safe area indicates the region within which motion will always be visible on a television monitor To show or hide this area choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Action Safe Area from the submenu Using automatic button actions Usually a user must press the Enter button on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control to perform an action However with the automatic button feature the button s action is performed when the button is selected For more information see Action on page 116 Note Automatic button actions are useful for navigation buttons such as previous next page buttons in multipage menus This will allow the disc to automatically advance to the next page as soon as the Next Page button is selected Button properties The Button Properties pane in the Properties window is available when you have a button selected in the workspace Use these controls to change the appearance behavior and navigation settings for the selected button 56 CHAPTER 4 Button Properties Transformations Action Media Highlight Navigation Color Sets X position 3815 Y position 408 3 X size 216 9 Y size 60 4
241. m the menu to recompress using the project s default bit rate Warning messages DVD scripts are not compatible with Blu ray Disc Your project contains one or more DVD scripts DVD scripts do not work on Blu ray Disc and will be ignored in your project You can delete them using the DVD Scripts window For more information see Deleting a script on page 156 Jacket picture is not supported on Blu ray Disc The jacket picture feature is not supported in Blu ray Disc projects The jacket picture file you specified in Project Properties will be ignored You can delete your selected in the Jacket picture box on the Disc Properties tag of the Project Properties dialog by clicking the Clear Media button 206 APPENDIX D One or more buttons is outside the action safe area When an object is outside the safe area it is likely to be clipped when viewed on a television Navigate to the page and move the object as necessary Tip To display or hide safe area borders in the workspace choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Title Safe Area or Show Action Safe Area from the submenu Safe areas are displayed as borders around your video to represent the visible areas for action and titles The outer border marks the area that will be visible on a television screen and the inner border is the suggested area for titles One or more buttons on a menu are broken The destination for one or more buttons on the specified
242. me s mask image optional The frame mask determines which portion of the frame image will be visible 104 CHAPTER 10 The white area represents the portion of the frame that will be visible The black area matches the size of the button established in step C above and represents the portion of the button that is masked to allow the menu background to show through 4 f Create a layer named button 01 highlight for the button s highlight mask optional The highlight mask determines where highlighting will be applied when a button is selected or activated The button 01 framemask layer was duplicated and renamed to allow highlighting to be applied to the visible frame The white area represents the portion of the button that will be highlighted when the button is selected or activated The gray area in the center will be partially highlighted If your psd file will use a menu specific highlight mask you can omit this layer Repeat step 3 as needed incrementing the ID for each button In the sample menu the house shaped button on the right is button 02 Create layers for navigation buttons as needed In the sample menu the arrow shaped button in the bottom right corner is button 03 group Note f you omit navigation button layers empty buttons will be used p Create a layer set named button 03 group optional b Create a layer named button 03 thumbnail next for the main button image optional Appending ne
243. me track sequence for all titles will ensure consistency across your project If necessary insert blank subtitle tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition between titles However a user could manually choose a blank subtitle track without realizing that it was intentionally left blank Note Various brands and models of DVD players behave differently with blank subtitle tracks Adding subtitle text 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible 3 Click to position the cursor in the timeline where you want to add the subtitle text 4 Create a subtitle event by doing one of the following actions Action Description Click the Activate Track An event is added to the track and the text box in the workspace is made editable so you can button amp on the track change the text If a subtitle event exists at the cursor position another text box is added to the where you want to add workspace within the current subtitle event subtitles and then choose If the Auto Ripple button d is selected subtitle events to the right of the cursor are shifted Subtitle Text from the downstream to accommodate the new event Insert menu If the Auto Ripple button is not selected a new event is created at the
244. menu is invalid This can occur when you delete items from your project or add empty buttons to menus 1 Navigate to the menu with the broken action Select a button 3 Click the expand button l next to the Button Properties heading to expand the Button Properties controls 4 Click the expand button next to the Action heading to expand the controls 5 Ifthe Destination drop down list to displays Broken Link choose a new setting from the drop down list to resolve the broken link 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each button on the menu One or more chapter markers are too close You can create markers that are less than one second apart by importing markers or by moving a movie s in out points too close to a marker Navigate to the movie and adjust markers or in out points before burning One or more menu links are off screen This warning indicates that a button or text box is at least 1 pixel off screen Navigate to the page and move the link as necessary Tip To display or hide safe area borders in the workspace choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Title Safe Area or Show Action Safe Area from the submenu Safe areas are displayed as borders around your video to represent the visible areas for action and titles The outer border marks the area that will be visible on a television screen and the inner border is the suggested area for titles One or more slides in compilation are too close f
245. n set image stretching or scaling rotate an image or set a picture s display duration Image T XA Length Image Filename 42 00 00 09 443 guitarist png E 00 00 09 443 Mandolinist png pi 00 00 09 443 Cellist png Timeline if Eg Fe Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts Insert Item Adds images to a picture compilation or audio video or still images to a music video compilation Delete Items Removes items from a compilation Fit Compilation to Audio Automatically adjusts the duration of all slides to match the length of the audio file Applies only to picture compilations Generate Slide Show Animations Allows you to pan zoom and or crop pictures in a slideshow Applies only to picture compilations Rotate Counterclockwise Rotates the image counterclockwise Rotate Clockwise Rotates the image clockwise Reset Effect Properties Resets all effect properties Auto Levels Automatically adjusts the brightness and contrast The most abundant colors either light or dark are enhanced Auto Levels Dark Automatically adjusts the brightness and contrast The least abundant colors either light or dark are enhanced 0 0 S oF at a of Of FF EE smal F at a Drag items to rearrange or right click to display a shortcut menu with additional options Auto Level Channels Automatically adjusts brightness and contrast Adjustment is performed independently on each color
246. n aren o EEEE EEA ENEO E E EEE OEE TAE TEPEE 40 SENNO TOOD POINTS srekeer etrese EEEE EIEEE CERINTE PERERIN 40 Inserting a scene selection MENU ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eeeeees 41 Creating a menu that continues playback after playing the selected scene automatic scene se lection Men s ssrrerrrereserds ert orere ey ourewes hese ae an ob Sandon sina EEEE EERE 41 Creating a menu that returns to the menu after playing the selected scene chapter manual scene selection MENUS s sussssesossesesoseseesesosrsesesorsesesersesseesesoeroeeeseso 41 Creating a scene selection Only diSC snusususuesnesnsnrsesoesesesorsesereesororseseso 42 Inserting a setup MENU ccc cece cece teen tenet eee eee n eee eeeneeenenes 42 Adding navigation buttons 44 44 00 d0ecawewsanusbeewes Sarai ceewe banenieestedewse sme dawwens 43 Creating men transitions os 040 06050e0eetesesnswueatwndetadeatwun eteeeeeaneeaneeeags 43 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Creating CUSTOM MENUS lt lt ncccneain tdt nE ONAE EENEN EANO eyes eet ese N 44 WISIN COIOP SEG lt lt 5 0544005 gae0s seen eens sana E EA E ne ace ree E EA 44 ECUUING 9 COLON Selig ei ceca ai E E A T E A N E E E 44 ADOIWINO COIOl sels saidist riria Tii REA AN OIA IN ER ANATA NE ARA 45 Changing an Object s SIZC recare seer naaa E REREN EErEE FORE 45 RESIZING ANMODE aiea EE E A A E AETA TE 45 Making all selected objects the same height or width ssssussssususnesesossesessssess 45 Cropping a
247. n the Script Properties window on page 153 Removing a statement from a script 1 Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script you want to edit Select a statement in the DVD Scripts window Press Delete or click the Delete Statement button The selected statement is removed from your script Rearranging statements in a script 1 2 Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script you want to edit Drag statements in the DVD Scripts window up or down to change their order Editing a script s statements in the Script Properties window You can use the Script Properties controls in the Properties window to adjust settings for each statement in your DVD script To edit a script s properties perform the following actions 1 2 If the window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to select the script you want to edit or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window In the DVD Scripts window click the statement you want to edit The Script Properties display in the Properties window USING SCRIPTING 153 Editing a command Commands statement type
248. n then set the number of allowed copy generations and whether you want to use CSS and Macrovision e Choose No if your project does not contain copyrighted material When No is selected you cannot set the number of allowed copy generations or use CSS or Macrovision 146 CHAPTER 12 Item Copy generations CGMS CSS Macrovision Regions Description If you indicated that your project contains copyrighted material then you can use the Copy generations drop down list to set a flag that indicates whether you want to allow your project to be copied by DVD recorders and some personal video recorders PVRs e Unlimited There is no limit on the number of copies that can be made the disc can be copied and those copies can be copied e One Single generation copies can be made the disc can be copied but those copies cannot be copied e None No copies can be made Notes You can optionally use CSS and Macrovision protection e The CGMS content generation management system protection flag may not be recognized by all PVRs or personal computers Allows you to set the CSS Content Scramble System flag on your disc e On Sets a flag that tells the disc replication facility to apply CSS digital encryption to the disc to prevent duplication e Off Sets a flag that indicates that CSS digital encryption should not be applied during replication e Off Sets a flag that tells the disc replication facility that Macrovision
249. n wee eiwbatunve deibas oN ew eweweadtaawersedneennes 89 Video EVENT Properties 0 ccc cee ee eee AnA eee ee eee RANEE DS 89 DUOS nor ot cuss syseueee sna ewns deans esaud E E E E E E E S 89 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 Adding a SUDETIC track 611 2 044 00024coutdae ter deaeu sect heehee a eRitderdeoshetieintadeewean 90 Adding cub ae LXE tiuecaruounudawrect omar mens EE OE A N 90 Creating a graphic subtitle ccc eee eee ee eee e eee e eee eeeeeees 91 Mseringagraphic SUBE rsrsrsrsrs deenienideetaeaiedesia tieoaniiie bien sin stenidiawes 91 Importing subtitles from a file 2 0 0 ccc ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeenes 92 Creating a subtitle sub file with timecode based subtitle events cc cece eee eee 92 PXDOOMUING SUDULIES Gutvok nas nacanwesuis Gaueniewaseuiamrad nae EA ENTNER 92 Creating subtitles from regions in a Vegas project ccc cece cece ee eee eee eee eeeees 93 Adjusting subtitle event timing cc ccc ccc cece cece ene e eee e eee eee ee eeeeeenenes 93 Adjusting a subtitle event s length ccc cece cece cece cece eee e eee e eens seen eeeeeaeees 94 Copying formatting across subtitle events ccc cece cece eee eee n eee eee eee eeenes 94 Setting a subtitle to display automatically 0 0 00 0 ccc ccc cece nee e eee e eee eeenes 95 Editing a subtitle events color Set 2 ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 Setting the subtitle track for timeline playback
250. n will be tinted 126 CHAPTER 11 Color Sets Color sets determine which colors are used to display subtitles You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every menu page in your project and each title in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color Use the Color Sets page to edit the color sets that will be available for the selected title and then use the Subtitle Event page to choose which color sets are used for the current subtitle For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Media Properties The Media Properties pane in the Properties window adjusts the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected media file Media Properties General Track Media End Action Remote Buttons Color Sets PES Seen Audio 1 aa Gong udio wav Video file used by the video track To edit media properties perform the following steps 1 If the window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click a media file in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the media you want to edit 3 Click a button at the top of the Properties window The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Media Properties pane General Item Description Reduce interlace flicker Select the R
251. n you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty subtitle tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding a subtitle track on page 90 Item Set video angle Auto activate Media Description Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video angle the new angle will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the angle Choose Yes or No from the drop down list to indicate whether you want the button action to be performed automatically when the button is selected e When Yes is selected the user doesn t need to press the Enter button on the remote control e When No is selected the user will select a button with the arrow buttons on the remote control and then press the Enter button to activate it The controls on the Media page determine the image and mask files used to display buttons and adjust the ap
252. na wee 35 Adding a submenu from afile ccc ccc cee cece eee enn e eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Reapplying a file s layout to MENU objects cece cece eee eee e eee eeeeenes 36 WISGRUING AGES cu nace es ocee E E EE E ETEO E E T T ET E 36 AGANG DAJO arraid eiaa EE eee aa tad E AAAA T E E AIE E EE EAA oe 36 PeO OO aaae are NEESER EEEE EEEE queens 36 Changing page order sussesussesesusesoesoeseeseesersesorsorsossersersorsersereeeseso 37 Editing menu page PFOPE ItieS 6 ccc cece cece cee cee eee eee eee eee eee ee eeeees 37 Adding E tig 8 tivt a are mbawicnbae ketene E teu bade bee eeaeee 37 Inserting a picture compilation 6666 ccc eeee eee ee eee eee e eee ee eenes 37 Inserting a MUSIC VIGEO compilation 6 ccc cece eee eee eeees 38 Inserting a single movie Title 6 ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee e eens 38 Editing TING Order sretne E EEE ste AAR wenetues E TANE E 38 KOJNI IPNI aere E E EE E E A E Mae ne E R Reed 38 Editing graphics PropertieS ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee e ee eeeees 38 inserting ANd ECitING TEXT 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeees 39 Inserting text ON a MENU OF page Lecce eee eee cette nee e eect eens eee e esses eee eneees 39 Setting a menu s title text ODject 6 ccc cee cece eee e eee ETAN i 39 FOAN TOE bnacccsapadenasecaeyarcenss ou eeeeradassoerse EE IDETE EERE TNA 39 EO TEMG paS A TE T OEE INE E A E E IEE EA ERT 39 WOVIING TO a4 atio
253. nail image 1 Click the expand button next to the Thumbnail Media heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to display the combined layers choose Composited layer Displays the path to the current mask file A thumbnail mask determines which portion of the thumbnail will be visible Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a mask file view Media Properties crop and adjust media settings or remove the current file For more information see Creating custom masks on page 97 THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 117 Item Layer Start time Style Frame Media Layer Mask Layer Start time Style 118 CHAPTER 11 Description If the current mask file uses layers you can choose to use a single layer or the combined layers as a mask for your thumbnail image 1 Click the expand button next to the Mask heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button f 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to use the combined layers as a mask choose Composited layer If you re using an animated file as a thumbnail the Start time setting determines the point at which playback will start in the animated button If you want to display a single frame from an animated file as a static image the Start time setting
254. nation file that will be displayed When your end action links to a menu choose Start or Loop Point to indicate the point from which the menu will be played For more information see Setting loop points on page 40 When your end action links to a menu you can choose the button you want to use as the default selected button in the destination menu If you choose Default the first button listed under the menu in the Project Overview window is used as the default Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which audio track will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set audio track control to change the audio track the new track will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the track When setting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty audio tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding audio tracks on page 87 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which subtitle track will be played in a destination title Choose Off to turn subtitles off or choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set subtitle trac
255. navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit From the Insert menu choose Graphic The Insert Graphic dialog is displayed Locate and select the file you want to use eo YS Click the OK button The image or video is added to your menu Editing graphics properties The Graphics Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the position size and appearance of graphical elements on a menu or compilation 38 CHAPTER 4 Media Color Sets X position 360 0 Y position 240 0 X size 144 0 Y size 85 4 Maintain aspect ratio Yes Show before loop point No To edit the graphic s properties perform the following actions 1 Select a graphic with the Selection tool or Sizing tool 2 Click the property button that you would like to edit 3 Select the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting For more information see Graphics Properties on page 113 Inserting and editing text Inserting text on a menu or page 1 From the Insert menu choose Text A text box is placed on the current menu or page 2 Type your desired text 3 Drag the text box to position it on the menu or page Setting a menu s title text object A title object is used when you apply themes to a menu The title object will also be used as the menu s title in the Project Overview window if the menu has not been renamed After renaming a menu in the Project Overview window changing the
256. nd Adjust window Show hide bottom panel Show hide side panel Show hide grid Show hide button masks Show first last page Show previous next page Recall window layout Save window layout SHORTCUTS 189 General editing Press Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift Z Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Delete Ctrl A F2 Tab CtrltHome End Ctrl Page Up Page Down Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow D Shift D Ctrl D Ctrl Shift G F8 Ctrl F8 Shift F8 Ctrl Shift F8 Inserting objects and titles Press Ctrl T Ctrl M Ctrl L Ctrl K Ctrl F Timeline window Press Up Arrow Down Arrow Home End CtrltHome End Alt tHome End Left Arrow Right Arrow Spacebar Shift Spacebar M I O L Ctrl Q Ctrl Shift Q Ctrl Alt Q 190 APPENDIX A Result Undo last action Redo last action Cut Copy Paste Delete Select All Edit selected text Move selection between objects Move object to top bottom Move object forward back Move selected objects up down by grid spacing Move selected objects right left by grid spacing Switch to next editing tool Switch to previous editing tool Selection tool Edit grid settings Enable snapping Snap to grid Snap to objects Snap to safe areas Result Insert text Insert submenu Insert picture compilation Insert music video compilation Insert media Result Zoom in out Move cursor to set in out point Move cursor to beginning end of timeline Move cursor to beginning en
257. nd adjusting video and graphicS ssssusssuesesseesesseessessessesseso 45 Displaying the Crop and Adjust window ssssesessssesssseseseesesesosoesesoreossese 45 NOTRE rrna ae A AE AA E E A E E A OA 46 Cropandadj st properties icseuan oewieew ae rier iarr Leken EEEE EEE EAE A Rabies 47 COP PING raO aas rE E E A E PAAR 48 Crop and video effects keyframes 0 0 cece ccc cece cece e eee eeeeeeneeeeeaes 48 Adding KEVIilaIMeS tavsanssageeevecdsamsieseenesconuaueentskesseeians se smineiaaeeaauveuee ds 49 Deleting KeVikameS 2n1094050400ns 0000504 a wook as E AE opened ten eonacaeasans ey 49 Navigating between keyframes ccc cece cece eee e nee e eee e ee eenn eens 49 Changing interpolation curves between keyframes cc cc ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeneeees 49 MOVING KEVTraIMeS oo s0cd4endanee46eae EE EAE EO t4eesieddawsd Senne eee EEE 49 ECIEING ClO SENGS 12 cust5500seccues tacsnicesddatenu neud ta beewadoadindadeseaseceiatieet 49 Viewing and editing Media properties 0 ccc eee eee e ence ee eeeeeeneee 50 CORONI aea TEE orpeene etwas EE E we cauaaenyne tae ek 50 WIGCO SUCAIM soc caseccateqasssoen ae enens aeons ET T E EA E R aortas eaneaenseweeds 51 AUICIO SCAN E E eee berg ouredenseeoura E A E EE 51 Opening in graphics editor ccc cece cece eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeenaes 51 Moving and arranging Objects ccc ccc cece cece nent eee e eens eeeeeeanees 51 Changing the position of an object
258. ng font and text parameters and graphics and audio information Applying themes You can apply a theme to an entire project when you start the project or you can apply themes to specific menu pages as you work You use the Themes window at the bottom of the workspace to select and apply the themes Once you apply a theme to a menu the properties of the menu immediately change to those defined in the theme Note To undo the application of a theme click the Undo button Several themes are included for you to use in your projects You can also create your own themes by editing an existing theme 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Double click a theme in the Themes window to apply it to the selected menu Note You can also apply a theme by dragging it from the Themes window to the workspace or by selecting the theme and clicking the Apply Theme button 5 Applying a theme s alignment to menu objects You can automatically align menu objects when adding media to a menu Select the Double clicking files in the Explorer reapplies theme layout check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to automatically realign objects according to the current theme when you double click media files in the Explorer When you double click a file the new file is added and the objects are realigned on the menu When the check box is clear
259. ng Files for Your Project on page 193 If you re using a supported format and still see this message use the Optimize Disc dialog to choose a specific audio format instead of the Automatic setting For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 The end action of a title is broken The link for the specified title s end action is broken This can occur when you delete items from your project For example if the end action of a title is set to link to menu two the title s end action will be broken if you delete menu two from your project 1 Navigate to the title with the broken action and click the expand button next to the Media Properties heading to expand the Media Properties controls 2 Click the expand button next to the End Action button to expand the controls 3 Choose a new setting from the Destination drop down list to resolve the broken link The estimated size of the project is larger than the default space available on media There may not be enough space available on your disc to burn your project You can use the Optimize Disc dialog to fine tune your recompression settings or use the Project Overview window to delete assets from the project The Target media size GB drop down list on the Disc Properties tab of the Project Properties dialog determines the amount of space the application uses to calculate the space available on the disc For more information see Disc properties on page 143
260. ng about positional and grid themes ccc cece cece e cence eee eeeeeeeeees 110 Working with positional themes ccc cece cece cece ee ee eee eee eee e eee eeeeeeenes 110 Working with grid themes ccc cece cece e eee LEENE RAKNES ES EE EOLA E 111 Modifying grid layout properties 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee e nent eee e ene eeeees 111 The Properties WINdOW tiri ccc ccc cece eee cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeneeees 113 Graphics Properties iss arose 64s ca eae nE hes E be ae dea pana Gee teers 113 TOS ON AU ONS E E E EEE nate ceases va E ae E TEE EOE 114 WCC ais EEE dba pies teense EEE E eeae ie nets mete ea eee ereadaee rien eyes 114 COMOl SONS shasta codec ae E Vets sadedes TIE ieee ain geek bad sa suis ee rs eneie aes 114 PUTON POPE O Somnia E E E tener op E A E E E E Genie eine eta ae 115 Tan ON aE N A N EE E 115 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS WIEOIE as EE E none eben E one esa cae eet ete ci E eons eb ta nacre 117 eLa a al 5440044544 ceas T yee ueeuieeus onsen noes revenue ene aeeutus E 119 INAVIGGIION gc eqeceeve cus A E A sae ewes one ees sees euseds ewe E ieeans eee waeees 120 CONON SOUS vee care he ee saree hee awa E A ead runes E oe Gene eau ewee a eae e es 120 BUNTON REGION gcc cs eavad tittat ern aoa e eer EEEE eae Rea Ree eee eaee 120 Menu Page PIODCIIICS c caradnesedeesaeeneae seins lt ean ed wat anon baeatemoaneceat ducer 121 GENGlal casusetwac E E E E E E E E AE E EE 121 Background Medidsers
261. ng object Order ccc ccc cece eee rini ni Oaa h aeaaea 59 Creating a Music Video Compilation ccc ccc cece eennees 61 Adding a music video compilation to a M NU 6 cece eee eee eee eeeeeees 61 FOGG adig seers rr tinntev cen wyatownce seh pabolenaaoieaenns ae aad EE tnd enacee 62 Replacing an audio Mess iasdccsreancsecensstvsdadveeeauess evessiaacsdotusageaaasasds 62 Adding and editing images or VIdGGOS cece e eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeenes 62 inserting IMAGES OF VIGEOS 1 cee eee eee eee teen AREN 62 Replacing an iMage OF VIGGO sssri renerrien are ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eeeeeeees 63 Setting image stretching or scaling cece ccc ccc cece cece e ee eeees 63 sigectd ple eclalla s s E eE ee ee nh re ee er ee eet eer ee ee 63 Adjusting brightness and contrast or editing the image cc cece cent eee e eens 63 Adding and editing text ccc ccc cece eee ee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 63 PAGING EXE csiruteusecuncesc ones ete E coud itasntsncuneneasse AES A 63 POMMalL INO NeXe ETEEN ed ours aoe ened cary EE E E E TAE 64 EONO TERE aae taki EET ee tienda esihental seadout iad eee 64 WO VMN COXE occhacceccy en ota een a g reat wy ata E ain eer ea ea see Ge eae ene nea es 64 DENOTING TEXT cine pass EE ya suews diadyiepensdencsarcawe sewers E 64 Setting thumbnail GISDIAN a 05sduneecnanges canes AETERNE na beaengescheresseeces pwaws 64 Music video compilation properties ccc ccc ccc
262. ng timeline playback for 89 Web accessing help 12 downloading media from 27 Window Docking Area F11 17 Backgrounds 18 Buttons 18 Compilation 19 DVD Scripts 23 Explorer 17 Playlists 22 Properties 20 Themes 17 Timeline 21 INDEX vii window layouts adding to submenu 180 deleting from computer 180 loading 180 removing from submenu 180 saving 179 workspace 15 viii INDEX
263. ngth of zero to a disc Adjust the video s Set In and Set Out points as necessary The video will be recompressed Video in your project is not in the proper format and will be recompressed during disc preparation For more information about the audio formats that DVD Architect Pro software can support without recompression see Rendering Files for Your Project on page 193 If you re using a supported format and still see this message use the Optimize Disc dialog to choose a specific video format instead of the Automatic setting For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 There are more than X slides in compilation Each title on your DVD can have no more than 99 chapter markers Each title on your Blu ray Disc can have no more than 255 chapter markers If your compilation contains additional pictures or songs videos beyond these limits you can still burn your project but chapter markers will be created only for the first 99 or 255 items Navigate to the picture or music video compilation and delete items as necessary There are no slides in compilation A picture or music video compilation must have at least one picture or song video Navigate to the picture or music video compilation and add pictures or songs videos as necessary There may not be enough space in the temporary files folder for preparing the disc There may not be enough space in your temporary files folder to prepare your project You can contin
264. nguage Selection Command if GPRMO 25966 then Link page English button Default if GPRMO 25971 then Link page Spanish button Default Timeline Item x D Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts Insert DVD Script Delete DVD Script Insert Statement Append Statement Delete Statement Toggle Breakpoint DVD scripts list Script statement list Description Click to add a new DVD script to your project For more information see Creating a script on page 152 Click to remove the current script from your project Click to add a statement to your script The Script Properties information is displayed in the Properties window allowing you to choose your statement type and construct your statement Click to add a statement to the end of your script The Script Properties information is displayed allowing you to choose your statement type and construct your statement Click to remove the selected statement s from your script Click to insert a breakpoint to the currently selected command s or label s in the script Choose an existing script from the drop down list to specify the script you want to display Lists the statements in the script You can drag statements within this area to rearrange them You can use the Script Properties controls to set the statement type commands and conditions Note Breakpoints are useful for debugging scripts In the preview mode brea
265. ny red channel component uses the color set s fill color color 1 a pixel containing any green channel component uses the color set s anti alias color color 2 a pixel containing any blue component uses the color set s outline background color color 3 and a completely black pixel uses the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Navigation The controls on the Navigation page determine which button is selected when you use the Up Down Left and Right buttons on your DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control Item Description Left Select the box and choose a command from the menu to determine which button is Right selected when you press the corresponding button on your remote control Up Choose Auto if you want the software to automatically determine navigation based on button layout Down Tip You can also use the navigation tool to view and edit button navigation For more information see The Navigation tool on page 58 Color Sets Color sets determine which colors are used to indicate selected activated and inactive buttons on your menu page You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every menu page in your project and each menu page in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color Use the Color Sets page
266. o Page 1 1 Link Alternate Audio Page 1 2 Link Options Chapters Page 1 3 Link Alternate Audio Page 1 G0 4 Link SongVideo 1 Scene Chapter Toggle Display of End Actions Displays or dhe hides end actions Set Disc Start Sets the selected menu or title as x the disc start item 14 CHAPTER 2 Insert Object Show or hides the Insert Object drop down list Delete Object Deletes the selected title or menu Workspace Alt 0 The workspace is the portion of the DVD Architect Pro window where you design your project The workspace represents the currently selected menu or object To set input focus to the workspace for keyboard editing choose Focus to Workspace from the View menu Across the top of the workspace there is a toolbar that helps you navigate through your project and zoom in out of the DVD Architect Pro workspace H Band Photos Qauto Address bar Address bar With a drop down menu this allows you to navigate through the menus and titles of the parent folder Back to Parent Allows you to navigate back to the parent folder of your project Tip You can also use the Backspace key Previous Page Allows you to navigate back to the previous page in your project Tip You can also use the Page Up key Oo Next Page Allows you to navigate to the next page in your project Tip You can also use the Page Down key auto Zoom Settings Click the down arrow next to the button
267. o compilation is accessed Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects Menu length A menu s length determines how much time is available for animated menu objects For example if your menu length is 30 seconds an animated button could display up to 30 seconds of video Choose a setting from the Menu length drop down list e When Auto calculate is selected the software will determine the menu length based on the background audio video and button animations e When Specify is selected you can type a number in the Length box or click the down arrow button to display a slider you can use to match the length of the background video if one exists Note f you type a value in the Length box that is longer than the background video the background video will end and any animated thumbnails will continue to play until the end of the menu If you want the menu to loop smoothly when your menu duration is longer than the video create a new background video that matches the desired menu length Length If you chose Specify from the Menu length drop down list select the box and type a number in the box or click the down arrow button to display a slider you can drag to set the length of the menu THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 121 Item Loop point Selected button colors Activated button colors Inactive button colors Background Media Description Choose a setting from the drop down list or drag the slid
268. o choose an existing image 4 Click the Next button 5 If you selected the Current project radio button in step 3 DVD Architect Pro displays a list of messages about your project and estimates the project s final size on the Review Message List page a Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Message Type Description Informational Produces a valid disc and does not require any action Warning Produces a valid disc and does not require any action t Error Produces an invalid disc and must be resolved b Click the Optimize button to display the Optimize Disc dialog where you can make changes to individual media files and project settings often allowing you to resolve warnings or errors For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 6 Click the Next button 7 Select the burn parameters a b C d g In the Volume name box type the name of your disc From the Device drop down list choose your Blu ray Disc burner In the Speed drop down list choose your burning speed Select the Advanced button to display the Advanced Burn Parameters dialog The Drive Info tab lists information about the drive to which the disc will be burned The Media Info tab lists information about the type of media currently in your burner Click OK to return to the Select Burn Parameters page If you re using a RE disc you can select one of the Erase mode radio buttons to erase the disc before burn
269. o left edge of object that has focus Align Top Aligns all selected objects to the top edge of the object that has focus Align Horizontal Center Aligns all selected objects to the horizontal center of the object that has focus jx Align Vertical Center Aligns all selected objects to the vertical center of the object that has focus Text bar Alt 2 Align Right Aligns all selected objects to the right edge of the object that has focus Align Bottom Aligns all selected objects to the bottom edge of the object that has focus Make Same Width Makes all selected objects the same width as the object that has focus Make Same Height Makes all selected objects the same height as the object that has focus Space Across Adjusts the selected objects so an equal amount of horizontal space exists between the objects Space Down Adjusts the selected objects so an equal amount of vertical space exists between the objects Horizontal Centering Aligns selected objects to the horizontal center of the screen Vertical Centering Aligns selected objects to the vertical center of the screen The text bar allows you to edit various properties for text objects you select in the workspace To toggle the display of the text bar choose Text Bar from the View menu aia Font Allows you to choose the typeface that will be used for text 220 Font Size Allows you to choose the size in points of the typeface that will be us
270. o locate image files Double click on a file to add it to the bottom of the list in the Compilation window CREATING A PICTURE COMPILATION 67 e From the Insert menu choose Slide The Insert Slide dialog is displayed Select a file and click the Open button The image is inserted above the currently selected slide in the list e From the Insert menu choose Empty Slide An empty slide is inserted above the currently selected slide in the list Note f you want the image file name automatically inserted on each slide choose Auto Insert Slide Text from the Options menu Otherwise you can manually add the text to each slide For more information see Adding and editing text on page 71 Replacing an image There are several ways to replace a slide image e Select a slide in the Compilation window From the Edit menu choose Slide Image and then choose Set The Set Image dialog is displayed Select a new image and click the Open button The image is replaced with your new selection e Right click a slide in the list and choose Set Image from the shortcut menu The Set Image dialog is displayed Select a new image and click the Open button The image is replaced with your new selection e Drag a file from the Explorer window onto an existing slide in the compilation The image is replaced with the dragged file e On the Picture Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button Click Image click the down arrow button and choose Replac
271. ofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Sony Creative Software Inc 8215 Greenway Blvd Suite 400 Middleton WI 53562 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Sony Creative Software Inc in any way All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site located at http www sonycreativesoftware com The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without
272. oject perform the following procedure 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu from which you want to link to the script 2 From the Insert menu choose Script A button is added to the menu as a link to the script Tip Click the Insert Object button lt in the Project Overview window and choose DVD Script 3 Use the DVD Scripts window to rearrange add or delete statements in the script 152 CHAPTER 13 Inserting a statement in a script 1 m Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script you want to edit In the DVD Scripts window click the line where you want to insert a statement Click the Insert Statement button 4 The new statement is inserted above the selected line Edit your statement in the Script Properties window For more information see Editing a script s statements in the Script Properties window on page 153 Appending a statement to a script 1 Double click a DVD script in the Project Overview window or choose a script from the drop down list at the top of the DVD Scripts window to open the script you want to edit Click the Append Statement button 4 The new statement is appended to the end of your script Edit your statement in the Script Properties window For more information see Editing a script s statements i
273. older in the Project Overview window Dragging a file to the root folder adds the media to your project without creating a button on a menu Set the transition media s end action to link to the menu or title that you want to display after the transition Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit Select a button eo Set the button action to play the transition media When a user activates the button the button plays the transition media and the transition media s end action displays the CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 43 target menu or title 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each button on the menu You can create multiple copies of your transition media at the root of the Project Overview window and specify a different menu as an end action for each instance The transition media will only be saved to the disc once Note Multiple titles or media files that use the same video audio and subtitle streams will only be saved once on the disc For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 Creating custom menus For the ultimate control over the appearance of your menus you can create custom menus using your favorite graphics application For more information see Creating custom menus and buttons using layered graphics on page 102 Using color sets Each menu page or title in your project can have up to four color sets with four colors each Eac
274. ollowing this table To change the text color when using the color channel option In the Graphics Properties pane select Color Sets Click the expand button l next to any of the listed color sets Choose the color you want to edit For more information see Editing a color set on page 44 Color Set Mode Corresponding Color 1 fill color Red 2 anti alias color Green 3 outline background color Blue 4 transparent color Transparent Inserting a graphic subtitle Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible Click the Insert Track button 527 in the Timeline window and choose Insert Subtitle Track An empty subtitle track is added to the timeline above the video track Click to position the cursor in the timeline where you want to add a subtitle text event From the Insert menu choose Graphic to open the Insert Graphic dialog In the Insert Graphic dialog browse to the psd file or other graphic file and select Open to insert the subtitle graphic into the workspace Right click the graphic in the workspace and choose Make Graphic Actual Size from the shortcut menu Click the Media button in the Graphics Properties pane and choose a setting from the Highlight mapping menu to indicate how to use the colors in the graphic For more information see Creating a
275. om animation throughout the compilation Next click the landscape image to select it and remove the other images from the selection You can now use the Generate Slideshow Animation dialog to set up panning animation for that image 3 Click the Generate Slideshow Animation button amp in the Compilation window The Generate Slideshow Animation dialog is displayed 4 Select the Animation box click the down arrow button and choose the type of animation you want to create Setting Description Pan only Crops the image and moves the crop rectangle across the picture to create the appearance of your still images moving across the screen You can choose the direction and speed of the motion Zoom only Crops the image and changes the size of the crop rectangle over time to zoom in or out You can choose whether you want to zoom in out or both and set the maximum zoom level 68 CHAPTER 6 9 Setting Description Pan or zoom Panning or zooming is applied to each picture Pan and zoom Panning and zooming are applied to each picture If you want to crop the image before applying animation select the Edge crop box click the down arrow button and drag the slider to set the percentage you want to offset the crop rectangle from the original image size If you selected Pan only Pan or zoom or Pan and zoom in step 4 use the Panning controls to fine tune the pan animation that will be applied to your images Contro
276. om the Speed drop down list Note The Speed drop down list is not available if you cleared the Use legacy disc drivers check box on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog Choose an erase mode e Choose the Quick radio button to erase only the disc s table of contents e Choose the Full radio button to erase all data from the disc Click the OK button to start erasing PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 177 178 CHAPTER 16 Chapter 17 Customizing DVD Architect Pro Software You can customize DVD Architect Pro software to suit your project needs and working preferences In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize the appearance of DVD Architect Pro software and set the application s preferences Changing grid settings The workspace s grid allows you to arrange and align objects on your menus more precisely You can also customize the grid s properties such as color size or position To view or change grid settings choose Grid Settings from the Options menu The Grid Settings dialog is displayed The items on this dialog are explained below Tip f you will use the same grid settings on most projects select the Start all new projects with these settings check box at the bottom of the Grid Settings dialog Setting Description Width Sets the width of grid squares Height Sets the height of grid squares Y offset Sets the vertical center offset for the placement of t
277. ontrols below the Video defaults row to adjust the settings The default video settings determine the following information about your project e Whether a disc is NTSC or PAL You cannot use both NTSC and PAL content on the same disc DVD projects only e The default frame size and aspect ratio for media that will be recompressed You can use the Optimize Disc dialog to choose distinct recompression settings for each media file For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 e The frame size and aspect ratio of all menus All menus must use the same aspect ratio and resolution If you re creating a DVD project the video format is always MPEG 2 If you re creating a Blu ray Disc project you can choose whether you want to use MPEG 2 or AVC video Select the control click the down arrow button and drag the slider to adjust the size of your project 9 8 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for DVD players e 28 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for Blu ray Disc projects burned to DVD media e 48 Mbps is the maximum bit rate for Blu ray Disc projects burned to Blu ray media Increasing the bit rate can improve quality but you can fit less media on the disc Decreasing the bit rate can allow you to fit more video on the disc but quality will be decreased Select the control click the down arrow button and choose a setting to indicate whether you want to create a standard aspect 4 3 or widescreen 16 9 project
278. or chapter markers Chapter markers must be one second apart If a picture or song video duration is less than one second chapter markers cannot be created If your item is a picture navigate to the picture compilation and adjust your picture duration For more information see Setting display duration from the Picture Compilation Properties window on page 70 If your item is a song or video perform one of the following actions e Navigate to the music video compilation and change the song or video For more information see Replacing an audio file on page 62 or Replacing an image or video on page 63 e Use an audio or video editing application to adjust the duration of your media file The media file is automatically updated in DVD Architect Pro TROUBLESHOOTING 207 Region coding is not currently supported on Blu ray Disc Region coding is not currently supported in Blu ray Disc projects The region codes you specified in Project Properties will be ignored and your Blu ray Disc will be accessible in all regions You can change your region code selections by clicking the Regions button in the Project Properties dialog clicking in the All regions box and choosing Yes from the drop down list The audio will be recompressed Audio in your project is not in the proper format and will be recompressed during disc preparation For more information about the audio formats that DVD Architect Pro can support without recompression see Renderi
279. or moving arranging and aligning objects on your menus manually or automatically Snapping features give you more precise control over the movement and alignment of your objects CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 51 Changing the position of an object 1 Select a button graphic or text box with the Selection tool 2 Onthe Menu Page Properties pane of the Properties window click General 3 Dragan object in the workspace or type values in the X position and Y position boxes to set the object s center point The X and Y coordinates are based on the frame size of your project For example if you re creating an NTSC project with a frame size of 720x480 0 0 is the top left corner of the frame and 720 480 is the lower right corner Tips Hold Shift while dragging to defeat horizontal snapping Hold Ctrl while dragging to defeat vertical snapping Hold Alt while dragging to constrain to horizontal or vertical motion Transformation keyframes Transformation keyframes allow you to change the size and position of a graphic over time creating an animated effect For example you could use this feature to make a menu s button appear to move or to fly in from offscreen or you could hide a menu s button until playback reaches the loop point Transformation keyframes are inserted and displayed in the timeline below your video track and the keyframe size and position changes can be edited in the Properties window and in the workspace You
280. or set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color For more information see Using color sets on page 44 138 CHAPTER 11 Playlist Properties The Playlist Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust settings for each item in a playlist specify the playback order or to set the end action for the selected playlist Playlist Properties To 1 2 3 4 General Playlist Item Command Destination Most recent menu Destination item Start Destination button M A Set audio track No change Set subtitle track No change Set video angle No change edit the playlist s properties perform the following steps Double click a playlist in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the playlist you want to edit or choose a playlist from the drop down list at the top of the Playlists window Select the playlist item that you would like to edit Click the General End Action or Playlist Item button Select the specific control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Playlist Properties pane General Item Description Play mode Determines the order of play for items in your playlist e Sequential Plays the items in the order you selected in your playlist e Random Plays the items in your playlist in a random order Infinite I
281. ou re using layered psd files you can choose which layer you want to use as the frame or mask image Click the button to expand the Thumbnail Media or Mask heading and choose the layer you want to use from the Layer drop down list or choose Composited layer to use the mixed layers In the following example the white portion of the mask image represents the portion of the thumbnail image that will be visible in the menu Thumbnail Thumbnail Mask Masked Thumbnail You can create your own masks using the image editing application of your choice Create the mask as an image the same size as your thumbnail image or as a layer in the thumbnail image The masked area can be any shape and you can use any supported media file format as a mask Tip You can use gradients to feather the edges of a masked image Sample Description When an image that does not support transparency such as BMP or JPG is used as a mask any pixel with a red value of 255 is transparent in the mask In this example the white area represents the portion of the thumbnail that will be visible When an image that supports transparency such as PNG or PSD is used as a mask transparent portions of the mask image represent portions of the thumbnail image that will be visible 98 CHAPTER 10 Frame masks A frame mask limits the portion of a thumbnail frame image that will be visible around a button Themes can apply frame masks automatically or you can create yo
282. pearance of the images You can use still images or video files as thumbnails If you use a video file you can choose to display a static image or you can animate the button by playing the video Item Button style Thumbnail Media Layer Mask Description Select the box click the down arrow button and choose a command from the drop down list to determine how the button is displayed on your menu e Text only The button is displayed as a text only link e Image only The button is displayed as a graphical button only e Text and image The button is displayed as a graphical button with a text label Displays the path to the current thumbnail file Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view Media Properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file open the file in your selected graphics editor or explore the file s containing folder on your drive Tips To change a file quickly drag a file from the Explorer window to the Thumbnail Media box e Click to position the cursor on a specific frame in the Timeline window right click the title s icon in the Project Overview window and choose Set Thumbnail from View from the shortcut menu to set the button s thumbnail to a specific frame in the source media file If the current thumbnail file uses layers you can choose to display a single layer or the combined layers for your thumb
283. pen the thm file in a program such as WinZip and extract the files to a working folder Edit the theme s files as necessary e You must change the lt NAME gt tag in the lt THEME INFORMATION gt section to a unique name for the theme Otherwise your theme will not be detected e Change the lt AUTHOR gt lt COPYRIGHT gt and lt ABOUT gt tags as well with your own information e The default xml file contains all information about the layout including button positioning spacing font text graphics and audio information Do not rename this file Check all tags and references in this file prior to saving because any errors or mistakes will cause your theme to go undetected e The media files in the theme are used for button and menu graphics backgrounds and audio You can use any file format that DVD Architect Pro software supports including bmp png jpg gif avi and wav Resave the zip file renaming it to a thm file in the themes subfolder below the program folder The new theme will be detected the next time you start the program and displayed in the Themes tab Warning f there are any mistakes or missing files referenced in the default xml file the theme will not load USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 109 Exporting menu as a theme Have you created a menu that you would like to use over and over but don t have time to create it time and time again If your answer is yes then we have a solution for you
284. perties controls in the Properties window to edit the button image used and the button action For more information see Button Properties on page 115 5 When you add a button to a video a button region is created in the Timeline window This button region indicates how long the button will be visible in your project You can insert buttons on video markers in the Timeline window so you can easily adjust the length of your button regions For more information see Inserting buttons on video markers on page 76 Note Deleting all buttons in a button region will eliminate the entire button region 6 Toadd another button to a video repeat steps 2 5 as needed When you have multiple buttons in your video you can edit the button order Editing button order for a video From the Edit menu choose Button Order to display the Button Order dialog where you can set the order for buttons on the video title The 1 button is the default selected button when you navigate to a menu or video title unless you ve used the Destination Button control on the Action or End Action page of the Properties window to specify a different destination button For information about editing buttons for menus see Editing button order fora menu on page 54 When you use buttons on video the button order determines which button is selected by default and when playback moves across button regions For example imagine you have three buttons each in three button regions
285. perties pane THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 113 Transformations Item Description X position Edit the X position and Y position values to change the center of the selected Y position graphic s position These coordinates are based on the frame size of your project For example if you re creating an NTSC project with a frame size of 720x480 0 0 is the top left corner of the frame and 720 480 is the lower right corner Perform any of the following to change the setting e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value e Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value X size Edit the X size and Y size values to change the size of the selected graphic Y size Perform any of the following to change the setting e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value e Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value Maintain aspect ratio Select the Maintain aspect ratio box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the drop down list if you do not want an image to be stretched when you change the height or width Show before loop point Specifies whether the selected item is displayed before the menu s specified loop point For more information see Setting loop points on page 40 Media The controls on the Media page d
286. perties window to adjust which color set is used to draw subtitle text You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every title in your project and each title in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color For more information see Using color sets on page 44 134 CHAPTER 11 Music Video Compilation Properties The Music Video Compilation Properties pane in the Properties window allows you to adjust the end actions and remote control button behavior for the selected music or video compilation Music Video Compilation Properties General End Action Remote Buttons Slide Color Sets o educe interlace flicker Start Script None Reduce interlace flicker When enabled reduces flicker caused by interlacing video frames To edit the music or video compilation s properties perform the following steps 1 If the window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click a music or video compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the compilation you want to edit 3 Click a button at the top of the Properties window The following sections describe the controls under each heading in the Music Video Compilation Properties pane General Item Description Reduce interlace flicker Select the Reduce in
287. pilations 71 text subtitles 90 Text toolbar Alt 2 16 themes applying 108 applying alignment to menu objects 108 automatically aligning objects 55 creating custom 108 deleting 108 exporting menus as 110 112 Themes window 17 thumbnail masks 98 thumbnail size in Compilation window 64 72 timeline playback setting audio track 88 setting subtitle track 95 setting video track 89 Timeline window 21 timeline navigating with multimedia controllers 200 timing of subtitle events 93 Title number 157 Title program chain number 157 title safe area customizing 185 Snapping to 56 W titles transitions 43 toolbars customizing 181 182 Editing toolbar 16 Main toolbar 14 Text toolbar 16 tracks adding audio 87 adding subtitle 90 replacing 62 replacing audio 88 setting for timeline playback 88 setting subtitle for timeline playback 95 Transform bar 52 transformation keyframes 52 transitions between menus or titles 43 Use legacy disc drivers 187 video adjusting recompression 30 linking a series 83 previewing on secondary Windows display 165 replacing in music video compilations 63 viewing on broadcast monitor 165 Video angle number 157 video event properties 89 Video preview single monitor full screen 165 video recompression adjusting settings 30 Video title set VTS number 157 video tracks adding 88 adding video to 89 changing colors 89 event properties 89 setti
288. player is compatible with the disc The region codes and the corresponding SPRM codes are below Region code Region code description SPRM20value 1 North America 1 2 Japan Europe Middle East South Africa and Greenland 2 3 Southeast Asia and Hong Kong 4 4 Australia New Zealand Mexico South America Central 8 America the Pacific Islands and the Caribbean 5 Northwest Asia including Korea and North Africa 16 6 China 32 7 Reserved N A 8 Airplanes In flight entertainment 128 USING SCRIPTING 159 160 CHAPTER 13 Chapter 14 Working with Stereoscopic 3D Media on Blu ray Disc When creating a Blu ray Disc project you can use Vegas Pro to render stereoscopic video for your project Important The following features are not available for 3D titles e Buttons on video Crop and adjust The Recompress control in the Optimize Disc dialog The Reduce interlace flicker control on the Media Properties pane 1 Shoot your 3D video with a 3D camera 2 Import your 3D video into a stereoscopic 3D Vegas Pro project 3 Render your clip using the Sony AVC MVC plug in with one of the following templates e MVC 1280x720 60p 25 Mbps video stream e MVC 1280x720 50p 25 Mbps video stream e MVC 1920x1080 24p 25 Mbps video stream Rendering using these templates creates BD compliant video streams that will be burned to disc with no recompression Two files will be created when you render your stereoscopic 3D video The base
289. present links that have been manually set sticky Fingers presents 58 CHAPTER 4 Drag the navigation anchors to edit a button s navigation Refer to the following tips for additional information on button navigation If Then You want the application to automatically Right click a navigation anchor and choose Autolink from the shortcut menu or assign navigation based on the button double click the anchor layout Note This setting only affects the navigation anchor that you click You want to link a button to the current Right click a navigation anchor and choose Link to Self from the shortcut menu page Setting object order Object order specifies the layering of objects on your menu Objects with lower numbers are located toward the bottom The larger the number the closer the object is to the front Viewing object order To view the numbers assigned to each object in the current menu choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Object Order from the submenu Changing object order Click the object you want to move forward or backward in the layer From the Edit menu choose Object Order and then choose the appropriate layering command from the submenu e Move to Top Moves the selected object to the top layer e Move to Bottom Moves the selected object to the bottom layer e Move Forward Moves the selected object forward one layer e Move Back Moves the selected object back one layer CR
290. r menu as described in Creating custom menus and buttons using single layer graphics on page 106 you ll have a menu background image file that looks similar to the following image 2 Using the menu background that you created create a new layer or file for your highlight mask In the following example black sections indicate the areas we want to highlight A A 3 Apply the mask to your menu a Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu that you want edit Click the Background Media button at the top of the Menu Page Properties pane Select the Highlight mask box click the down arrow button and choose Replace from the menu Browse to the file you want to use oan g If the mask is contained in a layer within the mask file click the expand button to the left of the Highlight mask box to expand the controls Select the Layer box click the down arrow button and choose the layer you want to use 100 CHAPTER 10 Choose a setting from the Highlight mask mapping control to indicate how transparency is determined from the mask For the sample mask image we created in step 2 we ll use the Transparency setting The mapping mode you use depends on your specific highlight mask image Mapping Mode Description Transparency Maps the alpha channel of the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activat
291. re compilations 71 Editing toolbar 16 empty slides inserting 70 end actions media files 128 menus 124 music video compilations 135 picture compilations 132 playlists 139 erasing discs 177 Explorer window overview 17 views 17 exporting menus as themes 110 112 exporting subtitles 92 external monitors IEEE 1394 165 overview 164 secondary Windows displays 165 TV 165 Fast forward rewind amount 186 files See media files first play media See introduction media formatting text in menus 39 in music video compilations 64 in picture compilations 71 frame masks 99 Free space display type 187 full screen preview on single monitor 165 General preferences 182 General Purpose Register Memories GPRMs 157 generating slideshow animation 68 GotoLabel command type 154 GPRMs 157 graphics inserting in menus 38 inserting in picture compilations 72 opening in graphics editor 51 183 Graphics Properties 113 grid customizing 179 Snapping to 56 grid layout properties 111 help 12 highlight masks applying to menus 123 creating 100 highlighting buttons 119 Icon color saturation 186 Icon color tint 186 IEEE 1394 DV capture cards 165 l frames snapping markers to 77 Image Mastering API 187 images adding to picture compilations 67 adjusting brightness and contrast in music video compilations 63 adjusting brightness and contrast in picture compilations 70 editing in music video compilation
292. re information see Creating a Single Movie Disc or Title on page 75 3 Choose a setting from the Disc format drop down list to determine the final disc format to which your project will be output DVD or Blu ray Disc 4 Choose a setting from the Project video format drop down list The video format determines the following information about your project e Whether a disc is NTSC or PAL You cannot use both NTSC and PAL content on the same disc e The default frame size and aspect ratio for media that will be recompressed You can use the Optimize Disc dialog to choose distinct recompression settings for each media file For more information see Adjusting video recompression settings on page 30 e The frame size and aspect ratio of all menus All menus must use the same aspect ratio and resolution 5 Choose a setting from the Project audio format drop down list to determine the format that will be used for audio that will be recompressed You select a title and use the Audio settings in the Optimize Disc dialog to choose distinct recompression settings for each media file For more information see Adjusting audio recompression settings on page 31 6 Select the Start all new projects with these settings check box if you want to use the current settings every time you create a new project Note The project settings you chose in the New Project dialog can be changed at any time while you are working on a project with the exception of the
293. re information see Button Properties on page 115 On the Transformations page in the Button Properties pane click the Show before loop point box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu so you can animate the button before the loop point Make the button transparent at the beginning of the menu a Right click the button in the workspace and choose Crop and Adjust from the shortcut menu The Crop and Adjust dialog is displayed For more information see Displaying the Crop and Adjust window on page 45 b Click to position the cursor at the beginning of the timeline in the keyframe controller Click the Insert Keyframe button a Click the Alpha box in the Crop and Adjust Properties box and click the down arrow button to display a slider CREATING A SINGLE MOVIE DISC OR TITLE 81 e Drag the Alpha slider to the left to make the button transparent 6 Make the button opaque at the menu s loop point a Inthe Timeline window click the menu s loop point marker The cursor in the Crop and Adjust Keyframe Controller is updated to match this position b Inthe Crop and Adjust window click the Insert Keyframe button c Click the Alpha box in the Crop and Adjust Properties box and click the down arrow button to display a slider d Drag the Alpha slider to the right to make the button opaque During playback your button is not visible when the menu starts and it fades in gradually until the men
294. retched to fill the screen This may cause distortion in the image Rotating an image 1 Select a song in the Compilation window 2 Click the Rotate counterclockwise 4 or Rotate clockwise 42 button Adjusting brightness and contrast or editing the image 1 Double click a music video compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the music video compilation that you want to edit 2 Select an item in the Compilation window 3 Use the buttons at the top of the Compilation window to adjust the appearance For more information see Compilation window Alt 7 on page 19 On the Music Video Compilation Properties pane click the Slide button Select Video click the down arrow button and choose Crop and Adjust to display the Crop and Adjust dialog or Open in Graphics Editor to edit the image in an external image editor from the menu For more information see Cropping and adjusting video and graphics on page 45 Adding and editing text Adding text You can add text to be displayed while each song is playing Note f you want the song name automatically inserted for each song choose Auto Insert Track Title from the Options menu 1 Select a song in the Compilation window 2 From the Insert menu choose Text A text box is added to the workspace 3 Type your text in the text box CREATING A MUSIC VIDEO COMPILATION 63 Formatting text 1 Select a song in the Compilation window
295. ririrdrerris omie a aa a aaa a 122 EROA GONS aaraa E E T E E A E EN EA A 124 Remote BUONE facay oon cone pone hneo aie TE ENEEIER EIEEE aha 124 COlON SCs eae EE ER E A A E E 125 SURUTIE PIODENIGS peririerrertnrapure d urniku neee ereer A A EEE eet este kos 126 TOSOINA ONS eere ELE AEE EEE EREE EEE EEEE EREA 126 SUDEMEEVENE aeaa enS EE A AE AE EAE ET EEE EEEN ESE 126 COF OS es reste EEEE A EET EE ARE EEEE EE A EEE a 127 Med PrODEN O ereere EEEE EE E EE EE EEEE EENT 127 GENEE arae a A AEA E E E A E E EA A A A 127 WEACKIMICGIA E E E E AE E AEE E A T E EEN 128 ENGHACHOM wattiadueeawee 4onaun EEEE E E EE E E EEA 128 Pomot BUNONS 22ccxectadwees ub eaten ae osha Pee ate AEE ENAT ANNAA ANA VAEA 129 CONOR AE E PE E E EEEE E E E Pee os E a oe ee eo 130 Picture Compilation Properties cece cece eee eee e eee cece eeeeeeeeeenes 131 GENIAL EE EEE EE EE ieee ee aan bas eae aedeateues TET 131 TRACK VICOIA aa cceuteewa neuen peewee e oie Oba ane ceo A EEE E we eee eee 131 BIG ACUON gue cadre ek ondde 6a tae eaten en aioe aaa ened lan nd aed ead a 132 GMM OLCSUINONS ww roe neat oere apae oe gcse ean NEEE EEES he een Gas pauauenaes 133 DIOS nue at eae eeat whan san ea sous ns onea aden ows etd E es 134 COION SOUS ice a oo es ec anos he eddies Ha one E E E AE ae eae eeaee eee tonsa 134 Music Video Compilation Properties ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeeeneees 135 GEETA s2sec0sentsesncceanwsosncsecaieesneosane sedans aenaar aeons E A 135 ENO ACU
296. riter c Perform one of the following actions If Then You chose your DVD burner In the Speed drop down list choose your burning speed You chose ISO Image Writer In the File name field click the Browse button to browse to the location where you would like to save the file d Select the Advanced button to display the Advanced Burn Parameters dialog The Drive Info tab lists information about the drive to which the disc will be burned The Media Info tab lists information about the type of media currently in your burner The Labels tab has information about the volume name volume set name and application ID which you can adjust if necessary Click OK to return to the Select Burn Parameters page e If you re using a RW disc you can select one of the Erase mode radio buttons to erase the disc before burning Option Description Do not erase Does not erase the contents of the disc Quick erase Erases only the table of contents Full erase Erases all data from the disc f Select the Burn disc radio button if you want to burn your project or select the Test only button to perform a test burn without activating your burner s laser Note Test burns are not available with single or dual layer discs using R RW media or if you cleared the Use legacy disc drivers check box on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog g Select the Eject disc when done check box so the DVD drive will open when the burn is completed Click th
297. rkers Used as navigation points for a video file Ignored when creating scene selection menus using the Insert gt Scene Selection command Buttons on video markers Used to add interactivity to your project These markers are ignored by the remote control s previous next chapter buttons Mask A mask determines which portion of an image will be visible Masks in DVD Architect Pro software use the value of the red channel to determine transparency 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque In the following example the black portions of the mask image have a red value of 0 black R 0 G 0 and B 0 and will cause the corresponding portions of the thumbnail image to be transparent The white portions of the mask have a red value of 255 white R 255 G 255 and B 255 and will cause the corresponding portions of the thumbnail to be opaque Intermediate red values are partially transparent pore p Thumbnail Mask Button In the following example the black portions of the thumbnail mask make the corresponding portions of the thumbnail transparent so only a circular portion of the thumbnail is visible The black portions of the frame mask make the corresponding portions of the frame image transparent so only the ring is visible ee aa O i Thumbnail Thumbnail Frame Frame Button Mask Mask Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded
298. roject Video tracks You can add multiple video tracks to videos to add support for multiple viewing angles During playback the user can press the Angle button on the DVD or Blu ray Disc player remote control to change angles Video track number 1 will play the title s main video Any additional video tracks that you add will play when the Angle button on the remote control is pressed The maximum overall bit rate for titles with multiple video angles is lower than the maximum for single angle titles The maximum bit rates in each type of project DVD or Blu ray Disc for the number of video angles in a title is listed below DVD project Blu ray project Number of Angles Maximum bit rate Mbps Number of Angles Maximum bit rate Mbps 1 9 8 1 48 2 6 8 2 30 7 9 7 5 3 4 24 5 6 20 7 8 18 9 16 Warning Any title that contains multiple video tracks will be recompressed when you prepare your project so the main video and the alternate angles can be combined into a new video file To avoid recompression artifacts and unnecessary processing time use AVI files for your multiangle video titles Adding video tracks You can add up to eight video tracks for each title 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible 3 Click the Insert Track button 5 and choose Insert Vid
299. round audio If your audio format is AC 3 select the control click the down arrow button and Bit depth PCM only choose a setting to indicate the bit rate for your audio e DVD projects can use a bit rate of 96 Kbps to 448 Kbps e Blu ray Disc projects can use a bit rate of 96 Kbps to 640 Kbps If your audio format is PCM select the control click the down arrow button and choose a setting to indicate the number of bits used to represent each audio sample Sample rate PCM only Last prepare folder Last mastering output folder If your audio format is PCM select the control click the down arrow button and choose a setting to indicate the sample rate for your audio e DVD projects can use a sample rate of 48 KHz or 96 KHz e Blu ray Disc projects can use a sample rate of 48 KHz 96 KHz or 192 KHz Displays the path to the folder that was most recently used to prepare your project For more information see Preparing a DVD project on page 167 Displays the path to the folder that was most recently used to master a DVD project Last prepare image For more information see Writing a master for replication on page 172 Displays the path to the iso file that was created the last time you prepared a Blu ray Initial audio track Disc project For more information see Preparing a Blu ray Disc project on page 175 Select the control click the down arrow button and choose which audio stream Ini
300. round audio matches the project audio format Ifa menu requires recompression it will be recompressed using the Video format Audio format and the Frame rate setting from the Recompress settings section of the Optimize Disc dialog Media files Media files will not be recompressed if rendered in a compliant format For more information see Rendering files for your project on page 25 If a media file requires recompression it will be recompressed using the Project video format and Project audio format settings You can select a media file in the Optimize Disc dialog and use the controls in the Recompress settings section to override the default project formats Music video compilations A music video compilation s video will not be recompressed if it meets the following requirements e Any background video or images must match the project video format e No graphics can be added to the compilation The audio will not be compressed if it matches the project audio format If a music video compilation requires recompression it will be recompressed using the project video and audio format settings You can select a music video compilation in the Optimize Disc dialog and use the controls in the Recompress settings section to override the default project formats GETTING STARTED 29 Picture compilations The video portion of a picture compilation is always recompressed using the project video format but you can select a music video
301. rovide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu that appears when you right click on certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in DVD Architect Pro software for quick access to many commands An example of a shortcut menu can be found by right clicking on any waveform display in a data window For information on the available DVD Architect Pro software shortcuts see Shortcuts on page 189 Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices The timecode is calculated in Hours Minutes Second Frames where Frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SMPTE timecode are 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second Sound Card The sound card is the audio interface between your computer and the outside world It is responsible for converting analog signals to digital and vice versa DVD Architect Pro software will work with any Windows compatible sound card Stereo Mixer implementation that includes two discrete channels Surround Mixer implementation that includes six discrete channels 216 AP
302. rved 23 Reserved USING SCRIPTING 157 Language codes The following table lists the language codes supported by DVD Architect Pro software Use the number from the Value column when writing scripts Language Code Value Language Code Value Language Code Vale Abkhazian ab 24930 Hindi hi 26729 Rhaeto Romance rm 29293 Afar aa 24929 Hungarian hu 26741 Romanian ro 29295 Afrikaans af 24934 Icelandic is 26995 Russian ru 29301 Albanian sq 29553 Indonesian in 26990 Samoan sm 29549 Amharic am 24941 Interlingua ia 26977 Sangho Sg 29543 Arabic ar 24946 Interlingue ie 26981 Sanskrit sa 29537 Armenian hy 26745 Inupiak ik 26987 Scots Gaelic gd 26468 Assamese as 24947 Irish ga 26465 Serbian sr 29554 Aymara ay 24953 Italian it 26996 Serbo Croatian sh 29544 Azerbaijani az 24954 Japanese ja 27233 Sesotho st 29556 Bashkir ba 25185 Javanese jw 27255 Setswana tn 29806 Basque eu 25973 Kannada kn 27502 Shona sn 29550 Bengali bn 25198 Kashmiri ks 27507 Sindhi sd 29540 Bhutani dz 25722 Kazakh kk 27499 Sinhalese si 29545 Bihari bh 25192 Kinyarwanda rw 29303 Siswati SS 29555 Bislama bi 25193 Kirghiz ky 27513 Slovak sk 29547 Breton br 25202 Kirundi rn 29294 Slovenian sl 29548 Bulgarian bg 25191 Korean ko 27503 Somali SO 29551 Burmese my 28025 Kurdish ku 27509 Spanish es 25971 Byelorussian be 25189 Laothian lo 27759 Sundanese su 29557 Cambodian km 27501 Lain lt i la 27745 Swahili sw 29559 Catalan ca 25441 Latvian lv 27766 Swedish SV 29558 Chinese zh 31336 Lingal
303. s frame A layer containing a button frame Can be abbreviated frm framemask A layer containing a button s frame mask Can be abbreviated frmmsk Name An optional label for an object Use Up Back Prev and Next to identify layers that are used to create navigation buttons For instance a layer named button 04 highlightintensity back would be used to define the highlight mask for the fourth button on a menu Transparency is determined using intensity mapping and the button will be imported as the Back button 102 CHAPTER 10 Creating a layered psd menu The following procedure will demonstrate how to create this menu using a layered psd file that contains the menu background buttons and related mask images on separate layers Note n general try to avoid making major changes such as adding removing or renaming layers after you ve created a menu using a psd file If you edit and save a menu s psd file while working with your DVD Architect Pro project the software will release the file when it loses focus and reload the psd when focus is restored to the DVD Architect Pro window The following actions may occur depending on the changes you make to the psd file e Ifyou change the contents of a layer the corresponding object s image will be updated when you restore focus to the DVD Architect Pro window If you add a layer with an invalid name the layer is ignored If you add a layer the layer is not detected until
304. s 63 editing in picture compilations 70 inserting in music video compilations 62 replacing in music video compilations 63 replacing in picture compilations 68 rotating in music video compilations 63 rotating in picture compilations 69 stretching or scaling in music video compilations 63 stretching or scaling in picture compilations 69 IMAPI 187 importing subtitles 92 in point setting 75 inactive button colors button properties 120 menu page properties 122 inserting audio in picture compilations 72 buttons on video markers 76 chapter markers 76 empty slides 70 graphic subtitles 91 graphics in menus 38 graphics in picture compilations 72 images or videos in music video compilations 62 keyframes 49 scene selection menus 41 scene chapter markers 76 setup menus 42 statements in scripts 153 text in menus 39 installing DVD Architect Pro software 11 interlace flicker reducing in menus 121 reducing in music video compilations 135 reducing in picture compilations 131 reducing in single movie titles 127 introduction media 28 keyboard shortcuts general editing 190 inserting objects and titles 190 magnification and view 189 preview 191 project file 189 Timeline window 190 keyframe animation 81 Keyframe tool 53 keyframes changing interpolation curves 49 crop and video effects 48 50 deleting 49 editing crop settings 49 inserting 49 moving 49 navigating between 49 transformation
305. s a preview pane so that you can monitor your progress and compare the processed and unprocessed image Displaying the Crop and Adjust window From the View menu choose Crop and Adjust to display or hide the Crop and Adjust window You can also right click a graphic in the workspace and choose Crop and Adjust from the shortcut menu or select the Video box in the Properties window click the down arrow button and then choose Crop and Adjust from the menu CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 45 Toolbar x 49 Selection Box Preview Pane Keyframe Properties Crop and Adjust 3t ot ol R l amp 00 00 03 08 00 00 00 00 SUS AU a aM Crop Video Effects Keyframe u SS Controller E VDF AA Que Crop and Adjust Properties o MESE H Can guitarist png Brightness 0 000 Contrast 0 000 Contrast center 0 500 Colorize Paa TaT n a T Alpha 1 000 i Crop Media Graphic to crop and adjust j00 00 03 29 j00 00 05 25 j00 00 07 29 A m P Using the toolbar Use the toolbar to make quick adjustments to a video or image You can use the display in the Crop and Adjust window to preview your adjustments Note Expand the Brightness Contrast and Contrast center controls on the right side of the dialog to see the results of your adjustments me Fe Eo 4 46 CHAPTER 4 Reset Effect Properties Removes all effects from the media
306. s controls 4 Click the expand button l next to the Action heading to expand the controls 5 Choose the orphaned menu or title from the Destination drop down list The number of chapters is more than the maximum You can have no more than 99 chapter markers in each title in a DVD project You can have no more than 255 chapter markers in each title in a Blu ray Disc project Navigate to the movie and delete markers before burning The overall bit rate is greater than 28 Mbps The overall bit rate of the specified file is too high for burning Blu ray onto a DVD The overall bit rate includes video audio and subtitles If your project s target media size is 25 or 50 GB and you choose to continue your title may not play properly in some players If your project s target media size is 4 7 or 8 5 GB you must adjust individual bit rates for video and audio before you can continue with the disc preparation and burning process You can adjust individual bit rates for video and audio from the Project Properties dialog The play mode for playlist is set to Random The play mode the specified playlist is set to Random Random playlists are not supported for Blu ray Discs This playlist will be played sequentially The script contains a broken link The specified script contains a Link command with a broken link destination To edit a script s properties perform the following actions 1 If the Script Properties window isn t already v
307. s created by default You can add more menus to allow the user to play movies and navigate to other menus by selecting buttons Think of menus as an outline of your project each menu can contain background media graphics text and links to music video compilations picture compilations or movies You can apply a theme to your menus to achieve a consistent appearance and layout or you can customize the appearance of each menu and its objects individually For more information see Working with themes on page 108 Pages extend menus across multiple screens add a page when you want to add more items to a menu than will fit on a single page Notes e When using background video in DVD menus we recommend rendering the video in progressive scan format before adding it to your project Leave the Progressive setting at Auto and the noncompliant menu will be rendered as progressive scan video Progressive scan menus will provide the sharpest looking text and highest level of DVD player compatibility If you need to use interlaced video as a menu background choose No from the menu When you choose No the noncompliant menu will be rendered as interlaced video Some DVD players will not display the last frame of amenu correctly when using interlaced background video e When creating Blu ray Disc projects menus must match the field order set by your project s video format Building menus When a user places the disc in a DVD or Blu ray Di
308. s determine what happens at this step in the script You can use commands to assign values or set links to a GPRM General Purpose Register Memory skip to other sections of the script set the audio video and subtitle tracks resume or stop playback and more Optionally you can also set specific conditions that must be present for these commands to be executed To create a command statement choose Command from the Statement type drop down list Choose the type of command from the Command drop down list Command Type Description Nop No operation is currently invoked in this command This is the default setting for all commands A Nop command is ignored by the script Link Links to a title or menu on your project When adding a link you can use the Destination Destination chapter and Destination button controls to customize the link e Destination Choose the menu title playlist or script that will be displayed e Destination chapter When your statement links to a video music video compilation or playlist choose the specific chapter that will be displayed e Destination button When your statement links to a menu choose the button you want to use as the default selected button in the destination menu GotoLabel Links to a label elsewhere in the current script When the script is run it will begin executing statements listed after the label Choose a setting from the Label drop down list to select the label to which you want to
309. s hours Telephone Fax E mail Country 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 203 7620 for all other countries 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of Technical Support options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support default asp To listen to your support options please call 608 256 5555 About your rights in DVD Architect Pro software DVD Architect Pro software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement The End User License Agreement is first presented to you when you install the software Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the software For your reference a copy of the End User License Agreement for DVD Architect Pro software is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com corporate eula asp About your privacy Sony Creative Software Inc respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Polic
310. sc This procedure assumes your title includes scene chapter markers You can add scene chapter markers in the Timeline window 1 2 3 4 A From the File menu choose New Select the Single Movie icon D y and then click OK The Open Media dialog is displayed Select the video file you want to use and then click OK In the Project Overview window right click the video and choose Insert Scene Selection Menu from the shortcut menu The Insert Scene Selection Menu dialog is displayed In the Page title box type the title you d like to be displayed on the new menu In the Links per page box specify the number of links you d like to have displayed on each page For example if your video includes fifteen scene chapter markers typing 5 in this box will create a scene selection menu with three pages Click the OK button to create the menu and pages You can then edit the menu as necessary In the Project Overview window select the menu page that is Scene Selection Page 1 and click the Set Disc Start button E Inserting a setup menu You can use button actions to create a setup menu that allows the user to choose which audio and subtitle tracks will be used when your project is played For more information see Button Properties on page 115 3 Note fa button action or end action changes the audio or subtitle track after it is selected on your setup menu the new track will be used by default when you navigate between tit
311. sc player a main menu is displayed The main menu contains links to submenus or titles music video compilations picture compilations or media files When you start the software and create a menu based project a default main menu page is displayed for you You can begin assembling your main menu using the existing appearance and layout or you can edit the appearance of the main menu using themes or by adding your own background image video text and audio You can begin adding submenus and media whenever you re ready Adding a submenu You can add submenus to a project to organize your content 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 From the Insert menu choose Submenu A new menu is created below the current menu and a button is added to the current menu as a link to the submenu Alternatively click the Insert Object button F and choose Menu in the Project Overview window 3 Double click the submenu in the Project Overview window or double click the submenu s button in the workspace to edit the layout and add titles such as movies music or compilations or playlists Note You can edit the button by selecting it and making changes to the controls in the Button Properties pane in the Properties window For more information see Button Properties on page 115 CREATING A MENU BASED PROJECT 35 Adding a submenu from a file You can add subm
312. select it Using the keyframe tool in the workspace drag the button to the position where you want its motion to begin Tip You can also use the Transformations page in the Button Properties pane to edit the button position d Double click the Transformations keyframe bar to create the next keyframe e Use the keyframe tool to set the button position for the selected keyframe f Repeat steps d and e as needed to create your button motion Set the button s final position a Position the last keyframe so it matches the menu s loop point marker in the Timeline window b Use the keyframe tool 3 in the workspace to set the button s final position Preview your menu and edit keyframes as needed Fading a button in to make it appear gradually Is Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit For more information see Project Overview window Ctrl Alt 1 on page 14 On the General page of the Menu Page Properties pane verify that the menu length is long enough to accommodate the animation and that the menu loop point is set to the point where you want menu animation to end For more information see Menu Page Properties on page 121 In the workspace select the button you want to animate if you can t see the button click in the timeline to place the cursor after the loop point The Button Properties pane is displayed in the Properties window For mo
313. setting at Auto and the noncompliant menu will be rendered as progressive scan video Progressive scan menus will provide the sharpest looking text and highest level of DVD player compatibility If you need to use interlaced video as a menu background choose No from the menu When you choose No the noncompliant menu will be rendered as interlaced video Some DVD players will not display the last frame of a menu correctly when using interlaced background video e When creating Blu ray Disc projects menus must match the field order set by your project s video format Item Video 122 CHAPTER 11 Description The Video box displays the path to the background video file that will be used in the menu Select the control and click the down arrow button to display a menu where you can choose a file view media properties crop and adjust media settings remove the current file open the file in your selected graphics editor or explore the file s containing folder on your drive Tips To change a file quickly drag a file from the Explorer window to the Video box e Ifyou use a background video in your menu we recommend rendering the video in progressive scan format before adding it to your project On the Video tab of the Optimize Disc dialog click the Progressive box and choose Auto to render the noncompliant menu as progressive scan video Progressive scan menus will provide the sharpest looking text and highest level of DV
314. sion to specific formats Using the Optimize Disc dialog you can perform the following actions e View the estimated project and individual media file sizes e View and change project and file format settings Verify which media files will require recompression during the preparation process e A green check mark indicates a file is compliant e Ayellow warning sign indicates a file requires recompression e Agreen warning sign indicates some files are compliant and some files require recompression e Ared warning sign indicates you have specified to force recompression To determine the best file format settings for your use see Rendering files for your project on page 25 Determining whether menus and titles are compliant Use the following guidelines to determine whether your menus and titles will require recompression during the preparation process Menus Menus always use the settings displayed above the Project Properties button All menus use the same audio format aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 and frame size but you can mix frame rates for menus within a single project A menu s video will not be recompressed if it meets the following requirements e Any background video must match the project video format e No graphics can be added to the menu e Buttons must use highlighting only Using button thumbnails or text will require recompression A menu s audio will not be recompressed if its backg
315. size object proportionally from center SHORTCUTS 191 192 APPENDIX A Appendix B Rendering Files for Your Project To ensure that your project preparation and burning process goes smoothly you should save your media files in the supported formats prior to bringing them into your DVD Architect Pro project DVD Architect Pro software supports a wide variety of file formats but some will require transcoding or recompression by the project preparation process lengthening the amount of time needed to complete this operation and possibly resulting in degradation of quality Note The AVC MainConcept MPEG 2 AC 3 and Wave Wave64 encoders in Vegas Pro software provide templates that if used without any modifications result in files that do not require recompression unless the file size is too large to fit on a disc The settings to produce media files that do not require recompression follow Blu ray Disc projects You can burn Blu ray Disc projects to BD recordable discs using the BDMV format e A25 GB single layer BD recordable disc can store approximately 3 hours 42 minutes of AVC video 15 Mbps or 2 hours 15 minutes of MPEG 2 video 25 Mbps e A 50 GB dual layer BD recordable disc can store approximately 7 hours 25 minutes of AVC video 15 Mbps or 4 hours 31 minutes of MPEG 2 video 25 Mbps AC 3 audio ac3 for Blu ray Disc projects Sample Rate Bit Rate Channels 48 000 Hz 192 Kbps Stereo 64 Kbps to 640 Kbps
316. sk any pixel with a red value of 255 is transparent in the mask In these examples the white and red areas represents the portion of the frame that will be visible When an image that supports transparency such as PNG or PSD is used as a mask transparent portions of the mask image represent portions of the frame image that will be visible USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 99 Highlight masks A highlight mask determines where highlighting will be applied when a button is selected activated or inactive A highlight mask can be applied in two different ways Per button Select a button and click the Highlight button at the top of the Button Properties pane Use the Style drop down list to choose a predefined highlighting style or choose Custom to use a custom mask file Creating a button highlight mask is just like creating a frame mask For more information see Frame masks on page 99 e Per menu If you re designing your menus in a graphics program you can adapt your menu background files to create a mask file that you can apply to the menu Select a menu in the workspace and click the Background Media button at the top of the Menu Page Properties pane Use the Highlight mask control to choose the mask file you want to use and use the Highlight mask mapping control to indicate how transparency is determined from the mask The following steps will guide you through the process of creating a menu highlight mask 1 Ifyou designed you
317. ss pokseweonanesd ears obeaauesen es 180 Adding a layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu cc cece eee eee eeeeees 180 Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu 00 cece eee eee ees 180 Deleting a layout from your computer 6 cece eee eee e eee e ee ee ee eenes 180 Dasi eaka a ol PEE E E E sees cna peceen thea E EEEE E 181 Hiding and displaying the toolbar cc ccc ccc cece cece een een e eee eennees 181 Reordering toolbar buttons ccc eee nneeeee eee eee eee eee eeennnes 181 Adding buttons t the toolbar s4c2sic02400c0nidae ieeusaui dees iewndans dd ieeuss Kad eeuvetees 181 Removing buttons from the toolbar cece ccc cece cnet n eee e eee ee eeennees 182 Setting DVD Architect Pro preferences cece ec ccc ccc eee eee e tenet eeeeees 182 General taD erreser tenses dtadnewus weeded eran yee eadeuereeeweecueeeueaieneweseaion 182 WIQCO LAD PEPPE beveshuawes S EE aieond odes Ava ebeuedes Luveesacues Aeeasnaou 183 Video DEVICE taD 04 42 244 c04 iy tnd nena EENAA rT AA EEA 184 eiia e EE S E E E E E A E E ES E E E A E T 185 Bie EAE E E E TE E E E EEE E E E T EE sees 186 PICVICW ta Desras arae AAE ATE T EE EENES E 186 BUNING OD eerren EEE E AA EAA EEO E AE N 187 Mastenng TAD aisre raer E EE EEE i AAEE EEEE T EEEE 187 MOS a E E wane uous EAEE E EEE 189 Keyboard s Nar U errara TEENE E ERAS 189 POETE a Er AEE E E EE cues E or teeares 189 Magnification and view
318. stop the preview click the Stop Preview button To disable this option click the Auto Preview button again Adding files to your project Once you ve located a file you want to use add it to the project using one of the following methods e Double click the file The file is added as a button on the currently selected menu e Drag the file from the Explorer window to the DVD Architect Pro workspace e Drag the file from the Explorer window to a menu in the Project Overview window e Drag a file from the Explorer window to the root folder in the Project Overview window Dragging a file to the root folder adds the media to your project without creating a button on a menu t p mE g Untitled m IE f Hg eee Menu 1 E Menu 1 Page 1 enu 1 Page 1 Drag a file to the root folder to add the media to the project without creating a button on a menu You can use this unassociated media as a transition between menus via end actions or as a destination for button actions or GETTING STARTED 27 the Menu button on the remote control Tip Select the Automatically link similar audio and video files check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog if you want the software to look for and link audio files with the same base name when you add a video onlly file to your project For example if you had a video only MPEG file MyProject mpg and an audio file MyProject wav in the same folder the softw
319. stream is a full resolution 2D AVC video and the dependent stream is an MVC video that contains video data for the other eye 4 When rendering is complete add your base avc stream to your DVD Architect project as you would add standard 2D media DVD Architect will automatically detect the dependent mvc stream You can mix 2D and 3D media ina single project but menus are displayed only in 2D Tip f you want to burn a 3D video in 2D for your project you can remove the dependent stream from the folder where the base stream is saved 5 Prepare and burn your project to disc Note When you preview a 3D video only the base stream will be displayed WORKING WITH STEREOSCOPIC 3D MEDIA ON BLU RAY DISC 161 162 CHAPTER 14 Chapter 15 Previewing Projects You can preview your project before you begin the project preparation process The most common method for previewing is from within the DVD Architect Pro window In this method you can simulate how your project will look on a television screen and how it will perform in a DVD or Blu ray Disc player You can also preview on an external monitor or secondary Windows display Both methods are covered in this chapter Preview window The Preview window allows you to preview your DVD Architect Pro project on a simulated television screen with a virtual remote control The Wayfaring Stranger dar DVD Architect Pro 6 0 po e File Edit View Preview Options Help
320. t Description Select the control click the down arrow button and choose which video angle will be played when the disc is inserted into the DVD or Blu ray Disc player Notes e Ifyou choose Default the DVD or Blu ray Disc player will attempt to determine the appropriate default track The viewer can choose which track is played during playback Ifyou choose a track that does not exist in your project the initial track will default to the first video track The Extras folder Jacket picture DVD start script and Parental control settings are available only when creating a DVD project If you want to burn DVD ROM content to your disc type the path to the folder that contains the files you want to include or select the box and click the Change Media button to choose a folder When you choose a folder all files within that folder will be written to the root of your project If you want to place the content in a subfolder at the root of the disc create a subfolder within your specified extras folder e For example if c media extras is your extras folder all files within the folder will be written to the root of the disc e For example if c media extras is your extras folder you could place the files you want to burn in a c media extras DVD ROM subfolder so that the DVD ROM folder and its contents would be written to the root of the disc Note You can add any type of files or subfolder to the Extras fo
321. t at which buttons will be displayed If the menu s timeout occurs earlier than the loop point the menu s buttons will not be displayed Use the General page in the Menu Page Properties pane to adjust the loop point so it occurs before the timeout or use the End Action page to adjust the timeout so it occurs after the menu s loop point For more information see Menu Page Properties on page 121 The title has more than 16 subtitle tracks Widescreen titles can have a maximum of 16 subtitle tracks Navigate to the title and remove tracks or change the aspect ratio of the asset in the Optimize Disc dialog The video has a bit rate that is too high to play properly on some players When the bit rate of a video is too high it may not play back properly on some players Recompress with a lower bit rate 1 Select the title in the Optimize Disc dialog and click the Video tab 2 Select the Recompress box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu 3 Select the Use default bit rate box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the menu to recompress using the project s default bit rate TROUBLESHOOTING 205 There are too many menu pages Your project has too many menu pages Each project can contain a maximum of 1023 pages Delete pages as necessary and then prepare your project again For more information see Deleting pages on page 36 There are too many titles A Blu ray Disc project can have a m
322. t points and add chapter markers Setting in and out points You can set in and out points if you don t want to burn your entire video file When preparing your project the software will trim the video to include only the portion between these points 1 2 3 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the video In the Timeline window click to position the cursor where you want the video to begin Click the Set In Point button Fa A yellow triangle is placed on the timeline to mark the in point Chapter 1 represents the point at which playback will begin When you change the in point the first chapter marker will be updated to match the in point Click to position the cursor on the timeline where you want the video to end Click the Set Out Point button A yellow triangle is placed on the timeline to mark the out point 00 00 00 00 00 00 en cau CREATING A SINGLE MOVIE DISC OR TITLE 75 Working with markers You can insert scene chapter markers chapter markers and buttons on video markers in video files You can also rename move delete load and save markers Notes e Markers must be at least one second apart e ADVD project can contain a maximum of 99 chapters and 255 markers per title e A Blu ray Disc project can contain a maximum of 255 chapters per title Inamusic video compilation markers always occur at the beginning of the compilation and b
323. ted button colors drop down list The lightest pixels those with an average intensity of 192 to 255 are mapped to the color set s fill color color 1 and the darkest pixels those with an average intensity of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Color channel Maps the color channels in the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activated button colors drop down list A pixel containing any red channel component uses the color set s fill color color 1 a pixel containing any green channel component uses the color set s anti alias color color 2 a pixel containing any blue component uses the color set s outline background color color 3 and a completely black pixel uses the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 123 Item Stretch type End Actions Description Select the box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate how background video or images will be scaled to fit the menu page e Letterbox The background media fills the width of the menu and black letterboxing bars are displayed above and below or to the right and left as needed Zoom to fit The background is magnified to fill the menu If the aspect ratio of the image doesn
324. terlace flicker box click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list to turn flicker reduction on or off Turn flicker reduction on when using still images that contain thin horizontal lines Start Script If you have already created at least one DVD script in your project select the Start Script box click the down arrow button and choose the script that will be played when the music video compilation is accessed Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects End Action A music video compilation s end action determines what happens after the last song is played Item Description Command Determines what happens after the last track plays e Link You can link to any menu media file and chapter point Use the Destination Destination chapter Destination item or Destination button controls to set the target You can also use the Destination button control to choose the default selected button in the destination menu e Stop Your disc will stop playing after the last song THE PROPERTIES WINDOW 135 Item Destination Destination chapter Destination item Destination button Set audio track Set subtitle track Set video angle Description When Link is selected in the Command drop down list choose the menu or media file that will be displayed Note f you want the user s remote control navigation to follow the same path as your end actions set the media file s en
325. the No button if you do not want to burn another copy of your DVD PREPARING AND BURNING YOUR PROJECT 171 Writing a master for replication DVD Architect Pro software allows you to create a disc master for replication Note Mastering is not available for Blu ray Disc projects 1 Click the Make DVD button The Make DVD wizard is displayed 2 Click the Write Master button 3 Onthe Select Prepare Folder page choose the location where you want to prepare your project or the location of an already prepared project that you want to burn Note You can only prepare to a folder that is empty or a folder that you have previously prepared to Option Current project Previously prepared folder Click the Next button Description Select the Current project radio button and type the path to the folder where you want to prepare your project in the Prepare Burn folder box or click Browse to choose a folder If you ve previously prepared the project the Smart prepare section will display the estimated percentage of the project that has not been changed which can be reused If you want to turn off smart prepare and prepare the entire project perform the following steps 1 Click the Advanced button The Smart Prepare Options dialog is displayed 2 Clear the Enable smart prepare check box 3 Click the OK button to continue Tip Smart prepare technology can drastically reduce project preparation times if you need to e
326. the desired location or click Transformations in the Properties window to type a new location for the text box in the X position and Y position boxes Tip You can also use transformation keyframes to animate text in your project For more information see Transformation keyframes on page 52 Deleting text 1 Select the image containing the text you want to delete CREATING A PICTURE COMPILATION 71 2 If necessary click the Selection tool in the editing toolbar to make it the active tool 3 Inthe workspace select the text box you want to delete 4 From the Edit menu choose Delete Inserting a graphic You can insert any number of graphics to display on top of a selected slideshow image 1 Inthe Compilation window select the slide to which you want to add the graphic From the Insert menu choose Graphic The Insert Graphic dialog is displayed Locate and select the file you want to use Click the OK button A E i To reposition the graphic click the Selection tool on the editing toolbar and drag the graphic to the desired location or click the Transformations button on the Graphics Properties pane to type a new location for the graphic box in the X position and Y position boxes 6 To resize the graphic click the Sizing tool 4 on the editing toolbar and drag any of the handles to resize the graphic or click the Transformations button on the Graphics Properties pane to type a new size for the graphic box
327. the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen Event An event is an occurrence of a media file on the timeline 214 APPENDIX E Frame Rate Audio Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio In the latter case the rate of 30 non drop is typically used In the former case 30 drop is usually used Frame Rate Video The speed at which individual images in the video are displayed on the screen during playback A faster frame rate results in smoother motion in the video The television frame rate in the US NTSC is 29 97 frames per second fps In many parts of Europe and Japan the television standard is PAL at 25 fps Gamma Determines the brightness of the video and is used to compensate for differences between the source and output video and sometimes needs to be calibrated to match the source or destination Higher gamma values result in lighter or brighter video as displayed on your computer s monitor Markers Markers mark different sections of your project Markers are saved with your DVD Architect Pro project file and can also be saved to the media file Marker Type Description Scene chapter markers Used as navigation points for a video file as well as for linking to points in a video using end actions or to automatically create scene selection menus using the Insert gt Scene Selection command Chapter ma
328. the music or video compilation s properties perform the following steps 1 If the window isn t already visible choose Properties from the View menu 2 Double click a music or video compilation in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the compilation you want to edit 3 Click a button at the top of the Properties window For more information see Music Video Compilation Properties on page 135 CREATING A MUSIC VIDEO COMPILATION 65 66 CHAPTER 5 Chapter 6 Creating a Picture Compilation You can use DVD Architect Pro software to create a picture compilation disc or add a picture compilation to a menu in a menu based project Note Each title ina DVD project can have no more than 99 chapter markers Each title in a Blu ray Disc project can have no more than 255 chapter markers In a compilation with more pictures than chapter markers you can navigate to the last chapter marker with the Next Chapter button on the remote control and then use the Fast Forward button to navigate past the last chapter For more information about starting projects and locating media see Getting Started on page 25 Tip f you want the file name of your images to be automatically inserted on a slide make sure the Auto Insert Slide Text option is enabled on the Options menu before you add pictures to your compilation If you do not want any text to appear on your slides make sure this option is disabled before you ad
329. the user to press the Angle button on the remote to choose which video track is played Video mode Allows the user to press the Video Mode button on the remote to switch widescreen letterboxed and pan and scan presentation in a 16 9 video Fixing button navigation If your DVD or Blu ray Disc remote Next button goes to the next title instead of the next chapter or if the Previous button doesn t navigate to the previous title in a playlist then you will need to turn off Title play 1 Inthe Project Overview window double click the title that you want to edit 2 Inthe Properties window click the Remote Buttons button 3 Select Title play and choose Off from the drop down menu Tip You can use the Order Titles dialog to make the title order match the playlist order For more information see Editing title order on page 38 Color Sets Color sets determine which colors are used to indicate selected activated and inactive buttons on your menu page You can have four project wide color sets that are available to every menu page in your project and each menu page in your project can also have up to four custom color sets with four colors each Each color set includes a fill color outline background color anti alias color and transparent color Use the Color Sets page to edit the color sets that will be available for the selected menu and then use the General page to choose which color sets are used for the selected activated
330. theme is added Working with grid themes Applying a grid theme When applying a grid them existing buttons are repositioned and resized on the menu to display in a row and column format Note No buttons are added or deleted Saving a grid theme 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu that you want to use to create your theme 2 From the File menu choose Export Menu as Theme The Export Menu as Theme dialog is displayed Tip n the workspace right click the menu and choose Export Menu as Theme 3 Inthe Name box type a name for the theme Note Your theme name can have no more than 16 characters including spaces Click the Advanced button to modify theme specifications Select Theme type click the down arrow button and choose Grid from the drop down list Edit your grid layout properties For more information see Modifying grid layout properties on page 111 oe oo Click the Save button The Themes window is refreshed and your theme is added Modifying grid layout properties Select the specific property click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list Tip f you want to view changes in the workspace as you edit the properties select the Preview changes check box Orientation Specifies the button arrangement within the grid Item Description Horizontal Arranges buttons horizontally 6 Vertical Arrang
331. tial subtitle track will be played when the disc is inserted into the DVD or Blu ray Disc player Notes Ifyou choose Default the DVD or Blu ray Disc player will attempt to determine the appropriate default audio track If the player cannot determine the correct language the first track is used If multiple tracks match the player s language setting if you have an English dialogue track and an English commentary track for example the first track that matches the player s language is used The viewer can choose which track is played during playback Ifyou choose a track that does not exist in your project the initial track will default to the first audio track Select the control click the down arrow button and choose which subtitle stream 144 CHAPTER 12 will be played when the disc is inserted into the DVD or Blu ray Disc player Notes e Ifyou choose Default the DVD or Blu ray Disc player will attempt to determine the appropriate default track If the player cannot determine the correct language the first track is used If multiple tracks match the player s language setting the first track that matches the player s language is used The viewer can choose which track is played during playback e Ifyou choose a track that does not exist in your project the initial track will default to the first subtitle track Item Initial video angle DVD only features Extras folder Jacket picture DVD start scrip
332. tify the disc For example if this disc is part two of a three part series type 2 in this box Maximum set number If the disc is from a multidisc collection use this setting to identify the number of discs in the series For example if this disc was part of a three part series type 3 in this box e Memo Type any additional comments in this section Note the following output format information The DDP 2 00 output format does not support customer information e Customer information is optional when using the DDP 2 10 output format The CMF 1 0 output format requires customer information You can however save blank customer information fields with the master Summary tab information You can use the boxes on the Summary tab to enter information about the project if desired This information is stored with the DVD Architect Pro project Item Title Artist Engineer Copyright Description Enter the title of the project Enter the name of the artist who performed in the project Enter the name of the person who mixed or edited the project Enter copyright information about the project SETTING PROJECT PROPERTIES 149 Item Description Comments Enter any comments you want to associate with the project Start all new projects with Select this check box to use the current dialog settings as the default these settings 150 CHAPTER 12 Chapter 13 Using Scripting Scripting in DVD Architect Pro gives
333. til you can see which objects overlap 202 APPENDIX D Playlist has more than 255 items Each playlist can contain a maximum of 255 items Note DVD projects are limited to 99 titles videos music video compilations or picture compilations Each playlist can reference a title more than once but the playlist can have no more than 255 items 1 Double click a playlist in the Project Overview window or choose a playlist from the drop down list at the top of the Playlists window to open the playlist you want to edit 2 Select the items in the Playlists window that you want to remove from the selected playlist n Delete the selected items or press Ctrl X to cut the items to the clipboard 4 Ifyou want to paste the items to a new playlist click the Insert Playlist button in the Playlists window to create a new playlist click OK to close the Select Titles dialog and then press Ctrl V to paste the items into the new playlist Project has more than 4 095 scripts Each DVD project can contain a maximum of 4 095 scripts Right click a DVD script in the Project Overview window and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Subtitle event is too complex If a subpicture graphic is overly complex overall or on a horizontal line it cannot be compressed to meet the requirements of the DVD specification This message indicates a subtitle event that is too complex overall Try the following to reduce overall complexity Divide t
334. tist Integrated logo Beatmapper Cinescore CD Architect DVD Architect Jam Trax Perfect Clarity Audio Photo Go Sound Forge Super Duper Music Looper Transparent Technology Vegas Vision Series and Visual Creation Studio are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Creative Software Inc in the United States and other countries Interactive tutorials You can learn more about many of the features in DVD Architect Pro by using the interactive tutorials installed with the software You can access the tutorials at any time by choosing Interactive Tutorials from the Help Help on the Web Additional DVD Architect Pro software help and information is available on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web to view a listing of Web pages pertaining to DVD Architect Pro software and Sony Creative Software Inc The software starts your system s Web browser and attempts to connect to the appropriate page on the Sony Creative Software Inc site 12 CHAPTER 1 Chapter 2 Learning the DVD Architect Pro Workspace DVD Architect Pro software is designed to make it easy to create a professional looking DVD or Blu ray Disc Many of the editing operations commands and shortcut keys are common to other popular software applications as well as other Sony Creative Software Inc applications Main window When you start the application the main window appears
335. tle audio track 1 continues playing when you skip to the second title so you d hear French dialogue in the second title Using the same track sequence for all titles will ensure consistency across your project If necessary insert blank audio tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition between titles However a user could manually choose a blank audio track without realizing that it was intentionally left blank Note Various brands and models of DVD players behave differently with blank audio tracks ADDING AUDIO VIDEO AND SUBTITLES 87 Replacing audio in a track You can replace the audio in a track by dragging a new file from the Explorer window or Windows Explorer or you can edit the controls on the Track Media page on the Media Properties pane of the Properties window For more information see Media Properties on page 127 Setting the audio track for timeline playback Select the Activate Track button 4 in an audio track header in the Timeline window to determine which track is played when you click the Play From In Point I or Play button in the Timeline window Changing audio track colors 1 Right click the header and choose Track Display Color from the shortcut menu 2 Choose a color from the submenu to set the selected track s color in the track list and the audio waveform in the timeline Note Track color settings are saved with your p
336. to a previous state when you do not like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them The ability to Undo Redo is only limited by the size of your hard drive GLOSSARY 217 218 APPENDIX E Numerics 3D media 161 A action safe area customizing 185 Snapping to 56 activated button colors button properties 120 menu page properties 122 adding audio to music video compilations 62 audio tracks 87 buttons to videos 79 media files to projects 27 music video compilations to menus 38 navigation buttons 43 pages to menus 36 scene selection menus 41 scripts to menus or titles 152 single movie titles to menus 38 submenus 35 text to music video compilations 63 text to picture compilations 71 adjusting audio recompression settings 31 object spacing 55 project wide recompression settings 32 video recompression settings 30 aligning objects 55 animating buttons with keyframes 81 animating slideshows 68 animation See crop and video effects keyframes transformation keyframes appending statements to scripts 153 applying color sets 45 highlight masks to menus 123 themes 108 arranging objects 51 aspect ratio default for preview 186 audio files adding to music video compilations 62 adjusting recompression settings 31 replacing in music video compilations 62 audio tracks activating for playback 88 adding 87 changing track color 88 default language for preview 186 rep
337. to edit the color sets that will be available for the selected menu and then use the General page in the Menu Page Properties pane to choose which color sets are used for the selected activated and inactive buttons on your menu For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Button Region The button region control allows you to set the highlight colors for buttons within button regions on the timeline For more information see Inserting buttons on video markers on page 76 Item Description Selected button colors Select the down arrow button and choose a color set that will be used to display the sel ected button on a page Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Activated button colors Select the down arrow button and choose a color set that will be used to display the selected button when you press Enter on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control to activate it Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Default colors Select the down arrow button and choose a color set that will be used to display unselected buttons on the menu Choose None if you do not want to use color sets to display button highlighting Use subtitle colors If there are buttons placed in a graphic subtitle you can set the color of the unselected buttons Select the down arrow button and choose No if you do not want to use color sets for unselected buttons Select
338. tting or select the box and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the setting If the Timeout setting is longer than the menu length the last frame is held until the timeout duration When Activate button is selected in the Command drop down list choose the button you want to activate if the user hasn t activated another button before the Timeout duration has passed Choose Selected if you want to activate the user s currently selected button For each menu you can allow or suspend operation of individual buttons on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control Turning buttons on or off helps to ensure the viewer will see your project as you intended it For example you can use the Remote Buttons controls to prevent the user from navigating away from the menu before it s finished playing To turn each button on or off select the box click the down arrow button l and choose On or Off from the drop down list Note When Off is selected from the menu the button is not available Item Title play Stop Time chapter search Previous up 124 CHAPTER 11 Description Allows the user to press the Title button on the remote to skip to a specific video music video compilation or picture compilation Allows the user to press the Stop button on the remote to stop the disc Allows the user to press the Time button on the remote to skip to a specific play time or chapter Allows t
339. tting up your project we recommend using the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If necessary insert empty subtitle tracks to maintain the track sequence so that the disc will continue to play the same track number when you transition playback between titles For more information see Adding a subtitle track on page 90 Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which video angle will be played in a destination title Choose No change to use the last set track Note f you use the Set video angle control to change the video angle the new angle will be used when you navigate between titles unless another button action end action or user action via the remote control changes the angle For each media file you can allow or suspend operation of individual buttons on the DVD or Blu ray Disc remote control Turning buttons on or off helps to ensure the viewer will see your project as you intended it If you have an animated menu for example turning off buttons will prevent the user from navigating away from the menu before it s finished playing To turn each button on or off choose On or Off from the menu Note When Off is selected from the menu the button is not available Item Title play Stop Time chapter search Previous up Next Fast scan Description Allows the user to press the Title button on the remote to skip to a specific video or music video comp
340. ttings from project to project 57 copying subtitle event formatting 94 creating custom masks 97 graphic subtitles 91 projects 25 scene selection menus 41 Scripts 152 subtitles from Vegas regions 93 crop and video effects keyframes 48 50 custom masks creating 97 frame masks 99 highlight masks 100 thumbnail masks 98 custom menus reapplying layout 36 using layered graphics 102 using single layered graphics 106 custom themes 108 customizing grid settings 179 preferences 182 187 toolbars 181 182 debugging scripts 156 Default prepare folder 187 deleting keyframes 49 markers 77 objects 56 pages from menus 36 Scripts 156 text from music video compilations 64 text from picture compilations 71 themes 108 Destination chapter 42 78 116 128 132 136 140 154 disc properties 143 discs erasing 177 menu based 35 music video compilations 61 picture compilations 67 setting introduction media 28 setting start item 28 single movie 75 downloading media files from Web 27 ii INDEX DVD Scripts window 23 DVDs burning 168 170 burning 8 cm discs to 12 cm discs 171 editing button order for menus 54 button order for videos 79 button properties 115 120 color sets 44 crop settings 49 menu page properties 121 scripts 153 155 source projects 32 subtitle event color sets 95 Editing preferences 185 editing text in menus 39 in music video compilations 64 in pictu
341. tton to start preparing if necessary and writing your mastering files 12 The application displays a dialog box indicating that the mastering completed successfully click the OK button to continue 174 CHAPTER 16 Preparing and burning Blu ray Disc projects Preparing a Blu ray Disc project During the prepare process DVD Architect Pro software develops the image file iso needed to burn your project without actually Starting the burning process 1 Click the Make Blu ray Disc button The Make Blu ray Disc wizard is displayed f Make Blu ray Disc Select Operation to Perform Prepare I Prepare the current project to a specified folder Burn yan A Prepare the current project and burn it to a disc or burn a previously prepared TE project 2 Click the Prepare button The Select Image page is displayed 3 Inthe Prepare image box type the file path and file name of your new image file where you want to prepare your project or click Browse to choose a location and file name 4 Click Next 5 The files in your project are analyzed to ensure that they are ready for burning and a message list is displayed with the results You can also view the final size of your project a Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Message Type Description Informational Produces a valid disc and does not require any action Warning Produces a valid disc and does not require any action
342. type of project you chose to create To change any of these settings choose Properties from the File menu For more information see Setting Project Properties on page 143 7 Click the Summary tab and complete the information in the fields as desired This information is saved with the project Field Description Title Type the title of the project Artist Type the name of the artist who performed in the project Engineer Type the name of the person who mixed or edited the project Copyright Type copyright information about the project Comments Type any comments you want to associate with the project 8 Click OK to create your project Opening an existing project 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog is displayed 2 Locate and select the project dar file you want to open 3 Click the Open button Tip f media files cannot be located when you open a project you can choose to leave the media offline and continue to edit your project If you restore the source media file at a later time the project will open normally 26 CHAPTER 3 Choosing your media files DVD Architect Pro software supports a wide variety of media files You can use the Explorer window to find and add media files to your project 4 m DVDA Sample Project ie a x E gt F EE Mame Sze Type E lstplayl m2v 1 61MB Movie Clip E lstplayl mpg 300 00KE Movie Clip F Istplaylaudi 936 13KB WAVE Audio File E Istplay2 m2v 3 60MB Mo
343. u choose Reapply Theme Layout to realign objects at any time For more information on themes see Working with themes on page 108 Note f you created menus using layered psd files choose Reapply Layout from File from the Edit menu to restore the menu to match the appearance of the saved psd file For more information see Reapplying a file s layout to menu objects on page 36 Centering objects 1 Select the Selection tool or Sizing tool 2 Select the objects you want to align You can select multiple files at once using the Shift key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files 3 Click a button on the left edge of the workspace e The Horizontal Centering button HH moves the selected objects to the horizontal center of the screen e The Vertical Centering button moves the selected objects to the vertical center of the screen Adjusting object spacing 1 Select the Selection tool or Sizing tool 2 Select the objects you want to adjust You can select multiple files at once using the Shift key for consecutive files or the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive files You must have at least three objects selected to adjust the objects vertical or horizontal spacing 3 Click a button on the left edge of the workspace e The Space Across button adjusts the selected items so an equal amount of horizontal space exists between the objects e The Space Down button adjusts the s
344. u often see on the edges of moving areas Note The Apply deinterlace filter check box will be unavailable if your video adapter does not support pixel shading 8 Ifyou want to adjust color reproduction for video previews use the color management controls a Select the Use color management check box b Select the Use Studio RGB check box if your source media conforms to studio RGB color black 16 and white 235 and you will be previewing on your computer s CRT or LCD monitor When the check box is selected the studio RGB range is expanded to 0 to 255 to conform to a computer display Clear the check box if you will be previewing on a TV monitor or if your source media does not conform to studio RGB color c From the Monitor color profile drop down list choose the color profile that best matches your display You can obtain ICC ICM color profiles from the display manufacturer or you can create your own if you have a calibration system Note The Use color management check box will be unavailable if your video adapter does not support gamma adjustment 9 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button Editing tab The Editing tab allows you to specify options for editing your project Preference Description Action safe area Allows you to specify a percentage for the border size in the video s safe area Video within this safe area will always be visible on a television monitor The
345. u ray Disc projects Markers do not need to occur at I frames in Blu ray Disc projects a Marker not snapped to I frame i Drag marker to nearest I frame reference point 2 Scene Chapter 2 Scene Chepter OD 0000 poo 01 25 i OO 00 01 25 E E E S L A A l frame reference points Renaming markers 1 Right click the scene chapter marker chapter marker or buttons on video marker on the timeline and choose Rename Marker from the shortcut menu 2 Type anew name in the edit box 3 Press Enter Moving markers To change the position of a scene chapter marker chapter marker or buttons on video marker drag the marker on the timeline to the new location Deleting markers To delete a marker on the timeline right click the marker and choose Delete Marker from the shortcut menu You can also right click timeline s marker bar and choose Delete All Markers from the shortcut menu to clear all markers CREATING A SINGLE MOVIE DISC OR TITLE 77 00 00 01 15 pa SERNA A Timeline marker bar io P Insert Scene Chapter Marker M MDE Video inl Insert Chapter Marker Lal i Insert Buttons on Video Marker Transformations wE Timeline Note DVD Architect Pro automatically inserts an initial scene chapter marker in all video files You cannot delete this marker Loading markers Click the Load Markers button to clear existing markers and reload any marker changes you made in the file with a video editor such as
346. u s loop point when it is fully opaque 82 CHAPTER 7 Chapter 8 Creating Playlists A playlist contains a user defined sequence of movies chapter markers music video compilations or picture compilations A playlist can contain only titles that are part of the project which are played from start to finish and an end action determines what happens at the end of the playlist Playlists do not increase the size of your project Notes Each playlist ina DVD project can contain a maximum of 99 titles with 99 chapters in each title e Each playlist in a Blu ray Disc project can contain a maximum of 999 titles with 255 chapters in each title Tip fyou want to create a series of videos that play sequentially you can create a music video compilation made up of video files This sort of video compilation behaves much like a playlist but it will be written to your disc as a single video title set If you have a project with many short videos this method can save you from rerendering and combining media Adding a playlist to a menu 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 From the Insert menu choose Playlist The Select Titles dialog is displayed Select Titles Title Duration Eal istplay3 24p 00 00 04 29 Eal SongVideo 00 00 49 02 Band Photos 00 00 28 09 Ta Ficture Compilation 2 00 00 19 29 J Music Compilation 1 00 0 1 38 03 Select all
347. ubtitle event s position on the timeline determines when it is displayed in your project and its duration determines how long it is displayed on screen Editing a single event s position 1 2 3 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible Drag an event in the timeline to change its position If the Auto Ripple button 75 is selected subtitle events to the right of the event you drag will move with the event you drag If the Auto Ripple button is not selected only the event you drag will move the positions of all existing events are preserved Note Events will snap to the cursor and to other event edges If you want to trim an event to a specific time position the cursor at that point on the timeline and drag your event edge to the cursor If you want two subtitle events to be adjacent on the timeline turn off Auto Ripple and drag an event edge until it snaps to the other event s edge You can turn snapping on or off by choosing Enable Snapping from the Options menu Note Events are forced to frame boundaries when the Quantize to Frames button is selected in the Timeline window ADDING AUDIO VIDEO AND SUBTITLES 93 Editing a series of events 1 Select the first subtitle event you want to edit 2 Position the cursor and click the Play button to st
348. ue but preparation may fail You can specify a different folder on the Burning tab of the Preferences dialog Choose a folder on the drive where you have the most available space Informational messages One or more menu links overlap This message indicates that a button or text box is overlapping another link If you re creating a DVD project you can burn your project with overlapping links but your disc can be more difficult to navigate when you highlight one link the overlapping link may also be highlighted If you re creating a Blu ray Disc project you cannot prepare your project with overlapping menu links you must fix the issue before proceeding Navigate to the page and move the link as necessary When you preview the page move the highlight among links until you can see which objects overlap One or more text objects are outside the title safe area When a text object is outside the safe area it is likely to be clipped when viewed on a television Navigate to the page and move the text as necessary Tip To display or hide safe area borders in the workspace choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Title Safe Area or Show Action Safe Area from the submenu Safe areas are displayed as borders around your video to represent the visible areas for action and titles The outer border marks the area that will be visible on a television screen and the inner border is the suggested area for titles 210 APP
349. ume by clicking the Run button Tip You can also press Ctrl R Current script Choose a script from the drop down list to specify the script you want to display Command list Displays the steps and commands in the script SPRMs GPRMs Click the SPRMs or GPRMs button to view the current settings for both memory registers Renaming a script 1 Right click a DVD script in the Project Overview window and choose Rename from the shortcut menu 2 Type anew name in the edit box 3 Press Enter Deleting a script Right click a DVD script in the Project Overview window and choose Delete from the shortcut menu 156 CHAPTER 13 Setting a DVD start script A DVD start script is the script that will execute when the DVD is inserted in a DVD player This script takes precedence over the item you ve designated as your disc start item For more information see Setting the disc start item on page 28 To set your project start script right click a DVD script in the Project Overview window and choose DVD Start Script from the shortcut menu Tip You can also set the DVD start script in the Disc Properties section of the Project Properties window For more information see Disc properties on page 143 General Purpose Register Memories GPRMs DVD scripts use General Purpose Register Memories GPRMs to temporarily store values or assets assigned by a script command For example you can assign a GPRMs value to another GPRM s value an SPRM s
350. ur own When you select a button in the workspace the Properties window displays information about the selected button To see more information about the frame image and its mask click the Media button in the Button Properties pane and look under the Frame Properties heading e The Frame Media box displays the path to the current frame file e The Mask box displays the path to the current mask file Tip f you re using layered psd files you can choose which layer you want to use as the thumbnail or mask image Click the expand button to expand the Frame Media or Mask heading and choose the layer you want to use from the Layer drop down list or choose Composited layer to use the mixed layers In the following example the white portion of the thumbnail mask image represents the portion of the frame that will be visible in the menu The black and gray portions represent sections where the menu background and underlying thumbnail will show through Masked Thumbnail Frame Highlight Mask Masked Thumbnail You can create your own masks using the image editing application of your choice Create the mask as an image the same size as your frame image or as a layer in the frame image The masked area can be any shape and you can use any supported media file format as a mask Tip You can use gradients to feather the edges of a masked image Description When an image that does not support transparency such as BMP or JPG is used as a ma
351. ur text changes e F2 Ctrl Enter e Tab Moving text 1 Select a text box with the Sizing tool 2 Move the selected text using one of the following options e Drag the text box e Click the Transformations button in the Properties window Drag an object in the workspace or type values in the X position and Y position boxes to set the object s center point Note The X and Y coordinates are based on the frame size of your project For example if you re creating an NTSC project with a frame size of 720x480 0 0 is the top left corner of the frame and 720 480 is the lower right corner Setting loop points When a menu s action is set to loop you can specify a loop point to indicate the point where looped playback will begin Notes Menu buttons will not appear until playback reaches the loop point if Show before loop point is set to No in the Button Properties window For more information see Button Properties on page 115 If Show before loop point is set to Yes in the Button Properties window buttons will appear before the loop point Keyframe animation may be applied to the buttons For more information see Crop and video effects keyframes on page 48 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Set the menu s end action a On the Menu Page Properties window click the End Action button b Click Command click the down arrow button
352. urning and a message list is displayed with the results You can also view the final size of your project a Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments Message Type Informational E3 Warning j Error Description Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action Produces a valid DVD and does not require any action Produces an invalid DVD and must be resolved b Click the Optimize button to display the Optimize Disc dialog where you can make changes to individual media file and project settings often allowing you to resolve warnings or errors For more information see Optimizing your project on page 29 c Click the Next button 6 The subtitle and menu highlight mask files in your project are analyzed to ensure that they are ready for burning and a message list is displayed with the results Review the messages and make any necessary adjustments 7 Click the Finish button Your project is rendered to the folder you specified 8 The application displays a dialog box indicating that the prepare completed successfully click the OK button to continue Burning a DVD project DVD Architect Pro allows you to burn current projects previously prepared projects or previously mastered projects For information about preparing a project for burning see Preparing a DVD project on page 167 For more information about mastering see Writing a master for replication on page 172 1 Click the Make DVD button
353. urrent theme Explorer reapplies theme when you double click media files in the Explorer window the new file is added and layout the objects are realigned on the menu When the check box is cleared the media files are added to the menu and existing object positions are preserved Use best stretching algorithm Select this check box if you want bi cubic stretching to be used during rendering This during rendering setting produces higher quality images but rendering time is increased When the check box is cleared bi linear stretching is used 182 CHAPTER 17 Preference Automatically open last project on startup Media goes offline on loss of focus Multimedia keyboard support Disable popup animations Automatically link similar audio and video files Skip drive database autodetect drive capabilities Disable screen saver during preview Double clicking themes applies them to all pages of a menu Automatically name markers Display filename labels on media events in trackview Enable Windows XP Theme support Check project file type associations at startup Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV Always estimate maximum size Use Direct Sound Surround Mapper Recently used project list Default All Video tab Description When check box is selected the last project that was open when you exited will reopen When this check box is selected media files are released when DVD Architect Pro
354. urrent toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order For example if you want to add the Insert Media button and want it to precede the Enable Snapping button select the Enable Snapping button in the Current toolbar buttons list CUSTOMIZING DVD ARCHITECT PRO SOFTWARE 181 Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Curent toolbar buttons Close Separator Separator ik Restricted Properties Enable Snapping Fa a Get Media from the Web Add gt Separator E Save Project As i Preview F9 x Delete Delete lt Remove Separator Help F1 HE Insert Media Cirl F Back to Parent Back wn kS Make DVD Move Up Move Down 4 Click the Add button The new button is added above the selected button in the Current toolbar buttons list Tip You can also double click a button to add it to the toolbar 5 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and close the dialog Removing buttons from the toolbar You may remove buttons and separators from the main toolbar If you have added buttons to the toolbar removing unused or unwanted buttons allows you to maximize the toolbar s space You can remove toolbar buttons via the Customize Toolbar dialog You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on this dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed 2
355. utton colors Activated button colors or Inactive button colors color set is applied to the masked area for each button depending on its current state For more information see Creating custom masks on page 97 If the highlight mask image uses layers you can choose to use a single layer or the combined layers for your highlight mask 1 Click the expand button next to the Highlight mask heading to expand the controls 2 Select the Layer box and click the down arrow button 3 Choose a layer from the drop down list If you want to use the combined layers choose Composited layer To specify how transparency is determined from the mask select the Highlight mask mapping control click the down arrow button and choose a setting from the drop down list Transparency Maps the alpha channel in the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors Activated button colors or Inactive button colors drop down list OQ Cy The most opaque pixels those with alpha values of 192 to 255 are eee mapped to the color set s fill color color 1 and the most transparent pixels those with alpha values of 0 to 63 are mapped to the color set s transparent color color 4 For more information see Using color sets on page 44 Intensity Maps the average pixel intensity of the menu highlight mask to the four colors used in the color set selected in the Selected button colors or Activa
356. value a number or link to an asset in your project Since only six GPRMs 0 5 are available for storage you should attempt to plan your script ahead of time and use the GPRMs wisely System Parameter Register Memories SPRMs DVD players use variables called System Parameter Register Memories SPRMs to specify the current settings for the player such as the audio stream camera angle or parental level You can use the power of scripting in DVD Architect Pro to access these variables during the navigation and playback of your project allowing you to customize the viewing experience based on certain conditions The SPRMs are defined below SPRM Description 0 Menu language code For more information see Language codes on page 158 Audio track number 2 Subtitle track number 3 Video angle number 4 Title number 5 Video title set VTS number 6 Title program chain number 7 Chapter number 8 Highlighted button number 9 Navigation timer 10 Navigation timer destination which track to play when navigation timer in SPRM 9 expires 11 Player audio mixing mode for karaoke 12 Country code for parental management 13 Parental management level 14 Player configuration for video 15 Player configuration for audio 16 Initial audio language code 17 Initial audio language code extension 18 Initial language 19 Initial subtitle language extension 20 Player region code For more information see Region codes on page 159 21 Reserved 22 Rese
357. ve the current file Tip To change a file quickly drag a file from the Explorer window to the Audio box A media file s end action determines what happens after the media file ends Item Command Destination Destination chapter Destination item Destination button 128 CHAPTER 11 Description Determines what happens after the last track plays Link You can link to any menu media file and chapter point Use the Destination Destination chapter Destination item or Destination button controls to set the target You can also use the Destination button control to choose the default selected button in the destination menu Stop Your disc will stop playing When Link is selected in the Command drop down list choose the menu or media file that will be displayed Note f you want the user s remote control navigation to follow the same path as your end actions set the media file s end action and the remote s Menu button to the same target destination If no menu has been displayed Most recent menu will display the first menu on the disc When your end action links to a video music video compilation or picture compilation choose the specific chapter in the destination file that will be displayed When your end action links to a menu choose Start or Loop Point to indicate the point from which the menu will be played When your end action links to a menu you can choose the button you want to use as the d
358. vie Clip lstplay2 mpq 396 00KB Movie Clip F Istplay audi 938 55KB WAVE Audio File E lstplay3 24p 135MB Movie Clip lstplay3 mpg 392 00KB Movie Clip 1 4 Di E Li a Fer Skeeter A rn F Explorer Themes Buttons Backgrounds For more information see Explorer window Alt 3 on page 17 Note DVD Architect Pro software includes support for many file types and can convert your media to the formats required for output as needed However for best performance decreased disc preparation time and recompression use existing rendered files For more information about the types of files that can be used without recompression see Rendering files for your project on page 25 Downloading media from the Web You can also download media files from the Web for use in your project 1 From the File menu choose Get Media from the Web Your Web browser starts and attempts to connect to the Internet 2 Search for and download files to use in your project Previewing media files You can preview media files from the Explorer window at any time before adding them to your project To do so simply click once on the file to select it and then click the Start Preview button To stop the preview click the Stop Preview button E You can enable automatic previewing of selected files by clicking the Auto Preview button When this option is enabled any file you select in the Explorer window is automatically previewed To
359. where looped playback begins LEARNING THE DVD ARCHITECT PRO WORKSPACE 21 Playlists window Ctrl Alt 2 You can use playlists to play a sequence of movies chapter markers music video compilations or picture compilations A playlist can contain only titles that are part of the project which are played from start to finish and an end action determines what happens at the end of the playlist From the View menu choose Playlists to show or hide the Playlists window For more information see Creating Playlists on page 83 Start Chapter Length B Bb Playistt 1 SongVideo 1 Scene Chapter 00 00 49 116 2 Band Photos 1 quitarist png 00 00 28 328 3 Music Compilation 1 1 SongAudio wav 00 01 38 251 Timeline Playlists Compilation DVD Scripts Insert Playlist Adds a new playlist to Current playlist Allows you to choose the playlist that you want your project to display Delete Playlist Removes the current Playlist item list Lists the titles in the playlist playlist from your project Insert Playlist Items Displays the Select Title dialog where you can add titles to the current playlist 22 CHAPTER 2 DVD Scripts Ctrl Alt 3 From the View menu choose DVD Scripts to display the DVD Scripts window You can use the Script Properties controls in the Properties window to adjust settings for each statement in your DVD script Note Scripting is not available for Blu ray Disc projects do dh X Script La
360. x s position These coordinates are based on the frame size of your project For example if you re creating an NTSC DV project with a frame size of 720x480 0 0 is the top left corner of the frame and 720 480 is the lower right corner e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value e Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value X size Edit the X size and Y size values to change the size of the selected text box Y size e Select the number and type a new value e Use the spin controls to adjust the value e Select the value and click the down arrow button to display a slider that you can use to adjust the value Maintain aspect ratio Select the Maintain aspect ratio box click the down arrow button and choose Yes from the drop down list if you do not want the text to be stretched when you change the height or width of the text box Subtitle Event The Subtitle Event page is displayed in the Properties window when you select a subtitle event in the Timeline window Choose a setting from the Colors drop down list to assign a color set to the selected subtitle events You can create a custom color set for each title in your project using the Color Sets page in the Media Properties window Note Subtitle events are drawn over the entire screen If the color set s transparent color is not fully transparent the scree
361. ximately 1 4 GB DVD 2 2 7 G 8 cm single sided single layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 2 7 GB DVD 3 2 9 G 8 cm double sided single layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 2 9 GB DVD 4 5 3 G 8 cm double sided double layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 5 3 GB DVD 5 4 7 G 12 cm single sided single layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 4 7 GB DVD 9 8 5 G 12 cm single sided double layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 8 5 GB DVD 10 9 4 G 12 cm double sided single layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 9 4 GB DVD 18 17 G 12 cm double sided double layer DVD with a capacity of approximately 17 GB Allows you to specify the number of sides one sided or two sided that the mastered DVD will contain Allows you to specify for which side you re currently creating master files Note Available only when Number of sides is 2 Allows you to specify the number of layers that the mastered DVD will contain Choose 1 if your project will be burned to a single layer DVD or choose 2 if your project will be burned to a dual layer DVD Item Direction of translation Disc diameter Advanced DVD ROM capacity sectors Customer information Description Allows you to specify the direction in which reading will occur on the second layer of a dual layer disc e Parallel track path Read from the inner radius of the disc to the outer radius
362. xt to the end of the layer name tells DVD Architect Pro software that this layer is used for a next navigation button Your menu could also include button 03 thumbnail up button 03 thumbnail back or button 03 thumbnail prev The button is a wood textured arrow that was created using several layers that were merged to a single layer You can omit this layer if you plan to use the Media page in the Button Properties pane to assign a thumbnail For example you could use this method to use a title s video as an animated or still thumbnail c Create a layer named button 03 thumbnailmask next for the button s mask image optional The mask determines which part of the thumbnail will be visible inside the button The white area represents the portion of the thumbnail that will be visible in the button The black area sets the size of the button and represents the portion of the thumbnail that is masked to allow the menu background to show through d Create a layer named button 03 highlight next for the button s highlight mask The highlight mask determines where highlighting will be applied when a button is selected or activated The button 03 thumbnailmask next layer was duplicated and renamed to restrict highlighting to the arrow The white area represents the portion of the button that will be highlighted when the button is selected or activated If your psd file will use a menu specific highlight mask you can omit this
363. y is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software DVD Architect Pro software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using DVD Architect Pro software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices ACID ACIDized ACIDplanet com ACIDplanet the ACIDplanet logo ACID XMC Artist Integrated the Artist Integrated logo Beatmapper Cinescore CD Architect DVD Architect Jam Trax Perfect Clarity Audio Photo Go Sound Forge Super Duper Music Looper Transparent Technology Vegas Vision Series and Visual Creation Studio are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Creative Software Inc in the United States and other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countries Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in t
364. yed as gt and an unselected keyframe is displayed as a D Editing size and position settings After you ve inserted a keyframe you can set the size and or position settings for the object in the Transformation page of the Properties window Note You can use the keyframe tool in the workspace for a visual representation of an item s keyframe size and position settings 1 Inthe workspace select the object to which you have added keyframes 2 Inthe Properties window click the Transformations button 3 Edit the size and position settings on the Transformations page The Keyframe tool From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and then choose Keyframe Tool to view and edit information about the size and position changes defined by an object s transformation keyframes For more information see Transformation keyframes on page 52 Tip f you want to view size and position changes even when the keyframe tool is not selected choose Workspace Overlays from the View menu and then choose Show Keyframe Overlay from the submenu Select objects with the keyframe overlay displayed to see a graphical display of size and position changes for the object 1 Double click a menu in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the menu you want to edit 2 Select an object in the workspace with the Keyframe tool Lines and arrows are displayed to indicate the currently assigned path Control points mark the loc
365. yed during playback Each set of subtitles is added as a separate track in the timeline You can add up to 32 subtitle tracks for each title 16 tracks for widescreen assets ADDING AUDIO VIDEO AND SUBTITLES 89 Adding a subtitle track 1 Double click a title in the Project Overview window or navigate in the workspace to open the video 2 From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window 3 Click the Insert Track button 2 and choose Insert Subtitle Track in the Timeline window An empty subtitle track is added to the timeline above the video track 4 Click the arrow next to the Track Language button 7 and choose a language to identify the track 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to create the subtitle tracks for your project When setting up your project it s a good practice to use the same track sequence for all videos picture compilations and music video compilations If you transition playback between titles the disc will continue to play the same track number For example assume the first title on your disc has the following track order Track Language 1 English 2 French 3 Spanish Now assume the second title on your disc has the following track order Track Language 1 French 2 English 3 Spanish If you re playing English dialogue in the first title audio track 1 continues playing when you skip to the second title so you d hear French dialogue in the second title Using the sa
366. you choose Reapply Layout from File from the Edit menu Ifyou remove a layer the corresponding object s image will be removed Ifyou rename a layer to an invalid name the corresponding object s image will be removed Ifyourename a layer to a valid name the object corresponding to the previous layer name will be taken offline The object associated with the new layer name is added when you choose Reapply Layout from File from the Edit menu 1 In your image editing application start a new image Your image should match the height of the output format frame size and the width should include compensation for the output format s pixel aspect ratio Output Format Aspect Ratio Menu Size 4 3 NTSC 720 x 480 9091 655 x 480 Widescreen NTSC 720 x 480 1 2121 873 x 480 4 3 PAL 720 x 576 1 0926 787 X 576 Widescreen PAL 720 x 576 1 4568 1049 x 576 1280 x 720 1 0 1280 x 720 1440 x 1080 1 3333 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1080 1 0 1920 x 1080 USING MASKS MENUS AND THEMES 103 2 Create layers for your menu background images a Create a layer set named background 01 group optional b Create a layer named background 01 for the menu background Static titles images and other background elements should be merged into this layer The woodgrain background and text were originally created on separate layers but they were merged into a single layer c Create a layer named background 01 highlight for the menu s highlight mask optiona
367. your file 92 CHAPTER 9 Creating subtitles from regions in a Vegas project If you ve used Vegas software to create the video for your DVD Architect Pro project you can use regions in the Vegas project to create subtitles The length of the region determines the subtitle event length and the region text is used as subtitle text 1 a eo a a Save the regions in your Vegas project to a text file a Open your project in Vegas software b Create regions in the project where the name of the region is the subtitle text you want to display c Verify that no regions are overlapping d From the Tools menu choose Scripting and then choose Run Script from the submenu The Run Script dialog is displayed e Run the Export Regions As Subtitles js script to save your regions list as a text file Switch to the DVD Architect Pro window Double click a title in the Project Overview window or double click a button on a menu in the workspace to open it From the View menu choose Timeline to display the Timeline window if it isn t already visible From the Insert menu choose Subtitle Track A new subtitle track is added to the timeline Click the Import Subtitles button i in the Timeline window The Import Subtitles dialog is displayed In the Import Subtitles dialog browse to the file you saved in step 1 When you click Open the contents of the selected subtitle file are added to the track Adjusting subtitle event timing A s

DVD Architect Pro 6.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents